Funcional Check Update

Technical
Publications
2205009
Revision 13
CT ProSpeed Series
Functional Check /Adjustment
Copyrighte 1998-2003 by General Electric Company
Operating Documentation
CT PROSPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2205009
D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

WARNING D IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.
D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

AVERTISSEMENT D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
D NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

AVISO D SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
D NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.
a
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA

DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
D NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
D O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE

SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
b
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should
be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this
equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and
cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no
practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to
take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to
radiation.
It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the
recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports
available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the
International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents,
and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall
be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required.
In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical
work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
c
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in
shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General
Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the
carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held
for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested
within this 14 day period.
Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / 8*285–3449 immediately after damage is found. At
this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item
damaged and extent of damage.
Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS
GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this documentation.
Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service represenatives.
CAUTION
Do not use the following devices near this equipment. Use of these devices near this equipment could cause
this equipment to malfunction.
Devices not to be used near this equipment:
Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as; cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter,
radio–controlled toy, etc.
Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment.
Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients an

d
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE PRIMARY REASON FOR CHANGE

0 . . . . . . Jan. 5, 1998 . . . Initial release. Format is changed from ToolBook to Acrobat. The structure and contents are
........................ basically not changed.
1 . . . . . Jan. 27, 1998 . . . Version 3.01 for Zj–Adv. Image performance verification for Zj–Adv.
2 . . . . . Feb. 23, 1998 . . . Corrected Gantry velocity offset/speed adj.
3 . . . . . May 15, 1998 . . . 15/16/20/24 Autofilming.
4 . . . . . . Jul. 30, 1998 . . . Added XG +5 V power supply adjustment.
5 . . . . . Aug. 28, 1998 . . . Revised Software Loading procedures.
6 . . . . . . Sep. 4, 1998 . . . Revised Software Loading procedures (V6.03).
7 . . . . . Aug. 12, 1999 . . . Revised Software Loading procedures (Zj V5.03); Added corrections about Gantry stop position.
8 . . . . . Dec. 17, 1999 . . . Added CIF SW1 setting.
9 . . . . . Dec. 27, 1999 . . . SI conversion table
10 . . . . June 20, 2000 . . . SI unit Convertion Table for lbf–ft
11 . . . . . July 4, 2001 . . . Added the Software Loading with Sony MOD Drive.
12 . . . . . April 7, 2003 . . . Added: New HDD for Jumper setting
13 . . . . . Oct. 8, 2003 . . . Added: New FDD
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV
Title page . . . . . . . . 13 5–1 to 5–10 . . . . . . . . 0 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 3–1 to 3–2 . . . . . . . . . 0 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . blank
Title page rear . blank 5–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
a to d . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5–12 to 5–15 . . . . . . 0 3–3 to 3–4 . . . . . . . . . 0 Tab 6 (DAS/Detector) Tab 9 (Switch/Jump-
A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 5–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3–5 to 3–6 . . . . . . . . . 2 i.................. 0 er Setting of Boards/
B . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 5–17 to 5–44 . . . . . . 0 3–7 to 3–9 . . . . . . . . . 0 ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank Devices)
i to ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6–1 to 6–47 . . . . . . . . 0 3–10 . . . . . . . . . . blank 1–1 to 1–5 . . . . . . . . . 0 i to iii . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
iii to v . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 6–48 . . . . . . . . . . blank 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1–6 . . . . . . . . . . . blank iv . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
vi . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 7–1 to 7–20 . . . . . . . . 0 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . blank 2–1 to 2–9 . . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 to 1–65 . . . . . . . 13
7–21 to 7–23 . . . . . . 1 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . blank 1–66 . . . . . . . . . . blank
7–24 to 7–27 . . . . . . 0 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Tab 1 (Introduction) 2–1 to 2–71 . . . . . . . 12
7–28 . . . . . . . . . . blank 5–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Tab 7 (X–ray Genera-
i.................. 0 2–72 . . . . . . . . . . blank
5–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 tor)
ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 3–1 to 3–10 . . . . . . . . 0
5–5 to 5–11 . . . . . . . . 0 i.................. 0
1–1 to 1–6 . . . . . . . . . 0 Tab 3 (Operator Con- 4–1 to 4–2 . . . . . . . . . 0
5–12 . . . . . . . . . . blank ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
2–1 to 2–5 . . . . . . . . . 0 sole) 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
6–1 to 6–11 . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 to 1–9 . . . . . . . . . 0
2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . blank i.................. 0 4–4 to 4–6 . . . . . . . . . 0
6–12 . . . . . . . . . . blank 1–10 . . . . . . . . . . blank
3–1 to 3–2 . . . . . . . . . 0 ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 5–1 to 5–7 . . . . . . . . . 0
7–1 to 7–17 . . . . . . . . 0 2–1 to 2–8 . . . . . . . . . 0
1–1 to 1–14 . . . . . . . . 0 5–8 . . . . . . . . . . . blank
7–18 . . . . . . . . . . blank 3–1 to 3–3 . . . . . . . . . 0
2–1 to 2–11 . . . . . . . . 0 6–1 to 6–3 . . . . . . . . . 0
Tab 2 (System) 3–4 . . . . . . . . . . . blank 6–4 . . . . . . . . . . . blank
2–12 . . . . . . . . . . blank
i to ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1–1 to 1–22 . . . . . . . . 0 Tab 5 (Table) 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . blank
Tab APPENDIX
2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Tab 4 (Gantry) i.................. 0
A–1 to A–4 . . . . . . . . 0
2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . blank i to ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank Tab 8 (DC III)
3–1 to 3–49 . . . . . . . 11 1–1 to 1–9 . . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 to 1–11 . . . . . . . . 0 i.................. 0
3–50 . . . . . . . . . . blank 1–10 . . . . . . . . . . blank 1–12 . . . . . . . . . . blank ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
4–1 to 4–50 . . . . . . . 11 2–1 to 2–14 . . . . . . . . 0 2–1 to 2–14 . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 to 1–3 . . . . . . . . . 0 Blank/Rear cover . . . –
A
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
B
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 5 2205009
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION (TAB 1)
General
Torque Value for Screw Tightening
Common Procedures
SYSTEM (TAB 2)
Checks during System Installation
Software Loading (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
Software Loading (Zj)
X–ray Alignment
System Calibration
Image Performance Verification
OPERATOR CONSOLE (TAB 3)
OC Components
OC Operation
GANTRY (TAB 4)
DC Power Supplies
Rotational Mechanism
Rotational Operation
Slip Rings and Brushes
Tilt Operation
Collimator
Table and Gantry
i
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 5 2205009
CONTENTS (continued)
TABLE (TAB 5)
Elevation Function
Longitudinal Function
Table Accessories
DAS/DETECTOR (TAB 6)
Detector Related Devices
DAS Operation
X–RAY GENERATOR (TAB 7)
X–ray Tube
KV and MA
PDU
Power Supply Adjustment
DC III (TAB 8)
DC III
SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING OF BOARDS/DEVICES (TAB 9)
Operator Console (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
Operator Console (Zj)
Gantry
DAS
X–ray Generator
PDU (Power Distribution Unit)
APPENDIX
Symbols and Classification
ii
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 10 2205009
NOTE (continued)
Torque Notation Changed to SI Unit

The unit expressed on the torque wrench supplied by GEYMS has been changed from “kgfScm” to “NSm” (SI
Unit).
Therefore, for the torque values (kgfScm) of this manual, convert “NSm” using the following conversion formula
and table.
Conversion Formula:
xx (NSm) = xxxx (kgfScm) x 0.098
Conversion Table:
1 kgfScm = 0.098 NSm

Coversion: kgfScm –> NSm
kgfScm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NSm
0 0 0.0981 0.1961 0.2942 0.3923 0.4903 0.5884 0.6865 0.7845 0.8826
10 0.9807 1.0787 1.1768 1.2748 1.3729 1.4710 1.5690 1.6671 1.7652 1.8632
20 1.9613 2.0594 2.1574 2.2555 2.3536 2.4516 2.5497 2.6478 2.7458 2.8439
30 2.9420 3.0400 3.1381 3.2361 3.3342 3.4323 3.5303 3.6284 3.7265 3.8245
40 3.9226 4.0207 4.1187 4.2168 4.3149 4.4129 4.5110 4.6091 4.7071 4.8052
50 4.9033 5.0013 5.0994 5.1974 5.2955 5.3936 5.4916 5.5897 5.6878 5.7858
60 5.8840 5.9820 6.0800 6.1781 6.2762 6.3742 6.4723 6.5704 6.6684 6.7665
70 6.8646 6.9626 7.0607 7.1587 7.2568 7.3549 7.4529 7.5510 7.6491 7.7474
80 7.8452 7.9433 8.0413 8.1394 8.2375 8.3355 8.4336 8.5317 8.6297 8.7278
90 8.8260 8.9239 9.0220 9.1200 9.2181 9.3162 9.4142 9.5123 9.6104 9.7084
100 9.8065
iii
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 10 2205009
NOTE (continued)
Conversion Formula:
xx (kgfScm) = xxxx (NSm) x 10.2
Conversion Table:
1 NSm = 10.2 kgfScm

Coversion: NSm –> kgfScm
NSm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
kgfScm
0 0 10 20 31 41 51 61 71 82 92
10 102 112 122 133 143 153 163 173 184 194
20 204 214 224 235 245 255 265 275 286 296
30 306 316 326 337 347 357 367 377 388 398
40 408 418 428 439 449 459 469 479 490 500
50 510 520 530 541 551 561 571 581 592 602
60 612 622 632 643 653 663 673 683 694 704
70 714 724 734 745 755 765 775 785 796 806
80 816 826 836 847 857 867 877 887 898 908
90 918 928 938 949 959 969 979 989 1000 1010
100 1020
iv
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 10 2205009
NOTE (continued)
Referrence for lbfSft

Conversion Formula:
xx (lbfSft) = xxxx (NSm) x 0.737
xx (NSm) = xxxx (lbfSft) x 1.356
Conversion Table:
1 NSm=0.737 lbfSft
Coversion: NSm –> lbfSft
NSm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
lbfSft
0 0 0.737 1.474 2.211 2.948 3.685 4.422 5.159 5.896 6.633
10 7.370 8.107 8.844 9.581 10.318 11.055 11.792 12.529 13.266 14.003
20 14.740 15.477 16.214 16.951 17.688 18.425 19.162 19.899 20.636 21.373
30 22.110 22.847 23.584 24.321 25.058 25.795 26.532 27.269 28.006 28.743
40 29.480 30.217 30.954 31.691 32.428 33.165 33.902 34.639 35.376 36.113
50 36.850 37.587 38.324 39.061 39.798 40.535 41.272 42.009 42.746 43.483
60 44.220 44.957 45.694 46.431 47.168 47.905 48.642 49.379 50.116 50.853
70 51.590 52.327 53.064 53.801 54.538 55.275 56.012 56.749 57.486 58.223
80 58.960 59.697 60.434 61.171 61.908 62.645 63.382 64.119 64.856 65.593
90 66.330 67.067 67.804 68.541 69.278 70.015 70.752 71.489 72.226 72.963
100 73.700
v
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
vi
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1-2-1 Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1-2-2 Operator Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-3 CE MARKING LABEL (QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV) 1–6
SECTION 2 – TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 NORMAL SCREWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-2 HEXAGON SCREWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
SECTION 3 – COMMON PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 INFORMATION PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-1 Set Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-2 Floppy Disk Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
i INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
ii INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 1 – GENERAL
WARNING!
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY!!
READ AND THOROUGHLY UNDERSTAND THE ‘PROSPEED SERIES SAFETY GUIDELINES’
MANUAL (P9011AW) BEFORE PERFORMING ANY PROCEDURE IN THIS ‘FUNCTIONAL
CHECK/ADJUSTMENT.’
1-1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Before Using This Manual

This CT system is especially dangerous because its weighty Gantry continuously rotates at high speeds with high
power electric current (550 ∼ 750 VDC) conducted through its slip rings.
The hazards, although sometimes obvious, need to be recognized since the potential for serious injury or death exists.
1–1 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL (continued)
CT Products to Which This Manual Applies to:

This ‘Functional Check/Adjustment’ manual is used for CT products listed in the table below:
Table 1–1 Product Name and Code Name
Code Name Product Name
GEMS–AM GEMS–E GEMS–A GEYMS
Qj ProSpeed S ProSpeed S ProSpeed S –
ProSpeed SX ProSpeed SX ProSpeed SX Lemage
Qj–Base ProSpeed ProSpeed S Fast ProSpeed Lemage SX/E

ProSpeed S Fast
– ProSpeed SX Power ProSpeed SX Power Lemage SX
Qj–Hlt ProSpeed ProSpeed SX Power ProSpeed Lemage Supreme

ProSpeed SX Power
– ProSpeed SX Advantage ProSpeed SX Advantage –
Zj–Adv – ProSpeed Advantage ProSpeed Advantage ProSeed SA

ProSeed SA Libra
Zj ProSpeed VX ProSpeed VX ProSpeed VX ProSeed Accell

ProSeed Accell EI
ProSpeed ProSpeed ProSpeed ProSeed
ProSpeed Plus ProSpeed Plus ProSpeed Plus ProSeed EF
Each of the code names represents a product family; for example, ProSpeed S, ProSpeed SX, and Lemage constitute
a product family, called ‘Qj.’
In this manual, product names (ProSpeed, Lemage, ...) or product family names (i.e., code names; Qj, Zj–Adv, ...)
are used to indicate some sections, illustrations, or other types of information which are only applied to those products
indicated.
1–2 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL (continued)

Table 1–2 describes some major differences among product families.
Table 1–2 Differences among Product Families
Code Name Operator Console Detector

CPU Board Operation Display
Qj CPW Liquid Crystal Display Xe Detector
Qj–Base CPW
Qj–Hlt CPW Hilight Detector
Zj–Adv CPW Plasma Display
Zj FMP1 Xe Detector
Liquid Crystal Plasma
Xe Hilight
Use of This Manual

Use this ‘Functional Check/Adjustment’ for the following purposes:
D A during– and post–installation check to ensure that the entire system operates properly.
D As a reference source for Periodic Maintenance which mainly contains abbreviated lists.
D A post–FMI (Field Modification Instruction) check to verify system operation.
D A pre–diagnostic check to verify or determine failure symptoms before or during troubleshooting.
D A post–diagnostic check to verify system operation after repairs, before returning it to the customer to use.
1–3 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE
1-2-1 Gantry
WARNING!
ROTATION AND ELECTROCUTION HAZARDS!
SWITCH OFF THE ‘ROTATE’ AND ‘XG (SAFETY LOOP)’ SWITCHES LOCATED AT THE REAR
OF THE GANTRY BASE BEFORE INSERTING ANY OBJECT INTO OR WORKING ON THE
GANTRY.
WARNING!
ROTATION HAZARD!
ALWAYS INSERT THE GANTRY AZIMUTH LOCK PIN BEFORE REPLACING THE TUBE, DAS,
DETECTOR, HV TANK, OR OTHER WEIGHTY COMPONENTS.
WARNING!
ELECTROCUTION!
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT ON UNSHIELDED TERMINALS. USE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON LIVE EQUIPMENT.
WARNING!
ROTATION HAZARD!
ANY OF THE FOLLOWINGS WILL INITIATE THE GANTRY ROTATION:
1. POWERING ON THE SYSTEM OR GANTRY.
2. SWITCHING ON THE ‘CONTROL’ SWITCH.
3. PUSHING THE RESET SWITCH ON THE TGP BOARD.
4. PUSHING THE POSITIONING LIGHT BUTTON.
STAND CLEAR OF THE ROTATING GANTRY.
1–4 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2-2 Operator Console
WARNING!
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD!
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST ON EXPOSED SURFACES. USE EXTREME CAUTION
WHEN WORKING ON LIVE EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION
Rotating fan assemblies!
Do not place any item into rotating blades. Use extra care when working near fan assemblies.
NOTICE
Turn OFF power before removing or inserting any board or plug.
1–5 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-3 CE MARKING LABEL (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

This CT system is either an EMC model, or non–EMC model. (EMC: Electromagnetic Compatibility)
For the EMC models, a ‘CE Marking Label’ is attached on the rear side of the Operator Console, near its rating plate.
CE MARK-
ING LABEL

OC REAR
VIEW
1–6 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 2 – TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING
CAUTION
Use locktite for screws which are installed to the Gantry rotation block. Use stud bolt with
locktite or nylon nut to prevent loosening if a screw is removed in service maintenance.
CAUTION
When you secure stud bolts with locktite, you must keep the screw torque shown in Table
‘Stud Bolt (Steel) with Locktite.’
Do not rotate the Gantry until the locktite hardens. (75 % of maximum strength after 2 hours;
100 % after 16 hours.)
If it is not possible to wait for the time period mentioned above, use nylon nuts.
TABLE 2–1 Stud Bolt (Steel) with Locktite
Screw Size Torque [kg–cm]

(Unless other-
wise specified)
M4 10
M5 15
M6 35
M8 70
2–1 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-1 NORMAL SCREWS

Secure normal screws with the tightening torque shown in the following tables unless otherwise specified.
TABLE 2–2 Pan Head Screw
Screw Size Torque [kg–cm] (Unless otherwise specified)

Brass Steel (4.8) Stainless (Combination)
(Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut)
M1 0.17 0.18 0.22 If screw and nut
are of different
M 1.2 0.32 0.34 0.42 material, use the
M 1.4 0.49 0.52 0.65 weakest torque.
M 1.7 0.90 0.96 1.2

M2 1.5 1.6 1.9
M 2.2 1.9 2.0 2.5
M 2.3 2.3 2.5 3.1
M 2.5 3.0 3.2 4.0
M 2.6 3.4 3.6 4.5
M3 5.3 5.7 7.1
M 3.5 8.2 8.7 11
M4 12 13 16
M 4.5 17.5 19 23.5
M5 24.5 26.5 33
M6 41.5 44 55
M8 101 108 135
Style
2–2 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
TABLE 2–3 Binder Screw

M1 – – – If screw and nut
are of different
M 1.2 – – – material, use the
M 1.4 – – – weakest torque.
M 1.7 – – –
M2 1.6 1.7 2.1
M 2.2 2.0 2.2 2.7
M 2.3 2.5 2.7 3.4
M 2.5 3.2 3.4 4.2
M 2.6 3.6 3.9 4.8
M3 5.6 6.0 7.5
M 3.5 8.7 9.3 11.5
M4 13 13.5 17
M 4.5 18.5 20 25
M5 26 27.5 34.5
M6 44 47 58.5
M8 107 114 143
Style
2–3 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
TABLE 2–4 Flat Head Screw

M1 0.21 0.22 0.27 If screw and nut
are of different
M 1.2 0.39 0.42 0.52 material, use the
M 1.4 0.61 0.65 0.82 weakest torque.
M 1.7 1.1 1.2 1.5

M2 1.9 2.0 2.5
M 2.2 2.4 2.6 3.2
M 2.3 3.0 3.2 4.0
M 2.5 3.8 4.1 5.1
M 2.6 4.4 4.6 5.8
M3 6.8 7.2 9.0
M 3.5 10.5 11 14
M4 15.5 16.5 20.5
M 4.5 22.5 24 30
M5 31.5 33.5 42
M6 53 56.5 71
M8 130 139 173
Style
2–4 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-2 HEXAGON SCREWS

Tighten allen (hexagonal) screws with the torque shown in Table below unless otherwise specified.
TABLE 2–5 Hexagon Screw

Ferrite Aluminum Aluminum Steel (Combination)
(Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut) Alloy
(Screw & Nut)
M4 35 28 17.5 If screw and nut
are of different
M5 70 56 35 material, use the
M6 117 96.3 58.5 weakest torque.
M8 285 228 142.5

M 10 563 450.4 281.5
M 12 976 780.8 488
Style
or
L L
2–5 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
2–6 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 3 – COMMON PROCEDURES
3-1 INFORMATION PROCESSING
3-1-1 Set Cursor

The following describes how to display a cursor of a 2 cm diameter circle, for example, positioned at the reconstruction
center.
1. Press the [Image Meas] key.
2. Select SET CURSOR from the Measurement menu.
3. Select CIRCLE from the Set Cursor menu.
4. Enter its positions (x POSN: 0.00 cm, y POSN: 0.00 cm) and diameter dimensions (Dia: 2.00 cm).
5. Press the [ENTER] key.
6. Press the [END] key several times to exit the Image Measurement menu.
3–1 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-1-2 Floppy Disk Initialize

To save system data such as Communication data, Scan Parameters, Calibration Files, initialize a floppy disk with
a volume name ‘FPAR’, as described below:

1. Enter the Management menu by pressing the key.
2. Insert the BOOT floppy disk.
3. Enter && and the following prompt will be displayed.
>
4. Enter the following at the ‘>’ prompt.
> FN SYS:0.&..LO ‘CR’

SYS:0000. .RTY .LO(00.00)
> VINITS ‘CR’
What Device Name (4 Characters) ? FD00 ‘CR’

Floppy Disk : Double–Size Double–Density
** Total Sectors : 3991 **
Volume Name : xxxxx
Description : xxxxx
Do You Want to Format Disk (Y/N/Q) ? Y ‘CR’
** Formatting **
** Formatted OK **
Do You Want to Validate Sector (Y/N/Q) ? N ‘CR’
Do You Want to Initialize Disk (Y/N/Q) ? Y ‘CR’
Volume Name (Max 4 Characters) ? FPAR ‘CR’
User No. ? 0 ‘CR’
Description (Max 20 Characters) ? ‘CR’
Do You Want System Dump Area (Y/N/Q) ? N ‘CR’
Do You Want IPLT Loading (Y/N/Q) ? N ‘CR’
** Initializing **
** Initialized OK **
** VINIT END **
VINI : TERMINATED
>
3–2 INTRODUCTION
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – CHECKS DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 CHECKS PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-3 GROUND CONTINUITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
1-4 TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1-5 POWER LINE VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
1-6 LOAD DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
1-6-1 P9180AB/AF PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
1-6-2 2121798 PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
1-7 GANTRY ROTATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
1-8 EMERGENCY OFF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
1-9 FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
1-10 X–RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
1-11 SCAN TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
SECTION 2 – (BLANK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
SECTION 3 – SOFTWARE LOADING (QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV) 3–1

3-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 MOD AND FD FOR SYSTEM/OPTION SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3-3 PRE–ATINST PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
3-4 SOFTWARE LOADING (ATINST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
3-4-1 ATINST Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
3-4-2 Failure Analysis of ATINST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
3-4-3 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–28
3-4-4 Start of ATINST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29
3-4-5 Starting Up System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31
3-4-6 For Sony MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32
3-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33
3-6 RECORDING USER SETTING PARAMETERS – CBF OPTION – . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–47
3-7 RECORDING USER SETTING PARAMETERS – FUNCTIONAL IMAGE OPTION – 3–48
i SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 4 – SOFTWARE LOADING (ZJ) 4–1

4-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 MOD AND FD FOR SYSTEM/OPTION SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4-3 PRE–ATINST PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4-4 SOFTWARE LOADING (ATINST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
4-4-1 ATINST Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
4-4-2 Failure Analysis of ATINST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4-4-3 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4-4-4 Start of ATINST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
4-4-5 Starting Up System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
4-4-6 For Sony MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
4-6 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27
4-7 SPECIAL PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–46
4-8 RECORDING USER SETTING PARAMETERS – CBF OPTION – . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–48
4-9 RECORDING USER SETTING PARAMETERS – FUNCTIONAL IMAGE OPTION – 4–49
SECTION 5 – X–RAY ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-2 PLANE OF ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5-3 DETECTOR BEAM–ON–WINDOW (QJ, QJ–BASE, ZJ) 5–10
5-4 DETECTOR BEAM–ON–WINDOW (QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV) 5–16
5-5 GRAVITY SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–22
5-6 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (QJ, QJ–BASE, ZJ) 5–28
5-7 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV) 5–33
5-8 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–41
SECTION 6 – SYSTEM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

6-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X–RAYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6-3 HILIGHT CALIBRATION (QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV) 6–8
6-3-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
6-3-2 Q Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
6-3-3 XT Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
6-3-4 AV Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13
6-3-5 DG Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14
6-4 AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATIONS (QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV) 6–15
6-5 AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATIONS (ZJ) 6–17
6-6 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT (QJ, QJ–BASE) 6–19
6-7 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT (QJ–HLT) 6–29
6-8 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT (ZJ–ADV, ZJ) 6–37
SECTION 7 – IMAGE PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

7-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
ii SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 1 – CHECKS DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1-1 GENERAL
This ‘Checks during System Installation’ is performed during the following:
System Installation
Periodic Maintenance.
For System Installation, it is required that all wiring and cabling are complete and equipment is installed.
Proceed to Section 1-2 ‘Checks prior to Applying Power’, and then, to Section 1-3 ‘Ground Continuity’, Section 1-4
‘Temperature,’ ... , in the section order.
1–1 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2 CHECKS PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER
CAUTION
Leave all power to the system OFF and tagged until power is called for in specific steps.
1. Verify the following:
a. Four Gantry Tilt Lock Plates are removed.
b. Gantry Azimuth Lock Pin is pulled out.
c. All of the following breakers and switches are OFF.

Refer to Illustrations 1–1, 1–2, or 1–3.
D Breaker on Power Distribution Box (hospital supply)
D 1 Breaker (SW20 or CB20) on the PDU
D 5 Switches (‘Rotate,’ ‘XG,’ ‘Table/Tilt,’ ‘Control,’ and ’Slip Ring 115V’) and 1 breaker (NFB) on the Gantry
D Service switch on the Sub Board on the Gantry
D SYS–OFF–MNL switch on the TGP Board on the Gantry
D

(Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
D
(Zj, Zj–Adv)
1–2 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2 CHECKS PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER (continued)
Illustration 1–1 PDU (Power Distribution Unit)
P9180AB/AF
2121798

ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅ

1–3 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 1–2 Gantry
(REAR VIEW) VIEW B

SERVO AMP.
VIEW B NFB
SUB
BOARD TGP
BOARD
A
DETAIL OF À'
SERVICE
Rotate XG Table/Tilt Slip Ring SW
Control 115V SYS-OFF-MNL
(Safety Loop) SW
(DAS/DET)
1–4 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 1–3 Operator Console


1–5 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 1–3 Operator Console (continued)

(Zj, Zj–Adv)

(TOP VIEW)

1–6 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-3 GROUND CONTINUITY

1. Review the interconnect illustrations in Section 4 of the Installation Manual (2124011) and check that all
connections are mechanically secure at both ends.
2. Use an earth bonding test meter or equivalent device to measure the DC resistance between the following com-
ponents in the system, and verify that each is less than 0.1 ohms. Record the measured resistance values.
Table 1–1 Ground Continuity
RESISTANCE
FROM TO (OHMS)
GND (PDB) GND (PDU)
GND (PDU) GND (GANTRY)
GND (GANTRY) GND (TABLE)
GND (PDU) GND (OC)
GND (OC) GND (MOD)
GND (OC)
* GND (MT)
GND (OC)
* GND (MFC)
GND (OC)
* GND (OD)
GND (OC)
*GND
(ADVANTAGE WINĆ
DOWS or DC III)
Note: * Indicates optional components.
1–7 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-4 TEMPERATURE
During the installation and start–up of the system you must take continuous temperature checks to make sure the
environment meets specifications listed in Section 3 of the Preinstallation manual (2124010). Excessive temperature,
coupled with reduced air flow from clogged filters, may overstress components and cause failures.
Filters
Check and clean all electronic equipment dust filters. GE recommends initially doing this on a weekly basis, because
new installations always have dust and dirt present at this stage. Over a period of time, you may increase the mainte-
nance interval as site environment improves.
Specifications
During installation, use the temperature/humidity recorder and a thermometer to record the temperature and relative
humidity in the scan room. Make sure the data you collect meets the following temperature and humidity
specifications.
D Scan Room
– Temperature: 20_ C ~ 28_ C (at least 5_ C/hr gradient)
– Relative Humidity: 20 ~ 70 % RH (Non Condensing)
D Operator’s Room and/or Equipment Room
– Temperature: 15_ C ~ 30_ C (at least 5_ C/hr gradient)
– Relative Humidity: 20 ~ 70 % RH (Non Condensing)
Action
Contact the air conditioning supplier or your local GE service department when your data fails to meet any
specifications.
1–8 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-5 POWER LINE VOLTAGE
Input Selection of 380 V, 415 V or 480 V

This information applies to P9180AB or P9180AF PDUs. For 2121798 PDUs, refer to Section 3–1, Power Distribution
Unit (PDU), of the Installation manual (2124011).
Verify that an input selection on the Power Distribution Unit (See Illustration 1–4) meets the input power voltage. If not,
correct them.
The ‘input power voltage’ here means the rating voltage specified on the power distribution box (hospital supply), not
the measured voltage on the power distribution box.
Illustration 1–4 Voltage Selection
F4 F5 F6
R S T
FOR 480 V INPUT
F4 F5 F6
R S T
FOR 415 V INPUT
F4 F5 F6
TB37
R S T
FOR 380 V INPUT
SW20
FRONT VIEW
1–9 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-5 POWER LINE VOLTAGE (continued)

The following assumes that the power source for the system was checked for mean voltage, as well as any line voltage
disturbance during preinstallation site checks.
Instrument
Use the same instrument (Dranetz, etc.) to monitor line voltage during this check that you used during the preinstalla-
tion check. The recommended line analyzer is the Dranetz Model 606–3 (3 channel) with the 101 frequency option, or
Dranetz Model line monitor plug in modules. You can use a similar analyzer, as long as it can monitor and report mean
voltage, surges, sags, short term impulses, and frequency drift.
Check Using an Instrument

Monitor the input power lines (200 VAC, 208 VAC, 380 VAC, 400 VAC, 415 VAC, 440 VAC, 460 VAC or 480 VAC) to the
PDU at the PDU (on terminals L1, L2, and L3). Check in particular:
D Verify that the current line voltage equals the voltage measured during the preinstallation check.
D Verify that mean line voltage does not fall outside of equipment specifications during the day to day opera-
tion of other site equipment during the installation period.
D Look for any line voltage disturbances and check for a correlation between disturbances and system mal-
functions such as “Aborts” or component failures.
From the printouts, ensure that the power supply meets the following criteria :
D Line Voltage : 200 VAC, 208 VAC, 380 VAC, 400 VAC, 415 VAC, 440 VAC, 460 VAC or
480 VAC
(50 Hz/60 Hz) (Normal Steady State)
D Daily Voltage Variation : +10% to –5% from nominal steady state (50 Hz)
+6% to –9% from nominal steady state (60 Hz)
D Frequency : 50 Hz + 0.5 Hz, 60 Hz + 0.5 Hz.
Check Using an Oscilloscope

Monitor the power lines with an oscilloscope and verify that no significant distortion, noise or transients exist. Switch
between the oscilloscope’s long and short time base to monitor for spikes, as well as line drift over time. Generally,
harmonics of the third, seventh, and eleventh derivative will be the most prevalent.
Action
Investigate any condition that falls out of spec. Identify the problem source(s) and resolve the problem.
1–10 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-6 LOAD DISTRIBUTION

Before attempting this power application and functional check, make sure that the breakers and switches match the
instructions given in ‘Checks prior to Applying Power.’
WARNING!
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THE UNIT, USE EXTREME CARE TO AVOID INJURY
TO PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT.
Follow this procedure exactly in the order it was written. This procedure was developed with your safety in mind.
Follow this sequence to protect you and the equipment from irreparable damage.
1-6-1 P9180AB/AF PDU

1. Preparation:
a. Remove the front panel from the PDU.
b. Remove the top cover from the OC.
c. Remove the left side cover from the Gantry.
d. Verify again that all breakers and switches are OFF according to ‘Checks prior to Applying Power.’
e. Verify that wiring and cabling are correctly connected.
f. Switch ON two breakers (NFB1, NFB2) on the OC. (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
g. Switch ON two breakers (OC, OPTION) on the OC. (Zj, Zj–Adv)
1–11 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-6-1 P9180AB/AF PDU (continued)

2. Switch ON the breaker on the power distribution box (hospital supply).
3. Switch ON the SW20 breaker on the PDU.
Verify the ‘Power’ lamp (green) in the front upper left corner of the PDU turns ON.
4. Verify that three fans on the rear cover are rotating.
5. Measure 115 VAC between terminals 15 and 16 on TB37 on the PDU. It should be 103.5 ~ 126.5 VAC. See
Illustration 1–4.
6. Switch ON the ‘Slip Ring 115V (DAS/DET)’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
Verify that the x–ray generator on the rotating assembly is powered ON; this can be verified by checking that
LEDs on the XG controller boards turn ON. Also verify that the x–ray tube fan and pump start to operate.
7. Push the ‘Power’ switch on the OC. (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
Verify that the voltage between terminals 11 and 12 on TM 1 of the OC is 90 ~ 110 VAC. See Illustration 1–3.
8. Push the ‘Power’ switch on the OC. (Zj, Zj–Adv)
Verify that the voltage between terminals 1 and 2, and between terminals 2 and 3 on TM1 of the OC is 90 ~ 110
VAC. See Illustration 1–3.
9. Measure 103.5 ~ 126.5 VAC between terminals 10 and 11 on TB37 on the PDU.
10. Verify that the Servo Amplifier breaker is in the OFF position.
11. Switch on the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
12. Measure 180 ~ 220 VAC on the Servo Amplifier input (between R & S, S & T, and T & R terminals). See Illustration
1–5.
Illustration 1–5 Servo Amp Input Terminals

1–12 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-6-2 2121798 PDU

1. Preparation:
a. Remove the top and front covers from the PDU. (A ground cable is connected on each cover)
b. Remove the top cover from the OC.
c. Remove the left side cover from the Gantry.
d. Verify again that all breakers and switches are OFF according to ‘Checks prior to Applying Power.’
e. Verify that wiring and cabling are correctly connected.
f. Switch ON two breakers (NFB1, NFB2) on the OC. (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
g. Switch ON two breakers (OC, OPTION) on the OC. (Zj, Zj–Adv)
2. Switch ON the breaker on the power distribution box (hospital supply).
3. Switch ON the CB20 breaker on the PDU.
Verify the ‘Power’ lamp in the front upper left corner of the PDU turns ON.
4. Verify that two fans on the rear cover are rotating.
5. Measure 103.5 ~ 126.5 VAC between terminals 8 and 9 on the front side of the PDU. See Illustration 1–6.
Illustration 1–6 Measurement on PDU
PDU FRONT SIDE

(COVER REMOVED)
TERMINALS FOR
MEASUREMENT
1–13 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-6-2 2121798 PDU (continued)

6. Switch ON the ‘Slip Ring 115V (DAS/DET)’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
Verify that the x–ray generator on the rotating assembly is powered ON; this can be verified by checking that
LEDs on the XG controller boards turn ON. Also verify that the x–ray tube fan and pump start to operate.
7. Push the ‘Power’ switch on the OC. (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
Verify that the voltage between terminals 11 and 12 on TM 1 of the OC is 90 ~ 110 VAC. See Illustration 1–3.
8. Push the ‘Power’ switch on the OC. (Zj, Zj–Adv)
Verify that the voltage between terminals 1 and 2, and between terminals 2 and 3 on TM1 of the OC is 90 ~ 110
VAC. See Illustration 1–3.
9. Measure 103.5 ~ 126.5 VAC between terminals 11 and 12 on the front side of the PDU. See Illustration 1–6.
10. Verify that the Servo Amplifier breaker is in the OFF position.
11. Switch on the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
12. Measure 180 ~ 220 VAC on the Servo Amplifier input (between R & S, S & T, and T & R terminals). See Illustration
1–5.
1–14 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-7 GANTRY ROTATION CHECK
WARNING!
ROTATION HAZARD! BECAUSE OF THE CONTINUOUS ROTATION OF THE GANTRY THERE

ARE HAZARDS INVOLVED IN WORKING ON OR NEAR THE GANTRY. THE MOST OBVIOUS
HAZARD IS THE AXIAL MOTION OF THE GANTRY. THE HIGH VOLTAGE (HV) SUBSYSTEM IS
MOUNTED DIRECTLY ONTO THE GANTRY. THE HV SUBSYSTEM CONSISTS OF COMPO-
NENTS THAT ARE BULKY AND HEAVY. GIVE ROTATION HAZARDS RESPECT.
1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the front and both side covers from the Gantry.
3. Set the safety bracket located on the right side of the Gantry.
4. Switch ON the ‘Control’ and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches.
5. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board on the Gantry.
6. Rotate the Gantry manually in the CW direction to verify that nothing interferes the Gantry during rotation (cables,
etc.).
7. Set the Service switch to OFF.
8. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
Verify that you hear the rotation alarm sound.
9. Switch ON the Servo Amp. breaker.
10. Switch OFF the ‘Power’ switch on the OC.
11. Switch ON the ‘Power’ switch on the OC.
Verify that the Gantry starts to rotate, and it stops at the home position (x–ray tube at 12 o’clock position) before
making two revolutions.
1–15 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-8 EMERGENCY OFF TEST

1. Remove the Gantry left side cover. (The other covers should be installed)
2. Press the emergency switch located on the OC.
Verify that power is removed from the Gantry and Table; check the following:
D LEDs on the Servo Amp. are extinguished.
D LEDs on the TGP Board are extinguished.
D Gantry Display Panels (right and left) are extinguished.

3. Press the power switch on the OC .
Verify that power is applied to the Gantry and Table; check the following:
D LEDs on the Servo Amp. are illuminated.
D LEDs on the TGP Board are illuminated.
D Gantry Display Panels (right and left) are illuminated.
(Zj, Zj–Adv)
4. Press the Emergency Reset switch next to the emergency switch. (Use a fine tip of some object)
Verify that power is applied to the Gantry and Table; check the following:
D LEDs on the Servo Amp. are illuminated.
D LEDs on the TGP Board are illuminated.
D Gantry Display Panels (right and left) are illuminated.
5. Repeat the above check for emergency switches located on the followings:
PDU (one)
Gantry front cover (two; right and left)
Gantry frames (four; all the Gantry covers should be removed)
1–16 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-9 FILTER
There are one filter on the OC and two on the PDU.
D OC: Horizontal, one on the bottom of console

D PDU (P9180AB or P9180AF): Vertical, one each on the front and rear covers
PDU (2121798): Vertical, one each on the right and left side covers
(Zj, Zj–Adv)
There are two filters on the OC and two on the PDU.
D OC: Horizontal, two on the bottom of console

D PDU (P9180AB or P9180AF): Vertical, one each on the front and rear covers
PDU (2121798): Vertical, one each on the right and left side covers
Perform the following cleaning procedure.
1. Slide the filter at the bottom of the OC forward until it is removed from the OC.
(The OC front cover does not need to be removed)
2. Remove the front and rear covers (or right and left side covers) of PDU and gently pull the foam out of each enclo-
sure.
3. Suck up any dust on the filters with a vacuum cleaner.
4. Slide or fit each filter back into its enclosure.
1–17 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-10 X–RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY

Check the overheat detection function by performing the following:
1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base. (The other switches should be set to ON)
2. Remove the front and both side covers from the Gantry.
3. Disconnect the rotor connector:
See Illustration 1–7.
If the connector is not accessible, perform the following:
a. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board.
b. Rotate the Gantry manually in the CW direction to the home position (x–ray tube at the 12 o’clock position).
c. Set the Service switch to OFF.
4. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
5. Try to perform a scan.
Verify that a scan can not be performed and that the “XG ERROR 148” message is reported on the CRT status
screen.
6. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
7. Reconnect the connector.
Illustration 1–7 Rotor Cable Connector at X–ray Tube

CONNECTOR
(BROWN)
1–18 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-11 SCAN TEST

This ‘Scan Test’ procedure assumes that all the subsystems (Operator Console, Gantry, Table, DAS/Detector, and
X–ray generator) are functioning normally.
In this procedure refer to the Operator manual for detailed information.
Warm Up Scan
1. Make sure that the ‘New Patient’ and the ‘Warm Up’ buttons are blinking on the touch panel screen.
Note
‘Warm Up’ should blink following the completion of the system power–up sequence.
2. Make sure that nothing is in the scan area in the Gantry room.
3. Touch the ‘Warm Up’ button to start the x–ray tube warm up program.
Make sure that all warm up scans complete without error.
Scoutview Scan
4. Perform a series of scout scans to check scout scan operations:
Use the following scan parameters:
FOV : 50 cm
THICKNESS : 1 mm
KV : 120 kV
MA : 60, 80, 100, 130, or 160 mA
a. Tilt the Gantry to any angle.
b. Try to perform a scout scan.
Make sure that the software prohibits a scout scan with the Gantry tilted.
c. Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.
d. Release the ‘Scan’ button during a scout scan.
Verify that the scan continues.
e. Select Auto Voice Start 1 and Auto Voice End 1.

Lay the water phantom horizontally on the cradle.
Perform an AP (0°) scout scan on the phantom.
Make sure that you can hear and understand each voice.
Verify that the phantom diameter (In–Out direction) on the image is 266 mm ±3 mm.
1–19 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-11 SCAN TEST (continued)

f. Select Auto Voice Start 2 and Auto Voice End 1.
Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.
Perform an LT (90°) scout scan on the phantom.
Make sure that you can hear and understand each voice.
Release the ‘Scan’ button before the whole image is displayed and verify that the scan continues.
Push the ‘Abort’ key and verify that the cradle and scan stop.
Localize
5. Perform a Localize function:
a. Display a scoutview image (use the image acquired at step 4).
b. Select the Localize function.
c. Prescribe and confirm an axial scan plan.
d. Make sure that the ‘Table Set’ button blinks.
e. Press the ‘Table Set’ button.
Check that the cradle advances to the prescribed position.
1–20 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Axial Scan
6. Perform a series of axial scans to check axial scan operations:
a. Use the following scan parameters:
Acquisition No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Scan Time [sec] 0.7 0.7 1 1 1.5 1.5 2 2 3 3
(For ProSpeed SX, ProSpeed SX Power, Lemage, Lemage SX, Lemage SX/E, ProSpeed SX Advan-
tage, Lemage Supreme, ProSpeed Advantage, ProSeed SA, ProSeed SA Libra, ProSpeed, ProSpeed
Plus, ProSeed Accell, ProSeed Accell EI, ProSeed, ProSeed EF)
For systems where 0.8 sec scan is available, use the following, instead of the above.
Acquisition No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Scan Time [sec] 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1 1 1.5 1.5 2 2 3 3
Acquisition No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Scan Time [sec] 1 1 1.5 1.5 2 2 3 3
(For ProSpeed VX)
Acquisition No. 1 2 3 4
Scan Time [sec] 2 2 3 3
(For ProSpeed S, ProSpeed S Fast, ProSpeed)
THICKNESS : 10 mm
FOCUS : LARGE
KV : 120 kV
MA : 160 mA
INTERVAL : 10 mm
Select each of the auto voice messages (Start 1, Start 2, Start 3, and End 1).
Verify that each scan completes with no error occurred.
Verify that you can hear and understand each voice.
1–21 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

b. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
Remove all the Gantry covers.
Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
c. Use the following scan parameters:
SCAN TIME : 1 sec

THICKNESS : 10 mm
FOCUS : LARGE
KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA
FOV : 25 cm
RECON FOV : 25 cm (STND RECON)
(For ProSpeed SX, ProSpeed SX Power, Lemage, Lemage SX, Lemage SX/E, ProSpeed SX Advan-
tage, Lemage Supreme, ProSpeed Advantage, ProSeed SA, ProSeed SA Libra, ProSpeed, ProSpeed
Plus, ProSeed Accell, ProSeed Accell EI, ProSeed, ProSeed EF)
SCAN TIME : 1.5 sec

THICKNESS : 10 mm
FOCUS : LARGE
KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA
FOV : 25 cm
RECON FOV : 25 cm (STND RECON)
(For ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed S, ProSpeed S Fast, ProSpeed))
Recon Time
Verify that the time between the scan end and the image appearance on the CRT monitor is within 9 sec.
Abort
Perform the above scan and press the ‘Abort’ button before the scan completes.
Verify that the scan is terminated.
Emergency OFF
Perform the above scan and press the Emergency button on the Console before the scan completes.
Verify that the scan is terminated and that the Gantry comes to a stop within two inertial revolutions.
1–22 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 5 2205009
SECTION 2 – (BLANK)
(This section is intentionally left blank.)
2–1 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
2–2 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
SECTION 3 – SOFTWARE LOADING

(Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
3-1 GENERAL
This ‘Software Loading’ describes the Load–From–Cold (LFC) procedure for a full system software loading from an
MOD (Magnetic Optical Disk) and some FDs (Floppy Disks) to the system hard disk. Perform this LFC procedure
when:
D A failure or crash corrupts the hard disk so the existing software can not be used. A Load–From–Cold
rebuilds the operating software on the disk and restores normal system operation.
D CT Engineering has revised the current software to incorporate improvements or correct existing prob-
lems. Replace the old software by performing a Load–From–Cold with the new software.
CAUTION
Save existing patient data any time you perform the LFC procedure or you will lose this data.
The saving procedure is described in the ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure’ menu.
An LFC procedure is outlined in Illustration 3–1.
Version Related Note – Additional Autofilming Format 15/16/20/24

To make this function available, the following is required:
D System Software: V/R 5.00 or later
D MISC2 Board: 2121792–3 or later
D Imager: capable of the above format
3–1 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-1 GENERAL (continued)
Illustration 3–1 Load–From–Cold Standard Procedure
START
SAVE CUSTOMER DATA
SET CPW DIP SW
INSERT BOOT FLOPPY
PULL RESET SWITCH
ATINST program
DATA FILE SAVE
DISK INITIALIZE
SOFTWARE LOADING (STANDARD,
OPTION)
FILE ALLOCATION
DATA FILE LOADING
RESET CPW DIP SW
PULL RESET SWITCH
RESTORE INSITE SOFTWARE
CUSTOM PARAMETER CHANGE YES

(INCLUDING ADDITIONAL OP-
TION SOFTWARE LOADING)
INSERT BOOT FLOPPY

NO
CUSTOMER PARAMETER CHANGE

PARAMETER CHANGE
ADDITIONAL OPTION SOFTWARE LOADING
PULL RESET SWITCH
RESTORE CUSTOMER DATA
END
3–2 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-2 MOD AND FD FOR SYSTEM/OPTION SOFTWARE

Prepare the following, prior to starting the LFC (Load–From–Cold) procedure.
D System Software Disks listed in Table 3–1 ∼ 3–15 (see the table below)
Table No. Product

3–1 ProSpeed S
3–2 ProSpeed SX
3–3 ProSpeed
3–4 ProSpeed S Fast
3–5 ProSpeed with Hilight Detector
3–6 ProSpeed SX Power
3–7 ProSpeed SX Power with Hilight Detector
3–8 ProSpeed SX Advantage
3–9 ProSpeed Advantage
3–10 Lemage
3–11 Lemage SX
3–12 Lemage SX/E
3–13 Lemage Supreme
3–14 ProSeed SA
3–15 ProSeed SA Libra
The table lists the Volume Names of an MOD which contains the system software, of some floppy disks
which contain application software, and of other floppy disks required for the system.
D Option Software Disks (which the customer already own) listed in Table 3–16.
This table shows all the currently available option software.
Normally, option software disks and also some application software disks included in the system software
(“PG00” disk, “PZ00” disk, ...) are not required in a version up or a re–loading procedure. However, these
disks are required if the ATINST program (described later) failed, or when the system hard disk drive is
replaced with a new one.
D “INST” floppy disk (2169041) (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
D “INST” floppy disk (2169042) (Zj–Adv)
D Option Software Disks (which the customer bought and have not yet installed to the system) listed in Table
3–16.
3–3 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-2 MOD AND FD FOR SYSTEM/OPTION SOFTWARE (continued)
Table 3–1 System Software Disks (ProSpeed S)
Volume Revision Description

Name
BOOT 5 (2196037)
MQ00 5 System Software V/R 6.00 (2196039) (MOD)
V602 0 System Software (2213371) (for Version 6.02)
PG00 0 Paging (P9200QH)
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom (P9200QJ)
DIND 0 Display in Display (P9200QE)
RTRF 0 Real-time Reformation (P9200QK)
CVRF 0 Curved Reformation (P9200QL)
Table 3–2 System Software Disks (ProSpeed SX)

Name
BOOT 5 (2196037)
CLV3 0 Cooling V3 (2123692)
STM1 0 One Sec Scan (2123687)
RTRF 0 Real-time Reformation (P9200QK)
CVRF 0 Curved Reformation (P9200QL)
3–4 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–3 System Software Disks (ProSpeed)
Volume Revision Description Model B Model E Model R Model R2

Name
BOOT 5 (2196037) O O O O
MQ00 5 System Software V/R 6.00 (2196039) (MOD) O O O O
V602 0 System Software (2213371) (for Version 6.02) O O O O
FRN1 0 Fast Recon 5-7 (2123690) O O O O
CLV3 0 Cooling V3 (2123692) O O - -
CLV4 0 Cooling V4 (2123693) - - O O
STM1 0 One Sec Scan (2123687) - O O O
PG00 0 Paging (P9200QH) O O O O
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom (P9200QJ) O O O O
DIND 0 Display in Display (P9200QE) O O O O
RTRF 0 Real-time Reformation (P9200QK) O O O O
CVRF 0 Curved Reformation (P9200QL) O O O O
HLCL 0 Helical Scan (P9200QS) - O O O
CINE 0 Cine Retro Recon (P9200QM) - O O O
Model B: Systems with a metal-free cradle installed as an option, or systems not including a metal-free cradle.
Model E: Systems with a metal-free cradle as standard and a Gantry not marked with an `R' at its rear base.
Model R: Systems with a Gantry marked with an `R' at its rear base.
Model R2: Systems with a Gantry marked with an `R2' at its rear base.
O: The system includes the software.
-: The system does not include the software.
3–5 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–4 System Software Disks (ProSpeed S Fast)

Name
BOOT 5 (2196037) O O O O
CLV3 0 Cooling V3 (2123692) O - - -
CLV4 0 Cooling V4 (2123693) - O O O
3–6 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–5 System Software Disks (ProSpeed with Hilight Detector)

Name
BOOT 5 (2196037) O O O O
CLV3 0 Cooling V3 (2123692) O O - -
CLV4 0 Cooling V4 (2123693) - - O O
HILT 0 HILIGHT (2123453) O O O O
3–7 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–6 System Software Disks (ProSpeed SX Power)

Name
BOOT 5 (2196037) O O O O
CLV3 0 Cooling V3 (2123692) O - - -
STM1 0 One Sec Scan (2123687) O O O O
MA35 0 350 mA (2123689) O O O O
3–8 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–7 System Software Disks (ProSpeed SX Power with Hilight Detector)

Name
BOOT 5 (2196037) O O O O
CLV3 0 Cooling V3 (2123692) O - - -
MA35 0 350 mA (2123689) O O O O
HILT 0 HILIGHT (2123453) O O O O
3–9 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–8 System Software Disks (ProSpeed SX Advantage)
Volume Revision Description Model E Model R Model R2

Name
BOOT 5 (2196037) O O O
MQ00 5 System Software V/R 6.00 (2196039) (MOD) O O O
V602 0 System Software (2213371) (for Version 6.02) O O O
FRN2 0 Fast Recon 3-5 (2123691) O O O
MA35 0 350 mA (2123689) O O O
CLV5 0 Cooling V5 (2141556) O O O
STM1 0 One Sec Scan (2123687) O O O
FELK 0 Fast E-Link (2149250) O O O
PG00 0 Paging (P9200QH) O O O
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom (P9200QJ) O O O
DIND 0 Display in Display (P9200QE) O O O
RTRF 0 Real-time Reformation (P9200QK) O O O
CVRF 0 Curved Reformation (P9200QL) O O O
HLCL 0 Helical Scan (P9200QS) O O O
CINE 0 Cine Retro Recon (P9200QM) O O O
HILT 0 HILIGHT (2123453) O O O
3–10 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–9 System Software Disks (ProSpeed Advantage)
Volume Revision Description Model B Model E Model R

Name
BOOT 3 (2202681) (for Version 4.00) O O O

MZA0 3 System Software V/R 4.00 (2202683) (MOD) O O O
CLV5 0 Cooling V5 (2141556) - O O
PG00 0 Paging (P9180QA) O O O
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom (P9180QB) O O O
DIND 0 Display in Display (P9180QF) O O O
RTRF 2 Real-time Reformation (P9180QD) O O O
CVRF 1 Curved Reformation (P9180QE) O O O
HLCL 0 Helical Scan (P9180QP) - O O
CINE 0 Cine Retro Recon (P180QU) - O O
Table 3–10 System Software Disks (Lemage)

Name
BOOT 5 (2196037)
STM1 0 One Sec Scan (2123687)
CLV4 0 Cooling V4 (2123693)
HLCL 0 Helical Scan (P9200QS)
CINE 0 Cine Retro Recon (P9200QM)
3–11 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–11 System Software Disks (Lemage SX)

Name
BOOT 5 (2196037) O O O O
MA30 0 300 mA (2123688) O O O O
CLV4 0 Cooling V4 (2123693) O - - -
HLCL 0 Helical Scan (P9200QS) O O O O
CINE 0 Cine Retro Recon (P9200QM) O O O O
MOD4 0 Quad Density MOD (2169037) - - - O
3–12 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–12 System Software Disks (Lemage SX/E)

Name
BOOT 5 (2196037) O O O O
FRN1 0 Fast Recon 5-7 (2123690) - O O O
CLV4 0 Cooling V4 (2123693) O O O O
HLCL 0 Helical Scan (P9200QS) O O O O
CINE 0 Cine Retro Recon (P9200QM) O O O O
MOD4 0 Quad Density MOD (2169037) - - - O
3–13 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–13 System Software Disks (Lemage Supreme)
Volume Revision Description Model B Model E Model R Model L Model R2

Name
BOOT 5 (2196037) O O O O O
MQ00 5 System Software V/R 6.00 (2196038) (MOD) O O O O O
V602 0 System Software (2213371) (for Version 6.02) O O O O O
V603 0 System Software (2224498) (for Version 6.03) O O O O O
STM1 0 One Sec Scan (2123687) O O O O O
MA30 0 300 mA (2123688) O O O O O
FRN1 0 Fast Recon 5-7 (2123690) O O O - O
FRN2 0 Fast Recon 3-5 (2123691) - - - O -
CLV4 0 Cooling V4 (2123693) O - - - -
CLV5 0 Cooling V5 (2141556) - O O O O
PG00 0 Paging (P9200QH) O O O O O
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom (P9200QJ) O O O O O
DIND 0 Display in Display (P9200QE) O O O O O
HLCL 0 Helical Scan (P9200QS) O O O O O
CINE 0 Cine Retro Recon (P9200QM) O O O O O
HILT 0 HILIGHT (2123453) O O O O O
SRCN 0 Smart Recon (2167710) - - - O -
MOD4 0 Quad Density MOD (2169037) - - - - O
Model L: Lemage Supreme (2168716); this model includes Smart Recon software.
3–14 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–14 System Software Disks (ProSeed SA)

Name
BOOT 3 (2202681) (for Version 4.00) O O O O

MZA0 3 System Software V/R 4.00 (2202682) (MOD) O O O O
PG00 0 Paging (P9180QA) O O O O
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom (P9180QB) O O O O
DIND 0 Display in Display (P9180QF) O O O O
RTRF 2 Real-time Reformation (P9180QD) O O O O
CVRF 1 Curved Reformation (P9180QE) O O O O
HLCL 0 Helical Scan (P9180QP) O O O O
CINE 0 Cine Retro Recon (P180QU) O O O O
DIM3 1 3-D Imaging (P9180QC) O O O O
MIP0 0 MIP (P9180QX) O O O O
MOD4 0 Quad Density MOD (2169037) (with V/R 3.00 or later - - - O
system software only)
3–15 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–15 System Software Disks (ProSeed SA Libra)
Volume Revision Description Model R Model R2

Name
BOOT 3 (2202681) (for Version 4.00) O O

MZA0 3 System Software V/R 4.00 (2202682) (MOD) O O
V401 0 System Software (2213373) (for Version 4.01) O O
CLV5 0 Cooling V5 (2141556) O O
PG00 0 Paging (P9180QA) O O
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom (P9180QB) O O
DIND 0 Display in Display (P9180QF) O O
RTRF 2 Real-time Reformation (P9180QD) O O
CVRF 1 Curved Reformation (P9180QE) O O
HLCL 0 Helical Scan (P9180QP) O O
CINE 0 Cine Retro Recon (P180QU) O O
DIM3 1 3-D Imaging (P9180QC) O O
MIP0 0 MIP (P9180QX) O O
MOD4 0 Quad Density MOD (2169037) (with V/R 3.00 or later - O
system software only)
FSCN 0 Warp Scan (2123694) O O

SRCN 0 Smart Recon (2167710) O O
SPRP 0 Smart Prep (2177618) (with V/R 3.00 or later system - O
software only)
3–16 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–16 Option Software Disks
Volume Name Revision Description
DIM3 0 3-D Imaging
FI00 0 Functional Image
CD00 0 Co-ordinate
CCI0 0 CCI
CB00 0 CBF
BMD0 0 BMD
DENT 0 Denta Scan
ELNK 0 Ethernet
FELK 0 Fast E-Link
MRS0 0 MARS
PG00 0 Paging
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom
DIND 0 Display in Display
RTRF 0 Real-time Reformation
CVRF 0 Curved Reformation
HLCL 0 Helical Scan
CINE 0 Cine Retro Recon
HILT 0 HILIGHT
MA30 0 300 mA
MA35 0 350 mA
STM1 0 One Sec Scan
FRN1 0 Fast Recon 5-7
FRN2 0 Fast Recon 3-5
SRCN (2167710) Smart Recon
FSCN (2123694) Warp Scan
HSCN 0 0.8 Sec Scan
MOD4 (2169037) Quad Density MOD
FLOR (2177617) Fluoro
SPRP (2177618) Smart Prep
MA20 (2198134) 200 mA
MA25 (2198135) 200 mA → 250 mA
3–17 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-3 PRE–ATINST PROCEDURE

Save Customer Data before proceeding. You must save Customer Data onto MOD, floppy disks, tape, or optical
disk because the ATINST, LFC (Load–From–Cold) procedure, destroys any information on the system disk. Refer to
the Operator Manuals to complete the following steps.
About MOD Cartridge Type. For data save purpose, use MOD cartridges compatible with the Hitachi MOD drive in
Japanese sites; or use MOD cartridges compatible with the Pioneer MOD drive in except Japanese sites.
About Floppy Disks. For data save purpose, use blank floppy disks, or initialize them with a volume name ‘FPAR’,
even though they are already initialized with this volume name, otherwise, the previously saved data on the floppy
disks will persist (not be overwritten)!
Refer to Section 3-1-2, ‘Floppy Disk Initialize’, of Tab ‘Introduction.’
1. Save Patient Image Data.
Archive existing patient image data to MOD, floppy disks, tape, or optical disk before proceeding, or you will lose
this data. Use the Image File Management function to save data. (Refer to Operator Manual)
2. Save Communication Data:
For any system on which ELINK is installed, save Communication Data on a floppy disk as follows, otherwise, the
data will be deleted during LFC.
a. Press the [Mgt] key.
b. Select COMMUNICATION DATA SAVE/LOAD.
...
3–18 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-3 PRE–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)
CAUTION
If you intend to save raw data onto MOD, be sure to start with a blank cartridge , or one that
does not need to be preserved. This procedure will erase all previous data contained on the
MOD cartridge.
3. Save Raw Data Files.
Archive raw data files to an MOD or floppy disks if the customer wants to save them. Otherwise, these files are
destroyed during LFC.
Before proceeding to the following save procedure, write down all the raw data file ID numbers to be saved.
If you use floppy disks, format them before proceeding.
a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive. (This step is not required for systems installed in Japan)
b. Touch the [Maint] key.
c. Enter $$, as follows;
*** MAINTENANCE MENU ***

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
Select No. = $$ ‘CR’
d. Select SUPPORT from the Maintenance menu.
e. Select FD DUMP/LOAD, MT DUMP/LOAD, or MOD DUMP/LOAD.
Example: Saving raw data files to an MOD:
f. Verify that the MOD is set “write enable.”
g. Select INITIALIZE to initialize the MOD.
h. Select DUMP (DISK –> MOD).
i. Enter all the raw data file ID Numbers. Then press the [END] key.
...
3–19 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

4. Record Custom Parameters:
Note
Usually the Custom Parameter data does not need to be recorded, since the data will be saved
automatically in the ATINST program (Data File Save Function). However, in this LFC (Re–loading
of the current system software), at least the following parameters should be recorded:
Start Study No. (due to a software bug)
Network (since you will be requested to select the current setting parameter in the CHANGE PA-
RAMETERS mode later)
Also, it is recommended to check which option software are currently installed on the system, so that
you can confirm later that those option software have been correctly retrieved.
In addition, if you have all the records, they can serve as backup in the event there is trouble with
the ATINST program.
a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
d. Select CUSTOM PARAMETERS from the Maintenance menu.
e. Select DISPLAY PARAMETERS, as follows;
** CUSTOM PARAMETERS **
1. DISPLAY PARAMETERS
2. CHANGE PARAMETERS
Select No. = 1 ‘CR’
f. Custom Parameters will be displayed one by one, as listed in Table 3–17. Use this table to record the parame-
ters.
Custom Parameters include FUNCTION MENU which does not show in the Display Parameters mode.
Therefore, enter the Change Parameters mode (BOOT floppy is required) and record the parameters in Table
3–18.
3–20 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–17 Custom Parameters (Display)
Current Model Name Lemage . ProSpeed . ProSpeed S . ProSpeed SX

ProSeed SA . ProSpeed Adv.
Auxiliary Disk Unavailable . Available
Optical Disk Unavailable . Available
Magnetic Optical Disk Unavailable . Available
Magnetic Tape Unavailable . Available
Frequency 50 . 60
MACHINE No.
HOSPITAL NAME
Start Study No.
Disk Size
3–21 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–17 Custom Parameters (Display) (continued)
DIRECTION OF SCOUT IMAGE
Apex Lateral
Kind of Base Picture Direction Kind of Base Picture Direction
Gantry . Head Upper . Lower Gantry . Head Right . Left
Gantry Direction from Operator Left . Right
DIRECTION OF AXIAL IMAGE (From)
HEAD Top . Bottom I-HEAD Top . Bottom
PFOS Top . Bottom I-PFOS Top . Bottom
NECK Top . Bottom I-NECK Top . Bottom
THOR Top . Bottom I-THOR Top . Bottom
ABDM Top . Bottom I-ABDM Top . Bottom
PELV Top . Bottom I-PELV Top . Bottom
EXTR Top . Bottom I-EXTR Top . Bottom
Collimator Type 7mm Thickness UNAVAILABLE Type . 7mm ThickĆ

ness AVAILABLE Type
Thickness 2/3 mm 2 mm . 3 mm (See Note 1)
OPTION
HiLight Detector (HILT) HiLight (HILT) . Xe
Fast Recon (FRN1 or FRN2) Unavailable . Fast Recon 1 (FRN1) .

Fast Recon 2 (FRN2)
300 / 350 mA (MA30 or MA35) Unavailable . 300mA (MA30) . 350mA (MA35)
Cooling (CLV3 or CLV4 or CLV5) Base (CLV3) . Performance (CLV4) .

High Performance (CLV5)
Recon Kernel Type Normal . Enhanced (See Note 2)
Scan Time 1sec (STM1) . 1.5sec ...
PAGING (PG00) Unavailable . Available
AUTO PAGING Unavailable . Available
3D IMAGING (DIM3) Unavailable . Available
REAL-TIME REFORMATION (RTRF) Unavailable . Available
CURVED REFORMATION (CVRF) Unavailable . Available
BMD (BMD0) Unavailable . Available
CCI (CCI0) Unavailable . Available
FUNCTIONAL IMAGE (FI00) Unavailable . Available
CEREBRAL BLOOD FLOW (CB00) Unavailable . Available
XENON DATA TRANSMISSION Unavailable . Available
3–22 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
OPTION
MARS (MRS0) Unavailable . Available
COORDINATE (CD00) Unavailable . Available
DENTA SCAN (DENT) Unavailable . Available
HELICAL (HLCL) Unavailable . Available
CINE (CINE) Unavailable . Available
MIP (MIP0) Unavailable . Available
VIDEO REVERSE Unavailable . Available
DISPLAY IN DISPLAY (DIND) Unavailable . Available
AUTO FILMING BLANK SPACES Black . ...
NETWORK Unavailable . YMS E-Link . YMS Fast E-Link
INSITE Unavailable . Available
SET LANGUAGE TYPE English . French
SET NO. RAW DATA

Note 1 For systems with Version 6.xx or 4.xx (ProSeed SA, Libra) and the `7 mm Thickness AVAILĆ
ABLE Type' parameter is set, this parameter does not appear.
Note 2 For systems with a Xe Detector and Version 6.xx or 4.xx (ProSeed SA, Libra), this parameter
does not appear.
Table 3–18 Custom Parameters (in Change Mode)
FUNCTION MENU
AUTO STORE DEVICE OPTION OD. MT. MOD
OD SPECIAL STORE OPTION NON. AUTO
AUTO DELETE OPTION ON. OFF
MIN VACANT IMAGE SPACE FOR SCAN
FD PACKING OPTION DPCM. ORIGINAL
MT PACKING OPTION DPCM. ORIGINAL
OD PACKING OPTION DPCM. ORIGINAL
FD SYSTEM NO.
MT SYSTEM NO.
OD SYSTEM NO.
MT IMAGE MAX. NO. 128. 256. 384. 512. 640. 768
DEVICE TYPE OF OPTICAL DISK OD. MOD (See Note1.)
Note 1 This parameter appears only if both OD and MOD are installed.
3–23 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

5. Save data files (Scan Parameter, Patients Information, ...):
Note
Usually the sets of information below do not need to be saved since they will be automatically saved
in the ATINST program. However, if you save them, they can serve as backup in the event there is
trouble with the ATINST program.
Save the following data files on floppy disks, following the steps below.
1. Scan Parameter
2. Patients Information
3. Series Description
4. Calibration Files
5. Station Number Information
6. Voice Information
7. System Parameters (including Custom Parameters)
b. Select DUMP PARAMETERS.
...
c. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive. (This step is not required for systems installed in Japan)
d. Touch the [Maint] key.
e. Enter $$, as follows;

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
f. Select SYSTEM PARAMETERS DUMP & LOAD from the Maintenance menu to save System Parameters
(including Custom Parameters).
3–24 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

6. Record CBF user setting parameters.
For systems with a CBF option, record the user setting parameters, otherwise, the data will be deleted during
the ATINST procedure.
Refer to Section 3-6.

7. Record Functional Image user setting parameters.
For systems with a Functional Image option, record the user setting parameters, otherwise, the data will be de-
leted during the ATINST procedure.
8. Record Quick Filming Delay Time user setting parameter:
For systems where the user sets `Quick Filming ON', the Quick Filming Delay Time must be recorded, other-
wise, the data will be deleted during the ATINST procedure.
Mgt
a. Press the key.
b. Select QUICK FILMING ON/OFF.
c. Enter `0' to select Quick Filming ON.
d. Record the Delay Time to Table 3-19.
e. Press the [End] key and repeat this until exiting the Management menu.
Table 3–19 Delay Time User Parameter
Quick Filming ON
Delay Time (sec)
9. Proceed to Section 3-4, ‘Software Loading (ATINST).’
3–25 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-4 SOFTWARE LOADING (ATINST)
3-4-1 ATINST Operation

The program ATINST included in BOOT floppy performs the most of the LFC procedures, as described below:
D Data File Saving

The following data is automatically saved to the MOD which contains the system software:
Scan Parameter
Patients Information
Series Description
Calibration Files
Station Number Information
Voice Information
System Parameters (including Custom Parameters)
D Disk Initialize
D Software Loading (Standard, Option)

Additional option software will be installed during the “Restore the Custom Parameters” procedure.
D File Allocation
File Allocation creates Variable files for the system hard disk, such as image directory, calibration files,
and image data files. It consists of two phases as follows:
– Variable File Allocation (VRALCT)

- Creates blank image file directory and blank calibration files.
– Image/Raw Data File Reserve (DFRSV)

- Reserves contiguous sectors on the disk for image data and raw data.
D Data File Loading

The data files saved by the Data File Saving function are automatically loaded to the system hard disk.
3–26 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-4 SOFTWARE LOADING (ATINST) (continued)
3-4-2 Failure Analysis of ATINST

Each of the ATINST operations are automatically called up after the previous operation is finished. If an error seems
to have occurred while the ATINST program is running, check the following LEDs on the CPW Board:
D FAIL LED: If lit, this LED indicates that a bus error has occurred. (Abnormal state)
D HALT LED: If lit, this LED indicates that the System Operating System has terminated the current
command due to some error. (Abnormal state)
The following two kinds of errors could occur during the execution of the ATINST program:
D An error of the ATINST program itself (Program abort due to a program bug or hardware failure)
D A Deviation between program execution and expected execution

The system has a series of results expected during program execution called Text File. The system traces
the program execution (written into a file called Log File) and compares this with the Text File. If a mis-
match is found between them, this is reported as an error.
If either of the above errors occur, the following menu will be displayed:
Current Task Aborted Unexpectedly

File Name : xxxx (a program name to which an error is occurred)
1. Exit INSTALLATION
2. Retry Current Task
Select Menu No. =
Menu 1: Terminates the ATINST program.

Menu 2: Retries the program in which the error occurred.
Retry of ATINST
After terminating the ATINST program by selecting ‘1’ in the menu, retry ATINST.
The ATINST program will start as ‘Reloading Mode’, or ‘First Loading Mode’, depending on when the program failed.
After the ATINST program is successfully finished, restore the following data files if they were saved as backup, AF-
TER performing step 1 (Restore the InSite software) and step 2 (Restore the Custom Parameters) in ‘Post–ATINST
Procedure’; since the System Parameters HAVE to be loaded AFTER InSite and Elink (if system has) software are
restored.
Scan Parameter
Series Description
Calibration Files
Voice Information
3–27 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-4-3 Preparation
CAUTION
Save existing patient data any time you perform an ATINST procedure or you will lose this
data.
The saving procedure is described in ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure.’
1. Set the SW2 and SW4 of the “BOOT” switches on the CPW Board (Slot #1) to the ON position. See Illustration
3–2.
Illustration 3–2 Boot Switch Setting on CPW Board
ON
1 2 3 4
DNP4
OFF
2. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

The BOOT floppy disk should not be removed until the ATINST program finishes.
3. Pull the reset switch located under the right side of the Operator Console.
The system is reset and “>” will appear on the monitor.
4. Set both the A side and B side of the MOD (contains system software) “not write protected.”
3–28 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-4-4 Start of ATINST

5. Start the ATINST program by entering ATINST:
FHS ERROR C2
> ATINST ‘CR’
HD and BOOT PARITY No. is same : 04.00
Install as RELOADING MODE ? <0:OK, 1:Exit>=0 ‘CR’
(This message appears if the hard disk already contains the system
software whose Version number is equal to the one of the BOOT
floppy. The ATINST program will reload the system software from
MOD to hard disk by entering 0.)
Delete IMAGE & RAW Data ? <0:OK, 1:Exit> =0 ‘CR’
** INSTALLATION START **
Please Insert <<MQ00_[x] >> MOD and Press <ENTR>
The following operations are automatically carried out in the order described:
D Data File Saving
D Disk Initialize
D File Allocation
D Data File Loading
It will take approximately 40 minutes for the ATINST program to complete all its operations.
For systems with two system hard disk drives, it will take approximately 80 minutes. (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
It will take approximately 80 minutes for the ATINST program to complete all its operations. (Zj–Adv)
During operations, the BUSY indicator on the MOD drive repeats On & OFF, and you can know what operations
are being performed by looking at the CRT monitor screen; however, ignore all the inquires that appear, except
the following:
1. PROTECTED MOD
If a Sony MOD drive is used, and if it is not the ‘First Loading Mode’, the following message will appear after
inserting the MOD.
** PROTECTED MOD
After insert Unprotected MOD and Press <ENTR>
This is because that the system software can not write on a MOD media of single density (644 MB) with the
Sony MOD drive.
In this case, proceed to Section 3-4-6, ‘For Sony MOD.’
3–29 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

2. CALIBRATION FILE INCOMPATIBILITY
If the calibration files of old version and of new version have NO compatibility, approximately 30 minutes after
the start of the ATINST program, the ATINST will halt, and the following message will appear, waiting for a
response.
** VERSION OF DATA DISAGREES WITH SYSTEM”;

After Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTER>”;
To resume ATINST, you have only to press the [End] key ONCE.
3. First Loading Mode

If it is the ‘First Loading Mode’, you have to respond to the following inquiry at the beginning of the
* INSTALLATION START **, before inserting the MOD.
Model Name
Select the appropriate Model Name. (for ProSpeed S, ProSpeed SX, Lemage, ProSpeed Advantage,
ProSeed SA, ProSeed SA Libra)
Select ‘Lemage.’ (for Lemage SX, Lemage SX/E, Lemage Supreme)
Select ‘ProSpeed.’ (for ProSpeed S Fast, ProSpeed SX Power, ProSpeed)
Proceed to step 6, after “ ** INSTALLATION END ** ” is displayed.
3–30 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-4-5 Starting Up System

6. Set all bits of the “BOOT” switches on the CPW Board (Slot #1) to the OFF position. See Illustration 3–3.
1 2 3 4
OFF
DNP4
OFF
7. Remove the MOD from the drive.
Remove the BOOT floppy from the drive.
8. Pull the system reset switch located under the right side of the Operator Console.
9. Check that the system starts up normally and that the correct version indication and logo appear on the CRT
monitor.
10. Proceed to Section 3-5, ‘Post–ATINST Procedure.’
3–31 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-4-6 For Sony MOD

1. Set all bits of the “BOOT” switches on the CPW Board (Slot #1) to the OFF position. See Illustration 3–4.
1 2 3 4
OFF
DNP4
OFF
Note
Prepare approximately 10 blank floppy disks for data storage.
4. Perform steps 4 (Custom Parameters) and 5 (data files) in Section 3-3, ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure’, since we will
execute the ATINST in the ‘First Loading Mode.’
5. Press the [Mgt] key.
6. Enter $$.
7. Enter the following (underlined) at the ‘>’ prompt:
> FN SYS:0.FMP.CONTENT.VC ‘CR’

> DL ‘CR’
8. Perform from step 1 in Section, ‘Software Loading (ATINST).’

The ATINST will start in the ‘First Loading Mode.’
During ‘Post–ATINST Procedure (Section 3-5)’

9. Restore all the Custom Parameters in step 2.
10. Restore the data files (Scan Parameter, Patients Information, ...).
3–32 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE

1. Restore the InSite software:
The InSite program must be restored since Version–up procedures using ATINST delete it.
a. Enter the Management menu by pressing the [Mgt] key.
b. Insert the BOOT floppy disk. (This step is not required for systems installed in Japan)
c. Enter $$ and the following prompt will be displayed:
>
d. Remove the BOOT disk.
Insert the INST floppy disk.
e. Enter the following (underlined) at the ‘>’ prompt:
> FN INST:0.&.INSTINST.CF ‘CR’

> IC ‘CR’
3–33 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

2. Restore the Custom Parameters:
Use the CHANGE PARAMETERS function of the CUSTOM PARAMETERS program for the following purposes:
to change the custom parameters;
to load additional option software;
to change the number of raw data files.
Note
The custom parameter data will be restored automatically in the ATINST program (Data File Loading
Function). However, regarding the following, it is necessary to manually restore due to a software
bug:
Start Study No.
Note
As for the Recon Kernel Type parameter, select Normal for systems with Xe Detector (it seems that
you can select Enhanced, but regardless of the selection, the system will still use the Normal type
recon kernel); for systems with Hilight Detector, Normal or Enhanced can be selected.
(For systems with Version 6.xx or 4.xx (ProSeed SA, Libra) and with a Xe Detector, this parameter
does not appear)
Note
As for the Collimator Type parameter, select ‘7mm Thickness AVAILABLE Type’ for systems where
either of the following conditions is met.
1. An ‘R2’ mark is attached on the Gantry rear base and the software version is at 6.xx or at 4.xx
(ProSeed SA, Libra).
2. ‘7 mm Thickness Collimator’ Option is installed.
Otherwise, select ‘7mm Thickness UNAVAILABLE Type.’
Note
For the Network Option parameter, you are requested to select one of ‘Unavailable’, ‘YMS E–Link’,
or ‘YMS Fast E–Link’; therefore, you have to know the correct setting for the system, prior to entering
the CHANGE PARAMETERS menu. To know which of ‘YMS E–Link’ or ‘YMS Fast E–Link’ the sys-
tem is equipped with, check it in the DISPLAY PARAMETERS mode, or check that which of ETC
Board (for YMS E–Link) and ETC2 Board (for YMS Fast E–Link) is installed on the OC.
3–34 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009


1. CALIBRATION
.
.
e. Select CHANGE PARAMETERS, as follows;
f. Verify or change the Custom Parameters which are displayed one by one as listed in Table 3–20, with the
previously recorded Tables 3–17 and 3–18.
Note
If a parameter is not required to be changed, press the [END] key to proceed to the next item.
You must correct the Start Study No.
All the option software to be installed should be loaded during this step.
At the end of this ‘Change Parameters’ menu, you are instructed to pull the reset switch.
g. Remove the BOOT floppy from the drive.
h. Pull the reset switch located under the right side of the Operator Console.
Verify that the system starts up normally and that the correct version indication and logo appear on the CRT
monitor.
i. Using ‘DISPLAY PARAMETERS’ of the CUSTOM PARAMETERS menu, check if all the optional software
you installed are displayed as “Available.”
3–35 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 3–20 Custom Parameters (Change)
Current Model Name This parameter does not appear if the hard disk
contains images.
Optical Disk
Magnetic Optical Disk
Magnetic Tape
Frequency
MACHINE No. This parameter does not appear if the hard disk
contains images.
HOSPITAL NAME This parameter does not appear if the hard disk
contains images.
START STUDY NO. CHANGE See Note 1.
SCOUT IMAGE ORIENTATION
GANTRY DIRECTION See Note 2.
AXIAL IMAGE ORIENTATION
FUNCTION See Note 3.
Collimator Type
THICKNESS 2/3 mm SET The default setting is `3'. If the customer's system
is adjusted to 2mm, `2' must be selected.
See Note 7.
This parameter does not appear if `Collimator
Type' is set to `7mm Thickness AVAILABLE Type.'
TUBE INSTALLATION According to the model of the X-ray tube installed

on the Gantry, select the corresponding number.
See Note 4.
FD CONTENTS See Note 5.
Recon Kernel Type Normal or Enhanced

See Note on page 3-34.
NETWORK OPTION Select YMS E-Link or YMS Fast E-Link
RESET PASSWORD OF INSITE
SET LANGUAGE TYPE Select the appropriate language.
SET NO. RAW DATA This parameter does not appear if the hard disk
contains images.
See Caution and Note 6.
Video Reverse Option
Auto Filming Blank Spaces
3–36 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

Note 1 When `Start Study No' is automatically saved and loaded by ATINST, the original study
number will be increased by 1. So, enter the original No. recorded during the `Pre-ATINST ProceĆ
dure' to New Data.
Note 2 This parameter will not appear if Gantry" is selected as the Kind of Base in DIRECTION
OF SCOUT IMAGE (Lateral).
Note 3 FUNCTION The following menu with the current settings is displayed:
** FUNCTION MENU **
CURRENT
1. AUTO STORE DEVICE OPTION = (OD or MT or MOD)
2. OD SPECIAL STORE OPTION = (NON or AUTO)
3. AUTO DELETE OPTION = (ON or OFF)
4. MIN VACANT IMAGE SPACE FOR SCAN = (XXXX)
5. FD PACKING OPTION = (DPCM or ORIGINAL)
6. MT PACKING OPTION = (DPCM or ORIGINAL)
7. OD PACKING OPTION = (DPCM or ORIGINAL)
8. FD SYSTEM No. = (XXXXXX)
9. MT SYSTEM No. = (XXXXXX)
10. OD SYSTEM No. = (XXXXXX)
11. MT IMAGE MAX No. = (XXX)
Select No. =
2. OD SPECIAL STORE OPTION AUTO: Images are automatically stored to the OD (AUTO STORE
DEVICE), when the number of vacant images on the system HD is decreased to below the number
(4. MIN VACANT IMAGE SPACE FOR SCAN).
3. AUTO DELETE OPTION ON: When the AUTO STORE function is enabled, studies which are
already stored (and not the retrieved ones) are automatically deleted from the HD to reserve the
specified image space (4. MIN VACANT IMAGE SPACE FOR SCAN). Delete operation is performed
on files starting from the study having the smallest study No. on the HD through to the study which
will allow the specified space (4. MIN VACANT IMAGE SPACE FOR SCAN) to be reserved.
4. MIN VACANT IMAGE SPACE FOR SCAN During an image retrieve operation, if the number
of vacant images on the HD becomes equal to this specified number, the retrieve operation is termiĆ
nated and a DK FULL" message is displayed on the Status screen.
Note 4 Read the following Notice:
NOTICE
The Tube parameter allows selection of the proper reconstruction and cooling algorithms for
use with the appropriate Tube. DO NOT select the wrong Tube, as system and/or Tube dam-
age will result.
Note 5 Enter the appropriate No. of the option software you want to install. Repeat this proceĆ
dure until all the software options you want to install are loaded. The software options loaded will
be indicated by Installed."
3–37 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
CAUTION
For systems with Hilight Detector, and if the ATINST was in the “First Loading Mode” (this is
performed when replacing the hard disk drive, etc.), RE–ENTER the number, even if the de-
fault number seems appropriate; and this procedure must be performed AFTER the HILT op-
tion software has been installed. Failure to this instruction will cause image data corruption.
Note 6 If the number of raw data files needs to be changed, select `0' and press the [ENTER]
key. Then enter the appropriate value. Up to 300 can be entered.
Enter 50 for the inquiry on Program Area."
It will take several minutes to complete data file reservation. If there are many bad sectors on the
disk, a `Too Many Bad Sector' message and the new appropriate (maximum possible) number of
Raw Data to be entered appear on the monitor. Enter the new number again if it is considered as
appropriate.
Note 7 If Thickness is changed, the air and phantom calibrations and CT number adjustment
must be performed; if the system has the Hilight Detector, the Hilight Calibration also must be perĆ
formed. However, for the GEMS-E region, read the following Notice:
NOTICE
In GEMS–Europe; 2 mm thickness must NEVER be selected on ProSpeed S Fast, ProSpeed

SX Power, ProSpeed SX Advantage, or ProSpeed Advantage. – 3 mm only should always be
selected for these systems in GEMS–E.
Consult Central Marketing or Service Engineering for more information.
3–38 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

3. Restore the Communication Data:
This step is required for systems with an ELINK option only.

Use the floppy disk saved at step 2 in Section 3-3, ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure.’
a. Press the [Mg] key.
b. Select Communication Data Save/Load.
...
4. Restore the Patient Image Data.
If you archived patient image data prior to performing the ATINST procedure, restore it to the disk. Use the Image
File Management function to restore it. (Refer to Operator Manual)
5. Restore the Raw Data Files:
If you saved raw data files prior to performing the ATINST procedure, restore them to the disk. Use the
SUPPORT program to retrieve them.
*** MAINTENANCE ***

1. CALIBRATION
3–39 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

e. Select FD DUMP/LOAD, or MOD DUMP/LOAD.
Example: Loading raw data files from MOD

** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (MOD) **
1. DUMP (DISK –> MOD)
2. LOAD (MOD –> DISK)
3. DIRECTORY
4. INITIALIZE
*** LOAD ( FROM MOD TO DISK ) ***
Volume Name = ORAW
Enter MOD START FILE No. = 0 ‘CR’ (Enter an MOD file No. This file will be first
loaded onto the disk)
*** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***
** FILE No. = 0
Enter SERIES No. = 1 ‘CR’
** FILE No. = 1
.
.
(The MOD raw data files will have the following ID No. on the disk.
0:0.XX.1;1 (STA:STD.SER.ACQ;IMG - digits other than the series No. are fixed)
Designate series Nos. for the MOD raw data files.
Press the [END] key, and the following message appears:)
Load Start OK?<0:OK,1:NO> 0 ‘CR’

** LOAD START
** LOADED SERIES No. = 1
.
.
** xx Files loaded **
3–40 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

6. Restore the CBF user setting parameters:
This step is required for systems with a CBF option only.
Option Misc
a. Enter the Miscellaneous Application menu by pressing Soft or Appli key.
b. Select CEREBRAL BLOOD FLOW.
c. Press the [Enter] key and repeat this until the CBF Processing menu appears.
d. Select PARAMETER CHANGE.
Use Table 3–21 to enter the user parameters.
7. Restore the Functional Image user setting parameters:
This step is required for systems with a Functional Image option only.
Option Image
a. Press Soft or Compst key.
b. Select FUNCTIONAL IMAGE.
c. Perform MEMBER ENTRY, and then select Gamma.
8. Restore the Quick Filming Delay Time user setting parameter.
Refer to step 8 in Section 3-3, ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure.’
3–41 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

9. Load the V/R 6.02 system software: (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
The version 6.00 system software should be installed prior to this procedure.
>
Insert the V602 (1/3) floppy disk.
e. Enter the following (underlined) at the ’>’ prompt:
>FN V602:0.&.VRSET.LO ‘CR’

>RU ‘CR’
We are ready to Revision Up.

Please copy the FD and execute ‘Custom Parameters’ by ‘Change Mode’.
>FN SYS:0.&.TCOPY.LO ‘CR’
f. Enter the following (underlined):
>RU ‘CR’
SELECT No.= 2S
WHAT FILE NAME ?
SOURCE: V602 ‘CR’
OBJECT: SYS ‘CR’
DO YOU WANT SELECT ? N ‘CR’
IF FILE EXISTS, OVERWRITE OK? Y ‘CR’
COPY START !
.
TCOP: TERMINATED
>
g. Remove the V602 (1/3) floppy.
h. Repeat step f to load the 2/3 floppy.
3–42 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

i. Remove the V602 (2/3) floppy.
j. Repeat step f to load the 3/3 floppy.
k. Remove the V602 (3/3) floppy.
l. Enter the following to return to the Management menu.
> RT ‘CR’
m. Press the [End] key to exit the Management menu.
n. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

Touch the [Maint] key.
Enter $$ :
1.CALIBRATION
o. Select CUSTOM PARAMETERS from the Maintenance menu.

Select CHANGE PARAMETERS :
1.DISPLAY PARAMETERS
2.CHANGE PARAMETERS
p. Press the [End] button to skip a menu and repeat this until the following message appears.
** CUSTOM PARAMETERS END **
***********************************
* PULL THE SYSTEM RESET BUTTON !! *
***********************************
q. Remove the BOOT floppy.
r. Pull the RESET switch.
Check that the system starts up normally and that the “VER. 06.02” and logo appear on the CRT monitor.
3–43 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

10. Load the V/R 6.03 system software: (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
>
Insert the V603 floppy disk.

>RU ‘CR’

Please copy the FD and Reset/Start!.
>RU ‘CR’
SELECT No.= 2S
WHAT FILE NAME ?
COPY START !
.
TCOP: TERMINATED
>
3–44 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

f. Remove the V603 floppy.
g. Enter the following to return to the Management menu.
> RT ‘CR’
h. Press the [End] key to exit the Management menu.
i. Pull the RESET switch.
3–45 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

11. Load the V/R 4.01 system software: (Zj–Adv)
>
Insert the V401 floppy disk.

>RU ‘CR’

Please copy the FD and Reset/Start !

>RU ‘CR’
SELECT No.= 2S
WHAT FILE NAME ?
COPY START!
.
.
TCOPY TERMINATED
> RT ‘CR’
f. Remove the V401 floppy.
g. Press the [End] key to terminate the Management menu.
h. Pull the system reset switch located under the right side of the Operator Console.
3–46 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-6 RECORDING USER SETTING PARAMETERS – CBF OPTION –

(This section is referenced by step 7 in Section 3-3, ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure.’)
Option Misc
1. Enter the Miscellaneous Application menu by pressing Soft or Appli key.
2. Select CEREBRAL BLOOD FLOW.
3. Press the [Enter] key and repeat this until the CBF Processing menu appears.
4. Select PARAMETER CHANGE.
5. Select FROM FILE.
The parameter change menu appears.
6. Record the user setting parameters to Table 3–21.
7. Press the [Cancel] key to exit this program.
Table 3–21 CBF User Parameters
1. Xe INHALATION 4. BRAIN Parameters

Method 0 1 Dimension 1 2
Time sec CT# Upper
2.TRACHEA Parameters CT# Lower
K Upper K Upper
K Lower K Lower
Start Time sec Start Time sec
End Time sec End Time sec
Iteration Iteration
K Select 0 1 2 5. IMAGE CREATION Parameters
Hematoorit % Dimension 1 2
Absorb. Coef. 80 kV K Upper
120 kV K Lower
140 kV Start Time sec
3. VEIN Parameters End Time sec
K Upper Iteration
K Lower 6. Graph Type 0 1
Start Time sec
End Time sec
Iteration
Total R
3–47 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-7 RECORDING USER SETTING PARAMETERS – FUNCTIONAL IMAGE OPTION –

Option Image
1. Press Soft or Compst key.
2. Select FUNCTIONAL IMAGE.
3. Perform MEMBER ENTRY, and then select Gamma.
The Default File Menu (Gamma) appears.
4. Select FILE.
5. Select 1 to display user setting parameters of Menu 1.
7. Press the [End] key to select the next menu.
8. Repeat step 6.
9. Continue the above until user parameters for all of Menu 1 through Menu 8 are recorded.
10. Press the [End] key and repeat this until exiting this program.
Table 3–22 Functional Image User Parameters
Menu 1 [ ]
Appearance Cal. Mask
Iterations Smooth Matrix
Recirc. Cut CT# Lower
Reciro. Mask CT# Upper
Menu 2 [ ]
Menu 3 [ ]
3–48 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
3-7 RECORDING USER SETTING PARAMETERS – FUNCTIONAL IMAGE OPTION – (continued)
Table 3–22 Functional Image User Parameters (continued)
Menu 4 [ ]
Menu 5 [ ]
Menu 6 [ ]
Menu 7 [ ]
Menu 8 [ ]
3–49 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
3–50 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
SECTION 4 – SOFTWARE LOADING (Zj)
4-1 GENERAL
This ‘Software Loading’ describes the Load–From–Cold (LFC) procedure for a full system software loading from an
MOD (Magnetic Optical Disk) and some FDs (Floppy Disks) to the system hard disk.
Perform this LFC procedure when:
D A failure or crash corrupts the hard disk so the existing software can not be used. A Load–From–Cold
rebuilds the operating software on the disk and restores normal system operation.
D CT Engineering has revised the current software to incorporate improvements or correct existing prob-
lems. Replace the old software by performing a Load–From–Cold with the new software.
The LFC procedure is outlined in Illustration 4–1.

After completing the LFC procedure (version–up procedure; to V 4.00), revision–up/version–up procedures (→ V/R
4.01 → V/R 5.00 → V/R 5.01 → V/R 5.02 → V/R 5.03) also should be preformed.
4–1 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Illustration 4–1 Load–From–Cold Standard Procedure
START
SAVE CUSTOMER DATA
SET FMP1 DIP SW
INSERT BOOT FLOPPY
PULL RESET SWITCH
ATINST program
DATA FILE SAVE
DISK INITIALIZE
SOFTWARE LOADING
(STANDARD, OPTION)
FILE ALLOCATION
DATA FILE LOADING
RESET FMP1 DIP SW
PULL RESET SWITCH
RESTORE INSITE SOFTWARE
CUSTOM PARAMETER CHANGE YES

(INCLUDING ADDITIONAL OPĆ
TION SOFTWARE LOADING)
NO INSERT BOOT FLOPPY
CUSTOMER PARAMETER CHANGE

PARAMETER CHANGE
ADDITIONAL OPTION SOFTWARE
LOADING
PULL RESET SWITCH
RESTORE CUSTOMER DATA
END
4–2 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-2 MOD AND FD FOR SYSTEM/OPTION SOFTWARE

Prepare the following, prior to starting the LFC (Load–From–Cold) procedure.
D System Software Disks listed in Table 4–1 ∼ 4–7 (see the table below)
Table No. Product

4–1 ProSpeed VX
4–2 ProSpeed
4–3 ProSpeed Plus
4–4 ProSeed Accell
4–5 ProSeed Accell EI
4–6 ProSeed
4–7 ProSeed EF
The table lists the Volume Names of an MOD which contains the system software, of some floppy disks
which contain application software, and of other floppy disks required for the system.
D Option Software Disks (which the customer already owns) listed in Table 4–8
This table shows all the currently available option software.
Normally, option software disks and also some application software disks included in the system software
(“PG00” disk, “PZ00” disk, ...) are not required in a version up or a re–loading procedure. However, these
disks are required if the ATINST program (described later) failed, or when the system hard disk drive is
replaced with a new one.
However, in V/R 4.01 Upgrade, V/R 5.00 Upgrade, and V/R 5.02 Upgrade, the following option disks are
required (if the customer owns).
Co–ordinate (CD00)
Paging (PG00)
Real–time Reformation (RTRF)
Curved Reformation (CVRF)
3–D Imaging (DIM3)
Calculator (CALC)
MIP (MIP0)
YMS Link (YLNK)
YMS E–Link (ELNK)
D ‘INST’ floppy disk (should be at REV 1)
D Option Software Disks (which the customer bought and have not yet installed to the system) listed in Table
4–8
4–3 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 4–1 System Software Disks (ProSpeed VX)

Name
BOOT 0 (P9180PG) For systems with SMD type hard

disk drives
(2193066) This must be used when the hard
disk drive (SMD type) is replaced with a 3.5
inch type hard disk drive, and hereafter.
BSE0 0 (P9180PJ)
MZ00 0 System Software V/R 4.00 (P9180PF) (MOD)
V411 0 System Software (2118916) ( for Version 4.01)
V412 0
PG00 0 Paging (P9180QA)
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom
Latest System Software: V/R 5.03
4–4 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 4–2 System Software Disks (ProSpeed)

Name

disk drives
ST00 0 (P9180PL)
V412 0
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom
4–5 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 4–3 System Software Disks (ProSpeed Plus)

Name
BOOT 0 (P9180PH)
ST00 0 (P9180PL)
V412 0
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom
HSRC 0 High Speed Recon (P9180QW)
4–6 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 4–4 System Software Disks (ProSeed Accell)

Name

disk drives
BSE0 0 (P9180PK)
MZ00 0 System Software V/R 4.00 (P9180PE) (MOD)
V412 0
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom
HLCL 0 Helical Scan (P9180QP)
CINE 0 Cine Retro Recon (P9180QU)
4–7 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 4–5 System Software Disks (ProSeed Accell EI)

Name
BOOT 0 (P9180PH)
BSE0 0 (P9180PK)
V412 0
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom
4–8 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 4–6 System Software Disks (ProSeed)

Name

disk drives
ST00 0 (P9180PL)
V412 0
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom
DIM3 1 3-D Imaging
MIP0 0 MIP (P9180QX)
4–9 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 4–7 System Software Disks (ProSeed EF)

Name
BOOT 0 (P9180PH)
ST00 0 (P9180PL)
V412 0
PZ00 0 Pan-zoom
DIM3 1 3-D Imaging
MIP0 0 MIP (P9180QX)
HSRC 0 High Speed Recon (P9180QW)
4–10 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 4–8 Option Software Disks
Volume Name Revision Description
DIM3 1 3-D Imaging
YLNK 2 Link DC-X
FI00 0 Functional Image
CD00 1 Co-ordinate
CCIO 1 CCI
CALC 0 Advanced Calculator
CB00 1 CBF
BMD0 0 BMD
HLCL 0 Helical Scan
DENT 0 Denta Scan
ELNK 0 Ethernet
MRS0 0 MARS
CINE 0 Cine Retro Recon
MIP0 0 MIP
4–11 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-3 PRE–ATINST PROCEDURE

Save Customer Data before proceeding. You must save Customer Data onto MOD, floppy disks, tape, or optical
disk because this LFC (Load–From–Cold) procedure destroys any information on the system disk. Refer to the Oper-
ator Manuals to complete the following steps.
About MOD Cartridge Type. For data save purpose, use MOD cartridges compatible with the Hitachi MOD drive in
Japanese sites; or use MOD cartridges compatible with the Pioneer MOD drive in except Japanese sites.
About Floppy Disks. For data save purpose, use blank floppy disks, or initialize them with a volume name ‘FPAR’,
even though they are already initialized with this volume name, otherwise, the previously saved data on the floppy
disks will persist (not be overwritten)!
Refer to Section 3-1-2, ‘Floppy Disk Initialize’, of Tab ‘Introduction.’
1. Save Patient Image Data.
Archive existing patient image data to MOD, floppy disks, tape, or optical disk before proceeding, or you will lose
this data. Use the Image File Management function to save data. (Refer to Operator Manual)
2. Save Communication Data:
For any system on which ELINK or YLINK is installed, save Communication Data on a floppy disk, otherwise, the
data will be deleted during LFC.
b. Select TRANSMIT IMAGES.
c. Select AUTO TRANSMISSION.

Select Change Interval Time.
Enter 20 in response to ‘z Interval Time (sec)?’.
d. Press the [End] key twice.
e. Select SEMIAUTO TRANSMISSION.

Select CHANGE INTERVAL TIME.
Enter 20 in response to ‘z Interval Time (sec)?’.
f. Press the [End] key twice to return to the Management menu.
g. Select COMMUNICATION DATA SAVE/LOAD.
h. Insert a formatted floppy disk into the disk drive, then save Communication Data onto it.
Note
For systems with V/R 5.xx or later system software, the ‘Change Interval time’ item disappears from
the menu. Therefore, this item MUST be set to the (appropriate) default value (20 seconds) prior
to starting version–up procedure.
‘Interval time’ means a period of time between events that the system checks the list of transmission.
If this value is set to a few seconds (e.g. 1 sec., 2 sec....), system error might occur.
4–12 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
CAUTION
If you intend to save raw data onto MOD, be sure to start with a blank cartridge , or one that
does not need to be preserved. This procedure will erase all previous data contained on the
MOD cartridge.
3. Save Raw Data Files:
Archive raw data files to MOD, floppy disks, tape, or optical disk if the customer wants to save them. Otherwise,
these files are destroyed during LFC.
Before proceeding to the following save procedure, write down all the raw data file ID numbers to be saved.
If you use floppy disks, format them before proceeding.

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
e. Select FD DUMP/LOAD, MT DUMP/LOAD, or MOD DUMP/LOAD.
Example: Saving raw data files to an MOD:
f. Verify that the MOD should be set “write enable.”
g. Select INITIALIZE to initialize the MOD.
h. Select DUMP (DISK –> MOD).
i. Enter all the raw data file ID Numbers. Then press the [END] key.
...
4–13 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

4. Record Custom Parameters:

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
e. Select DISPLAY PARAMETERS, as follows;
f. Custom Parameters will be displayed one by one, as listed in Table 4–9. Use this table to record the parame-
ters.
Note
Usually the Custom Parameters data does not need to be recorded, since the data will be saved auto-
matically in the ATINST program (Data File Save Function). However, in this LFC (Re–loading of
the current system software), you have to record at least the items specified at steps i and ii.
In addition, if you have all the records, they can serve as backup in the event there is trouble with
the ATINST program.
i. Record the following parameters:

Start Study No.
DIRECTION OF SCOUT IMAGE (Apex)
DIRECTION OF SCOUT IMAGE (Lateral)
Gantry Direction from Operator
Tube Model (ST1600CT [ISSY] or MX165ZJ [EA])
(This step is required due to a software bug)
ii. Record all the option software that are currently installed on the system.
(This step is required to confirm later that all the option software are correctly retrieved, and to re–install
some option software due to some currently existing software problem)
4–14 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 4–9 Custom Parameters (Display)
Current Model Name
Auxiliary Disk Unavailable . Available
Optical Disk Unavailable . Available
Magnetic Optical Disk Unavailable . Available
Magnetic Tape Unavailable . Available
Frequency 50 . 60
MACHINE No.
HOSPITAL NAME
Start Study No.
Disk Size
DIRECTION OF SCOUT IMAGE
Apex Lateral
Kind of Base Picture Direction Kind of Base Picture Direction
Gantry . Head Upper . Lower Gantry . Head Right . Left
Gantry Direction from Operator Left . Right
A Top . Bottom Infant-A Top . Bottom
Head Top . Bottom Infant-Head Top . Bottom
Postfossa Top . Bottom Infant-Postfossa Top . Bottom
Neck Top . Bottom Infant-Neck Top . Bottom
Thorax Top . Bottom Infant-Thorax Top . Bottom
Abdomen Top . Bottom Infant-Abdomen Top . Bottom
Pelvis Top . Bottom Infant-Pelvis Top . Bottom
Extremities Top . Bottom Infant-Extremities Top . Bottom
B Top . Bottom Infant-B Top . Bottom
Thickness 2/3 mm 2 mm . 3 mm
TUBE ST1600CT [ISSY] . MX165ZJ [EA]
4–15 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
OPTION
FUNCTIONAL IMAGE (FI00) Unavailable . Available
CEREBRAL BLOOD FLOW (CB00) Unavailable . Available
XENON DATA TRANSMISSION Unavailable . Available
BMD (BMD0) Unavailable . Available
COORDINATE (CD00) Unavailable . Available
PAN & ZOOM (PZ00) Unavailable . Available
PAGING (PG00) Unavailable . Available
AUTO PAGING Unavailable . Available
REAL-TIME REFORMATION (RTRF) Unavailable . Available
CURVED REFORMATION (CVRF) Unavailable . Available
3D IMAGING (DIM3) Unavailable . Available
CALCULATOR (CALC) Unavailable . Available
DENTA SCAN (DENT) Unavailable . Available
CCI (CCI0) Unavailable . Available
MARS (MRS0) Unavailable . Available
HELICAL (HLCL) Unavailable . Available
CINE (CINE) Unavailable . Available
HIGH SPEED RECON (HSRC) Unavailable . Available

(for ProSpeed Plus)
MIP (MIP0) Unavailable . Available
DISPLAY IN DISPLAY (DIND) Unavailable . Available
Blank Spaces on Film Clear . Blank
Network (YLNK, ELNK) YMS Link (via Optical Fiber) .

YMS E-Link (via Ethernet) .
Unavailable
INSITE Unavailable . Available
LANGUAGE TYPE English . French
No. of Raw Data

Files
4–16 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

5. Save data files (Scan Parameter, Patients Information, ...):
Note
Usually the sets of information above do not need to be saved since they will be automatically saved
in the ATINST program. However, if you save them, they can serve as backup in the event there is
trouble with the ATINST program.
Save the following data files on floppy disks, following the steps below.
1. Scan Parameter
2. Patients Information
3. Series Description
4. Calibration Files
5. Station Number Information
6. Voice Information
7. System Parameters (including Custom Parameters)
b. Select DUMP PARAMETERS.
...
c. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive. (This step is not required for systems installed in Japan)
e. Enter $$, as follows;

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
f. Select SYSTEM PARAMETERS DUMP & LOAD from the Maintenance menu to save System Parameters
(including Custom Parameters).
4–17 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

6. Write down ‘ACQ. REVERSE’ data (ON or OFF) in the Set Display function.
(This step is exceptionally required in this ‘→ Version 4’ Upgrade.)
7. Write down ‘Preset Voice Timing’ in the Maintenance menu.
8. Record CBF user setting parameters.
For systems with a CBF option, record the user setting parameters, otherwise, the data will be deleted during
the ATINST procedure.
9. Record Functional Image user setting parameters.
For systems with a Functional Image option, record the user setting parameters, otherwise, the data will be de-
leted during the ATINST procedure.
10. Record Quick Filming Delay Time user setting parameter:
For systems where the user sets `Quick Filming ON', the Quick Filming Delay Time must be recorded, other-
wise, the data will be deleted during the ATINST procedure.
Mgt
a. Press the key.
b. Select QUICK FILMING ON/OFF.
c. Enter `0' to select Quick Filming ON.
d. Record the Delay Time to Table 4-10.
e. Press the [End] key and repeat this until exiting the Management menu.
Table 4–10 Delay Time User Parameter
Quick Filming ON
Delay Time (sec)
11. Proceed to Section 4-4, ‘Software Loading (ATINST).’
4–18 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-4 SOFTWARE LOADING (ATINST)
4-4-1 ATINST Operation

The program ATINST included in BOOT floppy performs the most of the LFC (Load–From–Cold) procedures, as de-
scribed below:
D Data File Saving

The following data are automatically saved to the MOD which contains the system software:
Scan Parameter
Series Description
Calibration Files
Voice Information
D Disk Initialize

Additional option software will be installed during the ‘Restore the Custom Parameters’ procedure.
D File Allocation
File Allocation creates Variable files for the system hard disk, such as image directory, calibration files,
and image data files. It consists of two phases as follows:
– Variable File Allocation (VRALCT)

- Creates blank image file directory and blank calibration files.
– Image/Raw Data File Reserve (DFRSV)

- Reserves contiguous sectors on the disk for image data and raw data.
D Data File Loading

The data files saved by the Data File Saving function are automatically loaded to the system hard disk.
4–19 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-4-2 Failure Analysis of ATINST

Each of the ATINST operations are automatically called up after the previous operation is finished. If an error seems
to have occurred while the ATINST program is running, check the following LEDs on the FMP1 Board:
D DMA LED: When this is blinking it indicates that the program is accessing the hard disk or floppy disk.
It shows that the system is operating normally.
D BER LED: If lit, this LED indicates that a bus error has occurred. (Abnormal state)
D HLT LED: If lit, this LED indicates that the System Operating System has terminated the current
command due to some error. (Abnormal state)
The following two kinds of errors could occur during the execution of the ATINST program:
D An error of the ATINST program itself (Program abort due to a program bug or hardware failure)
D A Deviation between program execution and expected execution

The system has a series of results expected during program execution called Text File. The system traces
the program execution (written into a file called Log File) and compares this with the Text File. If a mis-
match is found between them, this is reported as an error.
If either of the above errors occurs, the following menu will be displayed:
Current Task Aborted Unexpectedly

File Name : xxxx (a program name to which an error is occurred)
1. Exit INSTALLATION
2. Retry Current Task
3. Display Log File
4. Display Text File
Select Menu No. =
Menu 1: Terminates the ATINST program.

Menu 2: Retries the program in which the error occurred.
Menu 3: Displays what was executed and the results.
Menu 4: Displays the normally expected results of the program execution.
Use Menu 3 and Menu 4 to compare the Log File and Text File.
4–20 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Retry of ATINST
After terminating the ATINST program by selecting ‘1’ in the menu, retry ATINST.
The ATINST program will start as ‘Reloading Mode’, or ‘First Loading Mode’, depending on when the program failed.
After the ATINST program is successfully finished, perform the following in the order described; since the System
Parameters HAVE to be loaded AFTER InSite and Elink or Ylink (if system has) software are restored.
1. Restore the InSite Software. (step 2 in Section 4-5, ‘Post–ATINST Procedure’)

2. Restore the Custom Parameters. (step 3 in Section 4-5, ‘Post–ATINST Procedure’)
3. Restore Data Files. (if the following were saved as backup)
Scan Parameter
Series Description
Calibration Files
Voice Information
([Mgt] → LOAD PARAMETERS)
4. Restore System Parameters (including Custom Parameters).
([Maintenance] → SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP & LOAD)
4–21 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-4-3 Preparation
CAUTION
Save existing patient data any time you perform the ATINST procedure or you will lose this
data.
(The saving procedure is described in the ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure.’)
1. Set the SW2 and SW4 of the ‘BOOT’ switches on the FMP1 Board (Slot #30) to the ON position. See Illustration
4–2.
Illustration 4–2 Boot Switch Setting on FMP1 Board
ON
ËË
ËË
ËË
1
2
ËË
ËË
3
ËË
4
ËË
2. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive. (The BOOT floppy disk should not be removed until the ATINST
program finishes)
The system is reset and ‘F>’ will appear on the monitor.
4. Set both the A side and B side of the MOD (contains system software) “not write protected.”
4–22 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-4-4 Start of ATINST

5. Start the ATINST program by entering ATINST:
FHS ERROR C2
> ATINST ‘CR’
HD and BOOT PARITY No. is same : 04.00
Install as RELOADING MODE ? <0:OK, 1:Exit>=0 ‘CR’
(This message appears if the hard disk already contains the system
software whose Version number is equal to the one of the BOOT
floppy. The ATINST program will reload the system software from
MOD to hard disk by entering 0.)
Delete IMAGE & RAW Data ? <0:OK, 1:Exit> =0 ‘CR’
** INSTALLATION START **
Please Insert <<MZ00_[x] >> MOD and Press <ENTR>
The following operations are automatically carried out in the order described:
D Data File Saving
D Disk Initialize
D File Allocation
D Data File Loading
It will take approximately 40 minutes for the ATINST program to complete all its operations.
During operations, the BUSY indicator on the MOD drive repeats On & OFF, and you can know what operations
are being performed by looking at the CRT monitor screen; however, ignore all the inquires that appear, except
the following:
1. PROTECTED MOD
If a Sony MOD drive is used, and if it is not the ‘First Loading Mode’, the following message will appear after
inserting the MOD.
** PROTECTED MOD
After insert Unprotected MOD and Press <ENTR>
This is because that the system software can not write on a MOD media of single density (644 MB) with the
Sony MOD drive.
In this case, proceed to Section 4-4-6, ‘For Sony MOD.’
4–23 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

2. First Loading Mode
If it is the ‘First Loading Mode’, you have to respond to some inquiries during the ATINST operations, as de-
scribed below. These inquiries are on 1. Model Name and 2. VINIT. For systems where 1 GB hard disk
drive(s) (SCSI HD) is equipped, there are no inquires on VINIT.
Model Name
Select the appropriate Model Name.
You will be instructed to insert the ‘ST00’ or ‘BSE0’ floppy.
VINIT
Respond as follows, to inquiries.
What Device Name ?
Main Disk HD00 ‘CR’
Auxiliary Disk HD01 ‘CR’
Do You Want to Use LOT Info. of ‘FD’ (Y/N/Q) ?
Main Disk N ‘CR’
Auxiliary Disk N ‘CR’
Do You Want to Format Disk ? N ‘CR’
Do You Want to Validate Sector ? N ‘CR’
Do You Want to Append Bad Sectors to LOT ? N ‘CR’
Do You Want to Lock Out Disk ? N ‘CR’
Do You Want to Initialize Disk ? Y ‘CR’
Volume Name ?
Main Disk SYS ‘CR’
Auxiliary Disk SYS1 ‘CR’
User No. ? 0 ‘CR’
Description ? PROSPEED 0400 940701 ‘CR’
(Example)
Do You Want System Dump Area ?
Main Disk Y ‘CR’
What File Name ? DUMP ‘CR’
How Many Sectors ? 4 ‘CR’
Do You Want IPLT Loading ?
Main Disk Y ‘CR’
What Volume Involving IPLT ? BOOT ‘CR’
Do You Want to Dump LOT to ‘FD’ ? N ‘CR’
Proceed to step 6, after “ ** INSTALLATION END ** ” is displayed.
4–24 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-4-5 Starting Up System

6. Set all of the ‘BOOT’ switches on the FMP1 Board (Slot #30) to the OFF position. See Illustration 4–3.
OFF
ËË
1
ËË
ËË
ËË
2
ËË
3
4
ËË
Check that the system starts up normally and that the correct version indication and logo appear on the CRT
monitor.
9. Proceed to Section 4-5, ‘Post–ATINST Procedure.’
4–25 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-4-6 For Sony MOD

1. Set all of the ‘BOOT’ switches on the FMP1 Board (Slot #30) to the OFF position. See Illustration 4–4.
OFF
ËË
1
ËË
ËË
ËË
2
ËË
3
4
ËË
Note
Prepare approximately 10 blank floppy disks for data storage.
4. Perform steps 4 (Custom Parameters) and 5 (data files) in Section 4-3, ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure’, since we will
execute the ATINST in the ‘First Loading Mode.’
5. Press the [Mgt] key.
6. Enter $$.
7. Enter the following (underlined) at the ‘>’ prompt:
> FN SYS:0.FMP.CONTENT.VC ‘CR’

> DL ‘CR’
8. Perform from step 1 in Section, ‘Software Loading (ATINST).’

The ATINST will start in the ‘First Loading Mode.’
During ‘Post–ATINST Procedure (Section 4-5)’

9. Restore all the Custom Parameters in step 3.
10. Restore the data files (Scan Parameter, Patients Information, ...).
4–26 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE

1. Load the V/R 4.01 system software:
c. Enter && and the following prompt (F>) will be displayed:
FHS ERROR C2 (Ignore this message)

F>
Insert firstly the V411 floppy disk (1/2).
e. Enter the following (underlined) at the ‘F>’ prompt.
F> FN V411:0.&.VRSET.LO ‘CR’

SYS :0000. .VRSET .LO(00,00)
F> RU ‘CR’
Please copy the FD and Reset/Start !
VRSE: TERMINATED
F> (Verify that no error occurred.)
f. Enter the following (underlined).
F> FN SYS:0.&.TCOPY.LO ‘CR’

SYS :0000. .TCOPY .LO(00,00)
F> RU ‘CR’
.
.
SELECT NO. =2S ‘CR’
WHAT FILE NAME ?
DO YOU WANT A SELECT ? Y/N/Q N ‘CR’
IF FILE EXISTS, OVERWRITE OK ? Y/N/Q Y ‘CR’
COPY START !
.
.
4–27 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

g. Remove the V411 floppy disk.
Insert secondly the V412 floppy disk.
h. Enter the following (underlined).
F> RU ‘CR’
.
.
SELECT NO. =2S ‘CR’
WHAT FILE NAME ?
DO YOU WANT A SELECT ? Y/N/Q N ‘CR’
IF FILE EXISTS, OVERWRITE OK ? Y/N/Q Y ‘CR’
COPY START !
.
.
i. Enter the following to return to the Management menu.
F> RT
j. Press the [END] key to exit the Management menu.
Note
Do not reset the system yet.
If the system is unintentionally reset and if ELINK Option is installed on the system, a system hang–up
may occur. If this happens, the system must be started up using a Special Procedure, written in Sec-
tion 4-6.
2. Restore the InSite software:
The InSite program must be restored since Version–up procedures using ATINST delete it.
c. Enter && and the following prompt will be displayed:
F>
4–28 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

Insert the INST disk.
e. Enter the following at the ’F>’ prompt:
F> FN INST:0.&.INSTINST.CF ‘CR’

F> IC ‘CR’
f. Remove the INST disk from the drive.
g. Pull the system reset switch located under the right side of the Operator Console.
Check that the system starts up normally and that the correct version indication and logo appear on the CRT
monitor.
3. Restore the Custom Parameters.
Use the CHANGE PARAMETERS function of the CUSTOM PARAMETERS program for the following purposes:
to change the custom parameters;
to load additional option software;
to change the number of raw data files.
c. Enter $$ as follows;

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
4–29 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

f. Verify or change the custom parameters which are displayed one by one as listed in Table 4–11, with the pre-
viously recorded Table 4–9.
Note
If a parameter is not required to be changed, press the [END] key to proceed to the next item.
The custom parameter data will be restored automatically in the ATINST program (Data File Loading Func-
tion). However, at least the following steps (i, ii, iii) must be performed due to software problems.
i. Set the following parameters to as recorded in step 4 in Section 4-3, ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure.’
Start Study No.

DIRECTION OF SCOUT IMAGE (Apex)
DIRECTION OF SCOUT IMAGE (Lateral)
Gantry Direction from Operator
NOTICE
age will result.
NOTICE
Perform the following step; do not skip, since the V/R 4.01 system software requires the re–
entering of the following parameter.
ii. Re–set the following parameter, by entering ‘1’ or ‘2’, according to the table below.
Tube Model (ST1600CT [ISSY] or MX165ZJ [EA])
Number Tube Model

1 ST1600CT [ISSY]
2 MX165ZJ [EA]
Note: You can confirm the tube model by reading
the rating plate on the tube.
4–30 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
NOTICE
installation of the following option software.
iii. Re–install any of the following option software, that the customer owns.
(Although the options will be indicated as ‘Installed’, still, however, the re–installation must be performed.
To know whether your system includes any of these, see ‘OPTION’ in Table 4–9.
Paging (PG00)
Calculator (CALC)
MIP (MIP0)
YMS Link (YLNK)
YMS E–Link (ELNK)
All the option software to be installed should be loaded during this step.
At the end of this ‘Change Parameters’ menu, you are instructed to pull the reset switch.
g. Remove the BOOT floppy from the drive.
h. Pull the reset switch located under the right side of the Operator Console.
Check that the system starts up normally.
i. Using ‘DISPLAY PARAMETERS’ of the CUSTOM PARAMETERS menu, check if all the optional software
you installed are displayed as “Available.”
4–31 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
Table 4–11 Custom Parameters (Change)
Current Model Name This parameter does not appear if the hard disk
contains images.
Optical Disk
Magnetic Optical Disk
Magnetic Tape
Frequency
MACHINE No. This parameter does not appear if the hard disk
contains images.
HOSPITAL NAME This parameter does not appear if the hard disk
contains images.
Start Study No. See Note 1.
DIRECTION OF SCOUT IMAGE See Note 2.
Gantry Direction from Operator See Note 3.
Thickness 2/3 mm The default setting is `3'. If the customer's system

is adjusted to 2 mm, `2' must be selected.
TUBE According to the model of the X-ray tube installed

on the Gantry, select the corresponding number.
See Note 4.
OPTION See Note 5.
Blank Spaces on Film Press [END] to proceed to next item.
Network This parameter appears if both the YMS Link and

YMS E-Link software are installed.
INSITE
Current Language French is available for language used for display.
No. of Raw Data Files This parameter does not appear if the hard disk
contains images.
See Note 6.
4–32 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

Note 1 When `Start Study No' is automatically saved and loaded using ATINST, the original study
number will be increased by 1. So, enter the original No. recorded at step 4 in Section 4-3, ‘Pre–
ATINST Procedure’ to New Data.
Note 2 When `DIRECTION OF SCOUT IMAGE' is saved and loaded automatically using ATINST,
the default data will be rewritten against the original data. The indication visible in the display might
be the same as the original one, but data has been rewritten. So, enter the original data recorded
at step 4 in Section 4-3, ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure’ to New Data.
Note 3 When `Gantry Direction from Operator' is saved and loaded automatically using ATINST,
the default data will be rewritten against the original data. The indication visible in the display might
be the same as the original one, but data has been rewritten. So, enter the original data recorded
at step 4 in Section 4-3, ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure’ to New Data.
This parameter will not appear if Gantry" is selected as the Kind of Base in DIRECTION OF SCOUT
IMAGE (Lateral).
Note 4 Read the following Notice:
NOTICE
age will result.
Note 5 Enter the appropriate No. of the option software you want to install. Repeat this proceĆ
dure until all the software options you want to install are loaded. The software options loaded will
be indicated by Installed."
Note 6 If the number of raw data files needs to be changed, select `0' and press the [ENTER]
key. Then enter the appropriate value. It will take several minutes to complete the data file reservaĆ
tion. If there are many bad sectors on the disk, a `Too Many Bad Sector' message and the new
appropriate (maximum possible) number of raw data to be entered appear on the monitor. Enter
the new number again if it is considered as appropriate.
4–33 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

4. Restore the Patient Image Data.
If you archived Patient Image Data before this LFC procedure, restore it to the disk. Use the Image File
Management function to retrieve it (Refer to Operator Manual).
5. Set ‘ACQ. REVERSE’ data (ON or OFF) in Set Display to the data as recorded at step 6 in Section 4-3, ‘Pre–
ATINST Procedure.’
6. Set ‘Preset Voice Timing’ in the Maintenance menu to the data recorded at step 7 in Section 4-3, ‘Pre–ATINST
Procedure.’
7. Restore the Raw Data Files:
If you saved raw data files before this LFC procedure, restore them to the disk. Use the Support program to
retrieve them.

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
4–34 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

e. Select FD DUMP/LOAD, or MOD DUMP/LOAD.
Example: Loading raw data files from MOD

** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (MOD) **
1. DUMP (DISK –> MOD)
2. LOAD (MOD –> DISK)
3. DIRECTORY
4. INITIALIZE
*** LOAD ( FROM MOD TO DISK ) ***
Volume Name = ORAW
Enter MOD START FILE No. = 0 ‘CR’ (Enter an MOD file No. This file will be first
loaded onto the disk)
*** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***
** FILE No. = 0
** FILE No. = 1
.
.
(The MOD raw data files will have the following ID No. on the disk.
0:0.XX.1;1 (STA:STD.SER.ACQ;IMG - digits other than the series No. are fixed)
Designate series Nos. for the MOD raw data files.
Press the [END] key, and the following message appears:)
Load Start OK?<0:OK,1:NO> 0 ‘CR’

** LOAD START
.
.
** xx Files loaded **
Check that the system starts up normally and that ‘VER 04.01’ amd the system logo appear on the CRT monitor.
4–35 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

9. Load the V/R 5.00 system software.
c. Enter $$ and the following prompt (D>) is displayed:
D>
Insert firstly the Version 5.00 system software floppy disk (1/5).
e. Enter the following (underlined) at the ‘D>’ prompt:
D>FN V500:0.&.VRSET.LO ‘CR’

D>RU ‘CR’
We are ready to Version Up.
Please copy these FD.
And execute ‘Custom Parameters’ by ‘Change Mode’.
D>FN SYS:0.&.TCOPY.LO ‘CR’
f. Enter the following (underlined).
D>RU ‘CR’
.
.
SELECT No.= 2S
WHAT FILE NAME ?
COPY START !
.
.
g. Repeat step f until all of the Version 5.00 system software (5 floppies) are loaded.
h. Enter the following to return to the Management menu.
D> RT ‘CR’
10. Press the [End] key to exit the Management menu.
Do not reset the system yet.

If the system is unintentionally reset and if ELINK Option is installed on the system, a system hang–up
may occur. If this happens, the system must be resumed using the Special Procedure (refer to Sec-
tion 4-6.
4–36 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

11. Re–install option software:
For systems having any of the following software only:

(To know whether your system includes any of these, see ‘OPTION’ in Table 4–9.
Paging (PG00)
Calculator (CALC)
MIP (MIP0)
YMS Link (YLNK)
YMS E–Link (ELNK)
c. Enter $$ to enter the Maintenance menu.
d. Select CUSTOM PARAMETERS.
4–37 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

f. Press the [End] key to skip a menu and repeat this until ‘OPTION’ is displayed.
NOTICE
installation of the stated option software.
(The same procedure was performed during the V/R 4.01 upgrade, and again, this must be
performed.)
g. Insert the option floppy disk into the drive and enter the number of the option software.
(Although the options will be indicated as ‘Installed’, still, however, the re–installation must be performed.)
h. Repeat the above step until all of the options are installed.
i. Press the [End] key to skip a menu and repeat this until the following message appears.

***********************************
***********************************
j. Remove the floppy.
k. Pull the RESET switch.
12. Restore the Communication Data:
This step is required for systems with an ELINK or YLINK option only.
Use the floppy disk saved at step 2 in Section 4-3, ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure.’
a. Press the [Mg] key.
b. Select Communication Data Save/Load.
...
13. Restore System Parameters using the Maintenance menu (System Parameter Dump & Load).
14. Pull the RESET switch.
Check that the system starts up normally and that the logo appears on the CRT monitor with no error.
4–38 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

F>
Insert the Version 5.01 system software floppy disk.
e. Enter the following (underlined) at the ‘F>’ prompt:
F>FN V501:0.&.VRSET.LO ‘CR’

F>RU ‘CR’

Please copy the FD and Reset / Start!
F>FN SYS:0.&.TCOPY.LO ‘CR’
F>RU ‘CR’
SELECT No.= 2S
WHAT FILE NAME ?
COPY START !
.
.
f. Enter the following to return to the Management menu.
F> RT ‘CR’
4–39 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

17. Re–enter the Tube Model parameter in CUSTOMS PARAMETERS:
e. Select CHANGE PARAMETERS as follows;
f. Press the [End] key to skip a menu and repeat this until the Tube Installation menu is displayed.
NOTICE
age will result.
NOTICE
entering of the following parameter.
performed)
g. Enter 1 or 2, according to the table below:
Number Tube Model

1 ST1600CT [ISSY]
2 MX165ZJ [EA]
Note: You can confirm the tube model by reading
the rating plate on the tube.
4–40 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

h. Press the [End] key to skip a menu and repeat this until the following message appears.

***********************************
***********************************
i. Remove the floppy.
j. Pull the RESET switch.
Check that the system starts up normally and that the ‘VER. 05.01’ and logo appear on the CRT monitor.
4–41 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

F>

F>RU ‘CR’

F>RU ‘CR’
SELECT No.= 2S
WHAT FILE NAME ?
COPY START !
.
.
F> RT ‘CR’
4–42 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

20. Re–install option software:
For systems having any of the following software only:

(To know whether your system includes any of these, see ‘OPTION’ in Table 4–9.
YMS Link (YLNK)

YMS E–Link (ELNK)
f. Press the [End] key to skip a menu and repeat this until ‘FD Contents Option’ is displayed.
g. Remove the BOOT floppy.
NOTICE
installation of the stated option software.
performed)
h. Insert the option floppy disk (YLNK or ELNK) into the drive and enter the number of the option software.
(Although the options will be indicated as ‘Installed’, still, however, the re–installation must be performed)
i. Repeat the above step until all of the options are installed.
j. Press the [End] key to skip a menu and repeat this until the following message appears.

***********************************
***********************************
k. Remove the floppy.
l. Pull the RESET switch.
4–43 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

F>

F>RU ‘CR’

F>RU ‘CR’
SELECT No.= 2S
WHAT FILE NAME ?
COPY START !
.
.
F> RT ‘CR’
g. Press the [End] key to exit the Management menu.
h. Pull the RESET switch.
4–44 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009

22. Restore the CBF user setting parameters:
This step is required for systems with a CBF option only.
Option Misc
a. Enter the Miscellaneous Application menu by pressing Soft or Appli key.
b. Select CEREBRAL BLOOD FLOW.
c. Press the [Enter] key and repeat this until the CBF Processing menu appears.
d. Select PARAMETER CHANGE.
23. Restore the Functional Image user setting parameters:
This step is required for systems with a Functional Image option only.
Option Image
a. Press Soft or Compst key.
b. Select FUNCTIONAL IMAGE.
c. Perform MEMBER ENTRY, and then select Gamma.
24. Restore the Quick Filming Delay Time user setting parameter.
Refer to step 10 in Section 4-3, ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure.’
4–45 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-6 SPECIAL PROCEDURE
Special Start Up Procedure

Note
Do not perform this procedure unless instructed to do so in Section 4-5, ‘Post–ATINST Procedure.’
1. Set the SW2 and SW4 of the ‘BOOT’ switches on the FMP1 Board (Slot #30) to the ON position.
ON
1 ËË
ËËËË
ËËËË
2
3
4 ËË
2. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.
The system is reset and ‘F>’ will appear on the monitor.
4. Enter the following (underlined).

F>RU ‘CR’
SELECT No.= 2S
WHAT FILE NAME ?
SOURCE: SYS:0.ELNKFMP. ‘CR’
OBJECT: SYS:0.FMP. ‘CR’
COPY START !
.
.
4–46 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-6 SPECIAL PROCEDURE (continued)

5. After all the selected files are loaded, set the SW2 and SW4 of the ‘BOOT’ switches on the FMP1 Board to the
OFF position.
OFF
1 ËË
2 ËË
ËË
3
4 ËË
ËË
4–47 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-7 RECORDING USER SETTING PARAMETERS – CBF OPTION –

Option Misc
1. Enter the Miscellaneous Application menu by pressing Soft or Appli key.
2. Select CEREBRAL BLOOD FLOW.
3. Press the [Enter] key and repeat this until the CBF Processing menu appears.
4. Select PARAMETER CHANGE.
5. Select FROM FILE.
The parameter change menu appears.
7. Press the [Cancel] key to exit this program.
Table 4–12 CBF User Parameters
1. Xe INHALATION 4. BRAIN Parameters

Method 0 1 Dimension 1 2
Time sec CT# Upper
2.TRACHEA Parameters CT# Lower
K Upper K Upper
K Lower K Lower
Start Time sec Start Time sec
End Time sec End Time sec
Iteration Iteration
K Select 0 1 2 5. IMAGE CREATION Parameters
Hematoorit % Dimension 1 2
Absorb. Coef. 80 kV K Upper
120 kV K Lower
140 kV Start Time sec
3. VEIN Parameters End Time sec
K Upper Iteration
K Lower 6. Graph Type 0 1
Start Time sec
End Time sec
Iteration
Total R
4–48 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-8 RECORDING USER SETTING PARAMETERS – FUNCTIONAL IMAGE OPTION –

Option Image
1. Press Soft or Compst key.
2. Select FUNCTIONAL IMAGE.
3. Perform MEMBER ENTRY, and then select Gamma.
The Default File Menu (Gamma) appears.
4. Select FILE.
5. Select 1 to display user setting parameters of Menu 1.
7. Press the [End] key to select the next menu.
8. Repeat step 6.
9. Continue the above until user parameters for all of Menu 1 through Menu 8 are recorded.
10. Press the [End] key and repeat this until exiting this program.
Table 4–13 Functional Image User Parameters
Menu 1 [ ]
Menu 2 [ ]
Menu 3 [ ]
4–49 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 11 2205009
4-8 RECORDING USER SETTING PARAMETERS – FUNCTIONAL IMAGE OPTION – (continued)
Table 4–13 Functional Image User Parameters (continued)
Menu 4 [ ]
Menu 5 [ ]
Menu 6 [ ]
Menu 7 [ ]
Menu 8 [ ]
4–50 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 5 – X–RAY ALIGNMENT
5-1 GENERAL
#$- ,2 '$")( ). *)-$-.- *! .# !*''*1$)" # &%/-.( ). +,* /, -
') *! *..$*)
. .*, (*)$)*1

,0$.2
-* ). , '$")( ).
$'. , ). , '$")( ).
,!*,( .# - +,* /, - $) .# !*''*1$)" *, ,

"" → "" $ → #"%
→ ! "
"
→ " "
"
#
,0$.2 +,* /, $- # & +,* /, !*, .# ).,2 ,*..$)" ( #)$-( ) 0$,.$*)- .
,!*,( .#$- # & $! *)-$ , ) --,2
! 2*/ , -/, .#. -*( +,* /, - * )*. #0 .* + ,!*,( $) .#$- - .# +*--$' ''*1 +,* /,
*($).$*)*, , -#*/' *) *! .# !*''*1$)"
→ → → *,
→ → *,
→ *,

WARNING!
ROTATION HAZARD! IN THIS ‘X–RAY ALIGNMENT’, GANTRY COMPONENTS ARE
ADJUSTED AND SCANS ARE PERFORMED. ALWAYS SWITCH OFF THE ‘ROTATE’ SWITCH
BEFORE SERVICING OR ADJUSTING THE GANTRY. ALSO VERIFY THAT NO PEOPLE ARE
IN THE SCAN ROOM WHENEVER A SCAN IS PERFORMED.
5–1 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Requirements
The critical components for X–ray Alignment are all mounted directly to the rotating Gantry; they are:
D X–ray tube
D Collimator (includes a bow–tie filter and an adjustable beam defining exit slit)
D Detector
Tools and materials required for x–ray alignment:
D Polaroid film packs
D Polaroid film holder (developer for Polaroid film)
D G–SAG pin (attached on the bottom of the collimator)
D !" $!% # $% &&$% "$#(#$( !#"#& (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
(Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
D !" $!% # $% &&$% "$#(#$( !#"#&
D !#"#& &$$!

$% ( !#"#&
D ! ' $% ( !#"#&
5–2 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Gantry Geometry
!% ! ! !

(Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)

D ! ! !
!% !!
#
"!#
" !!

% " Zero degrees
! 6 o’clock
(HOME)

D ! ! !
!% !!
#
"!#
" !!

% " Zero degrees
! 6 o’clock
!! (HOME)
D $ ! ! $

!% !!

!# !
#% !

" !!

% "
!!
5–3 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Polaroid Film Use

Use a Polaroid film pack, a Polaroid film holder or squeeze roller for development as follows:
1. Develop a Polaroid film pack with the film holder.
2. Break the chemical pod over a table edge, or use a squeeze roller as follows:
a. Apply heavy pressure to break the pod.
b. Ease up slightly to spread the developer evenly over the film.
5–4 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-2 PLANE OF ROTATION

#$- +,* /, # &- ) %/-.- .# +') *! ,*..$*) *! .# 1,2 !) ( /).$' $. $- + ,+ )$/', .* .# 1$- *!
).,2 ,*..$*) 0$.#$) (( !*, ('' */- ) (( !*, ," */-
1. Preparation:
a. Rotate the Gantry to the home position.
b. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
c. Remove the front and both side Gantry covers. (The rear cover should remain installed to attach a Polaroid
film onto it later)
d. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)
2. Place a Polaroid film at the Gantry 180 deg. position:
Place a Polaroid film within the scan circle as follows:
a. Mark a ‘T’ on the film to identify the Table side. See Illustration 5–2.
b. Attach the film on the bottom ring of the Gantry rear cover using adhesive tape. And put a lead plate on the
film. See Illustration 5–1. (If a lead plate is not available, use a piece of solder)
Illustration 5–1 Placing a Polaroid Film

5–5 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-2 PLANE OF ROTATION (continued)

3. Scan a Polaroid film with Small Focus:
Perform two off–line stationary scans; one with 0 deg, the other with 180 deg.

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
e. Select OFF LINE SCAN from the Support menu.
f. Perform the following stationary scans:
Scan 1 Scan 2
AZIMUTH : 0 deg AZIMUTH : 180 deg
SCAN TIME : 2.0 sec SCAN TIME : 2.0 sec
THICKNESS : 1 mm THICKNESS : 1 mm
FOCUS : SMALL FOCUS : SMALL
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
(Others) : (defaults) (Others) : (defaults)
g. Remove the film pack.
h. Develop the film. Wait the required film development time described on the film pack.
5–6 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

4. Check if the narrow exposure lies within the wider exposure, and the center lines of the two beams coincide within
0.5 mm:

≤ 0.5 mm –––> proceed to step 6.

> 0.5 mm –––> proceed to the next step 5.
"' (" '&%( *#(" %&( &)' + (" %''&* $

(" '' *#(" %&( &)' + (" %''&* $
Illustration 5–2 Narrow and Wide Exposure

!

!
5–7 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

5. Adjust the tube Z–Axis position:
a. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o’clock (home) position.
b. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG’ switches.
c. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts. See Illustration 5–3.
d. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for Z–Axis; note that there are two Z–Axis nuts for adjustment.
e. Loosen the nut that faces the direction in which you want to shift the tube.
f. Turn the other nut in the direction in which you want to shift the tube.
One turn ≈ 1 mm tube shift. The required tube shift (mm) is measured by the following:

Tube Shift =
See Illustration 5–2; in this example, the tube should be shifted axially toward the Table to center the wide
beam over the narrow beam.
g. Tighten the nut previously loosened in step e.
h. Tighten the 4 mounting bolts. (Torque: 282 kg–cm)
i. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG’ switches.
j. Return to step 2.
5–8 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 5–3 X–ray Tube Positioning

Plane of Rotation with Large Focus

6. Perform steps 2 and 3, but this time, with Large Focus.
7. Check if the narrow exposure lies within the wider exposure, and the center lines of the two beams coincide within
0.75 mm:

≤ 0.75 mm –––> proceed to step 8.

> 0.75 mm –––> adjust the tube position per step 5, and then go to step 6.
8. Proceed to Section 5-3 or 5-4, ‘Detector Beam–on–Window.’
5–9 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-3 DETECTOR BEAM–ON–WINDOW (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)

1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Plane of Rotation’ procedure.
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.
c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)
d. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
5–10 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 7 2205009
5-3 DETECTOR BEAM–ON–WINDOW (continued) (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)

2. Check that the x–ray tube anode is at 40 % or higher heat level:
(Anode heat is indicated as ‘A’ or ‘Anode’ at the upper right of the touch screen)
If not, perform the following multi scan:
SCAN TIME : 3.0 sec

THICKNESS : 5 mm
KV : 80 kV
MA : 200 mA
INTERVAL : 0 mm
VOICE : OFF
SLICE: : 30
DELAY : FAST
After the above scans are completed, the Gantry will not halt at the home position. Set the TGP service switches
‘ABT/SVE/FIX’, ‘CONT/HOME/90°’, and ‘SYS/OFF/MNL’ to FIX, HOME, and MNL, respectively, in this order,
to position the Gantry to the home position (x–ray tube at the 12 0’clock position). Then set ‘SYS/OFF/MNL’ to
SYS.
3. Set the film holders with Polaroid film to the Detector:
b. Insert a Polaroid film to the two film holders with the side marked “THIS SIDE TOWARD LENS” facing down
and the “INSERT THIS END” toward the Gantry when placed on the Detector. Make sure that the films are
fully inserted into the holders, otherwise you may lose part of the image. One film holder is for the right side of
the Detector, and the other is for the left side. See Illustration 5–4.
Film Holder
Each film holder has a side tab to position it to the window slot of the Detector, and two end tabs to align it to the
end of the detector housing.
c. Mount the two film holders with film onto both ends of the Detector.
d. Switch On the ‘Rotate’ switch.
5–11 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 5–4 Film Holder Placement

4. Ensure that the x–ray tube anode is at 40% or higher heat level; and then, perform a stationary scan on the films:

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
f. In this menu, perform the following stationary scan:

#
""

!
"
5–12 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

g. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
h. Remove the film holders.
i. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
j. Develop the film. Wait the required film development time described on the film pack.
k. Mark the film ‘channel 1’ or ‘channel 813’ as appropriate.
5. Examine the films for axial centering of the x–ray beam to the center line of the Detector window:
See Illustration 5–5. You should see both the top and bottom edges of x–ray. The edges should be well defined.
Illustration 5–5 Beam–on–Window Exposure

Measure if the x–ray beam falls within the following values:

< 1 mm, < 1 mm

< 1 mm
If these are not met, perform step 6.
If these are met, proceed to step 7.
5–13 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

6. Adjust the Detector Z–Axis position:
a. Rotate the Detector to the 12 o’clock position.
c. Locate the Detector mounting/adjustment points. See Illustration 5–6.

Each mounting location has an adjustment nut for shifting the Detector along the Z–Axis.
d. Loosen the (Allen cap head) locking screw.
e. Turn the Z–Axis adjustment nut in the direction you want to shift the Detector (i. e., toward Table or toward
Gantry) and over the distance required to meet specification using vernier calipers to measure Z–Axis shift
measured in step 5.
One turn ≈ 1 mm Detector shift.
f. Tighten the locking screw to lock the Detector into position.
g. Make this adjustment at each of the four mounting locations. The measurement for all the four locations
should be the same.
h. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
i. Return to step 2.
7. Proceed to the ‘Gravity SAG’ or ‘Iso Center Alignment’ procedure.
5–14 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 5–6 Beam–on–Window Adjustment

5–15 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 7 2205009
5-4 DETECTOR BEAM–ON–WINDOW (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

To ensure that the entire width of the x-ray beam falls within the Detector window, follow this procedure for a Z-Axis
position check/adjustment of the Detector.
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Plane of Rotation’ procedure.
2. Check that the x–ray tube case is at 20 % or higher heat level:
(Case heat is indicated as ‘C’ or ‘Case’ at the upper right of the touch screen)
If not, perform the following multi scan:
SCAN TIME : 3.0 sec

THICKNESS : 5 mm
KV : 80 kV
MA : 200 mA
INTERVAL : 0 mm
VOICE : OFF
SLICE: : 30
DELAY : FAST
After the above scans are completed, the Gantry will not halt at the home position. Set the TGP service switches
‘ABT/SVE/FIX’, ‘CONT/HOME/90°’, and ‘SYS/OFF/MNL’ to FIX, HOME, and MNL, respectively, in this order,
to position the Gantry to the home position (x–ray tube at the 12 0’clock position). Then set ‘SYS/OFF/MNL’ to
SYS.
5–16 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-4 DETECTOR BEAM–ON–WINDOW (continued) (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

3. Scan Polaroid films inserted into the film holders:
b. Insert a Polaroid film to the three film holders with the side marked “THIS SIDE TOWARD LENS” facing down
and the “INSERT THIS END” toward the Gantry when placed on the Detector. Make sure that the films are
fully inserted into the holders, otherwise you may lose part of the image. See Illustration 5–7.
Film Holders
Since the Z–Axis position of the Detector is adjusted on three locations (right, left, and center of the Detector),
two kinds of film holders are provided: two for the right and left ends of the Detector, and one for center.
c. Mount the three film holders with film onto the right and left ends and the center, of the Detector. When instal-
ling the center film holder, push it toward the Gantry until its center tab touches the center mounting support of
the Detector. See Illustrations 5–7 and 5–8.
Illustration 5–7 Film Holder Placement

ÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ

5–17 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 5–8 Center Film Holder

4. Ensure that the x–ray tube case is at 20% or higher heat level; and then, perform a stationary scan on the films:

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
f. In this menu, perform the following stationary scan:

!

5–18 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

g. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
h. Remove the film holders.
j. Develop the film. Wait the required film development time described on the film pack.
k. Mark ‘Left’, ‘Right’, or ‘Center’ and ‘Table’ or ‘Gantry’ on the film as appropriate.
5. Examine the films for axial centering of the x–ray beam to the center line of the Detector window:
See Illustration 5–9. You should see both the top and bottom edges of x–ray. The edges should be well defined.
Illustration 5–9 Beam–on–Window Exposure

Measure if the x–ray beam centering falls within the following values:

< 1 mm < 1 mm < 1 mm

< 1 mm
If these are not met, perform step 6.
If these are met, proceed to step 7.
5–19 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

6. Adjust the Detector Z–Axis position:
a. Check that the Gantry is at the home position.
c. Remove the outer Detector mounting nut at each of the three locations. See Illustration 5–10.
Illustration 5–10 Beam–on–Window Adjustment

5–20 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

d. Loosen the inner Detector mounting nut at each of the three locations.
e. Loosen the bowl adjustment lock nut at each of the three locations.
f. Turn the bowl adjustment to shift the Detector along the Z–Axis according to below:
CW: away from the Table
CCW: toward the Table
One Turn: approximately 2mm shift.
Distance to be shifted: Distance measured in step 5, i.e.;

g. Tighten first the bowl adjustment lock nut, and then, the inner Detector mounting nut at each of the three loca-
tions. The center mounting nut must be tightened first, and then the right and left nuts.
h. Install and tighten the outer Detector mounting nut at at each of the three locations.
7. Proceed to Section 5-5, ‘Gravity SAG’, or Section 5-6 or 5-7, ‘Iso Center Alignment.’
5–21 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-5 GRAVITY SAG

1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ procedure.
2. Perform three air scans with different (Scan Time, Focus, MA) parameters:

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
f. Perform the following air axial scans:
Scan 1
SCAN TIME : 1.0 sec or 2.0 sec (if 1.0 sec is available, select 1.0 sec)
THICKNESS : 10 mm
FOCUS : SMALL
KV : 120 kV
MA : 160 mA
SERIES NO. : 1
Scan 2 Scan 3
FOCUS : SMALL FOCUS : LARGE
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
SERIES NO. : 2 SERIES NO. : 3
5–22 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-5 GRAVITY SAG (continued)

3. Install the G–SAG pin:
b. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board.
c. Rotate the Gantry manually in the CW direction until the x–ray tube is positioned at the bottom.
d. Set the Service switch to OFF.
e. Move the G–SAG pin into the position shown in Illustration 5–11.
f. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
Illustration 5–11 Installing G–SAG Pin

4. Perform three pin scans with different (Scan Time, Focus, MA) parameters:
a. Perform the following pin axial scans:
Scan 4
SCAN TIME : 1.0 sec or 2.0 sec (the selection should be the same as Scan 1)
THICKNESS : 10 mm
FOCUS : SMALL
KV : 120 kV
MA : 160 mA
SERIES NO. : 4
Scan 5 Scan 6
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
5–23 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

5. Store the Gravity SAG data into mean files:
a. Select ALIGNMENT from the Support menu.
b. Select GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE from the Alignment menu.
c. Enter the raw data file Nos. previously acquired, as follows;
*** GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE ***

RAW DATA FILE (AIR)
Enter ID No.=1
RAW DATA FILE (POC)
Enter ID No.=4
The computer starts calculation, and then displays the following:
** START
CENTER CH. = aaa.aaa
AVERAGE CH. = XXX.XXX
d. Write down the ‘AVERAGE CH.’ data.
e. Select STORE FILE.
f. Enter 1 as the MEAN FILE No.
g. Repeat the above steps for the other raw data files to obtain mean files No. 3 and NO. 5. according to the
following table:

h. Press the [END] key to return to the Maintenance menu.
6. Check the Gravity SAG data using SUPPORT DISPLAY:
a. Select SUPPORT DISPLAY from the Maintenance menu.
b. Select FILE SELECTION.

Enter M for FILE NAME.
Enter 0 for MIN.
Enter 1 for MAX.
c. Select SET CURSOR.

Enter 1 for CHANNEL.
Enter 1 for DATA. (The No. 1 mean file is located on the first line)
5–24 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

d. Select PROFILE (H).
Enter a value (= XXX – 0.5) for DATA MIN.
Enter a value (= XXX + 0.5) for DATA MAX. (XXX was written down at step 5)
A graph is drawn, as is shown in Illustration 5–12.
e. Check the followings:
SAG.L is 0.45 or less. (Graph A)
SAG.H is 0.2 or less. (Graph B)
See Illustration ‘G–SAG CURVE (HIGH, LOW)’.
To correctly read a value on the graph, perform the following:

(This is an example to read the value at position ‘P1’ on the graph; see the illustration)
Position the cursor at the position ‘P1.’

Select WHERE. (The channel No. is shown)
Select SET CURSOR. (Use the channel No. above; and set DATA to 1 (mean file No. 1))
Select NUMERICAL. (The value at the position ‘P1’ on the graph is shown)
f. Press the [End] key.
Perform the steps below (g, h, and i) to show a graph for Channels beyond 500.
g. Select START POSITION.

Enter 1 for DATA.
h. Select SET CURSOR.

Enter 1 for DATA. (The No. 1 mean file is located on the first line)
i. Repeat steps d and e.
j. Overdraw the mean file No. 3 data (located on the third line), to check the following:
SAG.3–1 is 0.1 or less. See Illustration 5–13.
Perform the above, by similarly repeating steps c through i. (The mean file used this time is No. 3)
k. Overdraw the mean file No. 5 data (located on the fifth line), to check the following:
SAG.S–L is 0.8 or less. See Illustration 5–14.
Perform the above, by similarly repeating steps c through i. (The mean file used this time is No. 5)
5–25 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

l. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
m. Replace the G–SAG pin to the original position. See illustration 5–11.
n. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
Illustration 5–12 G–SAG Curve (High, Low)

Illustration 5–13 G–SAG Curve (3 sec – 1 (2) sec)

5–26 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 5–14 G–SAG Curve (LF – SF)

7. If the Gravity SAG data is out of specifications, verify that the Detector mounting bolts and Tube mounting bolts
are correctly torqued, and then perform this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure again.
8. Proceed to Section 5-6 or 5-7, ‘Iso Center Alignment’ if you performed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ proce-
dure prior to this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure; or you do not perform ‘Iso Center Alignment’ or ‘Filter Center Align-
ment’ (Section 5-8), perform the following:
Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
Installed the bow–tie filter.
5–27 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-6 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)

&'- #*.#, ('%*)#*. ('%*- .&# 0,1 ./ # $+!/- .+ .&# !#*.#, *" .&# #.#!.+, !#*.#, !&**#(
Illustration 5–15 ISO Center Adjustment

1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ or ‘Gravity
SAG’ procedure.
5–28 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-6 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued) (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)

2. Perform two air scans with a different (Focus) parameter:

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
Scan 1 Scan 2
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
Verify that nothing is present in the Gantry scan area.
3. Perform two pin scans with a different (Focus) parameter:
a. Attach a steel pin, approximately 6 mm in diameter, (ex. drill bit or phillips screw driver) to the phantom holder
at a position approximately 5 cm away from the scan axis center, as shown in Illustration 5–16.
b. Perform the following pin axial scans:
Scan 3 Scan 4
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
5–29 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 5–16 Pin Scan

5–30 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

4. Check that the calculated Iso Center Channel data is within a specification:
b. Select ISO CENTER CHANNEL from the Alignment menu.
*** ISO CENTER CHANNEL ***

RAW DATA FILE(AIR/SMALL)
Enter ID No.=7
RAW DATA FILE(AIR/LARGE)
Enter ID No.=8
RAW DATA FILE (PIN/SMALL)
Enter ID No.=9
RAW DATA FILE (PIN/LARGE)
Enter ID No.=10
** START
ISO AVERAGE CH. SMALL = XXX.XXX
LARGE = XXX.XXX
MEAN = XXX.XXX (406.75 ± 0.02)
MOVE TUBE = C.CCC MM (D.DDD Inch) RIGHT
d. If the MEAN value is 406.75 1 0.02, go to step 6.

If the MEAN value is out of this specification, perform the following step.
5–31 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

5. Adjust the x–ray tube Theta (tangential) position:
a. Rotate the Gantry to the 12 o’clock position.
d. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for Theta; note that there are two Theta nuts for adjustment.
One turn ≈ 1 mm tube shift.

Distance to be shifted: Shown on the CRT display
6. Proceed to Section 5-8, ‘Filter Center Alignment.’
5–32 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-7 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

!/08 ' ,49,7 20.43,49 (20.48 9/, =7(> 9:), -5*:8 95 9/, # *,49,7 (4+ 9/, ,9,*957 *,49,7 */(44,2
!/, 675*,+:7, *5480898 5- 9/, -5225<04. (4+ 08 6,7-573,+ 04 9/, 57+,7 +,8*70),+
85 ,49,7 5:./ 20.43,49 6,* ± / → 1,< 20.43,49 →
85 ,49,7 04, 20.43,49 6,* ± /
Illustration 5–17 ISO Center Adjustment
" !
%&
!"
"
! #
%

!!

" !
#$ !
Skew Alignment
!/, 020./9 ,9,*957 08 ;,7> 8,48090;, 95 9/, +07,*9054 5- 9/, =7(> ),(3 6(790*:2(72> 0- 9/, ,9,*957 *,22 08 897(0./9
570,49,+ 95 9/, 9:), -5*:8 4 9/08 *(8, ( 820./9 8/0-9 04 9/, -5*:8 65809054 3(> *(:8, (4 (790-(*9 54 03(.,8 57 9/08
7,(854 9/, ,9,*957 08 6:7658,2> 04*204,+ 820./92> 95 9/, $ +07,*9054 !/, 85 *,49,7 */(44,2 86,*0-0*(9054 -57 9/08
(20.43,49 08
± /
5–33 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-7 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued) (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ or ‘Gravity
SAG’ procedure.
Iso Center Rough Alignment

2. Perform two air scans with a different (Focus) parameter:

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
Scan 1 Scan 2
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
5–34 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

3. Perform two pin scans with a different (Focus) parameter:
a. Attach a steel pin, approximately 6 mm in diameter, (ex. drill bit or phillips screw driver) to the phantom holder
at a position approximately 5 cm away from the scan axis center, as shown in Illustration 5–16.
b. Perform the following pin axial scans:
Scan 3 Scan 4
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
b. Select ISO CENTER CHANNEL from the Alignment menu.
*** ISO CENTER CHANNEL ***

RAW DATA FILE(AIR/SMALL)
Enter ID No.=7
RAW DATA FILE(AIR/LARGE)
Enter ID No.=8
RAW DATA FILE (PIN/SMALL)
Enter ID No.=9
RAW DATA FILE (PIN/LARGE)
Enter ID No.=10

** START
ISO AVERAGE CH. SMALL = XXX.XXX
LARGE = XXX.XXX
MEAN = XXX.XXX (458.75 ± 0.02)
MOVE TUBE = C.CCC MM (D.DDD Inch) RIGHT
d. If the MEAN value is 458.75 1 0.1, go to step 6 (Skew Alignment).

If the MEAN value is out of this specification, perform the following step.
(The displayed specification is 458.75 ±0.02; ignore this at this ‘Iso Center Rough Alignment’)
5–35 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

5. Adjust the x–ray tube Theta (tangential) position:
d. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for Theta; note that there are two Theta nuts for adjustment.
One turn ≈ 1 mm tube shift.

Distance to be shifted: Shown on the CRT display
Skew Alignment
6. Wait at least 30 minutes since the last scan.
7. Perform the following air stationary scan.
SCAN TIME : 3.0 sec

THICKNESS : 10 mm
FOCUS : LARGE
KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA
SERIES NO. : 11
5–36 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

8. Perform a pin stationary scan:
b. Install the Skew Tool Assy (part number: 2127793) by fixing the pin and tightening the screw. See Illustration
5–18.
c. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
d. Perform the following pin stationary scan:
SCAN TIME : 3.0 sec

THICKNESS : 10 mm
FOCUS : LARGE
KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA
SERIES NO. : 12
Illustration 5–18 Installing Skew Alignment Tool

5–37 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

b. Select DETECTOR SKEW from the Alignment menu.
*** DETECTOR SKEW ***

RAW DATA FILE(AIR)
Enter ID No.=11
RAW DATA FILE(RAD PIN)
Enter ID No.=12
*** START
AVERAGE CENTROID OF THE PIN SCAN= XXX.XXX (462.37 ± 0.20)
MOVE DETECTOR X.XXX mm (X.XXXX inch) CCW
d. If the AVERAGE value is out of 462.37 0.2, perform the following step (10).
If the AVERAGE value is 462.37 ±0.2, perform the following:
i. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
ii. Remove the Skew Tool Assy.
iii. if you performed the following step (10), remove the Dial Gauge.
iv. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
v. Go to step 11 (Iso Center Fine Alignment).
5–38 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

10. Adjust the Detector Theta position:
c. Remove the outer Detector mounting nut at each of the three locations. See illustration 5–10.
d. Loosen the inner Detector mounting nut at each of the three locations.
e. Install the Dial Gauge (part number: U0051BF) onto the metal board located below the left end of the Detector,
using two butterfly fixing nuts. See Illustration 5–19.
f. Loosen the three locking screws; do not remove these screws.
g. Adjust the Detector position by turning the adjustment screw by the amount instructed on the CRT screen.
h. Tighten the three locking screws.
i. Tighten the inner Detector mounting nut at each of the three locations. The center mounting nut must be tight-
ened first, and then the right and left nuts.
j. Install and tighten the outer Detector mounting nut at at each of the three locations.
k. Remove the Skew Tool Assy.
l. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
m. Return to step 6.
5–39 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 5–19 Skew Alignment Tool

→

→

Iso Center Fine Alignment

11. Repeat steps 2 through 5 (Iso Center Rough Alignment); however, this time, the specification stated in step 4 – d
should be 458.75 for this ‘Iso Center Fine Adjustment.’
12. Proceed to Section 5-8, ‘Filter Center Alignment.’
5–40 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-8 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT

$%+ %&,!* !(,!* &%#('!(, &%#(+ ,$! "%&,!* ,) ,$! .*/ ,-! ( ,$!
!,!,)*
Illustration 5–20 Filter Center Alignment

1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Iso Center Alignment’ procedure.
5–41 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-8 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)

2. Perform an air stationary scan:

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
f. Perform the following air stationary scan:

3. Perform a filter stationary scan:
b. Install the bow–tie filter.
d. Perform the following filter stationary scan:

5–42 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

4. Check that the calculated Filter Center Channel data is within a specification:
b. Select FILTER CENTER CHANNEL from the Alignment menu.
*** FILTER CENTER CHANNEL ***

RAW DATA FILE(AIR)
Enter ID No.=13
RAW DATA FILE(FILTER)
Enter ID No.=14

(Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
** START
FILTER AVERAGE CH = XXX.XXX (406.75 ± 0.30)

MOVE FILTER d.ddd MM (e.eee inch) RIGHT
** START
FILTER AVERAGE CH = XXX.XXX (458.75 ± 0.30)

MOVE FILTER d.ddd MM (e.eee inch) RIGHT
d. !
± " (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
!
±
e. !
± " (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
!
±
5. Adjust the filter Theta (tangential) position:
c. Loosen the two bolts indicated in Illustration 5–21.
5–43 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 5–21 Filter Center Adjustment

d. Rotate the adjustment screw to shift the filter for the amount instructed on the CRT screen.
One turn ≈ 1 mm filter shift.
e. Tighten the two bolts loosened in step c.
f. Return to step 3.
6. Wrap–up:
b. Install the collimator cover.
c. Install the Gantry covers.
5–44 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 6 – SYSTEM CALIBRATION
6-1 GENERAL
This ‘System Calibration’ describes the following check/calibration/adjustment:
D CAM Amplifier Linearity Check (by performing x–ray exposures)
D # !# ""# # $ (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

D Air and Phantom Calibrations
D CT Number Adjustment
The above calibration and adjustment should be performed if any of the following replacements and/or system adjust-
ments are performed since the last calibration/adjustment.
‘CAM Amplifier Linearity Check’ may be performed before air/phantom calibrations.
D X–ray tube replacement
D Detector replacement
D ! ! ! # (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
D ! ! ! # (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
D Collimator or Filter replacement
D Plane of rotation alignment
D Detector beam–on–window alignment
D Iso center alignment.
D Filter center alignment
D Thickness change (2 mm $ 3 mm)
6–1 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

(Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
The calibration/adjustment should be:
" → " " → # #!""
The following table shows that $ Hilight calibration (Q-cal, XT-cal, AV-cal, or DG-cal) should be performed
for above occasions and also the calibration/adjustment to be followed.
Calibration "" % "# "" !!

Order replaced or " ! " ↔
↓ ""
"
" " changed replaced
$$ replaced alignment performed
alignment performed
1 Q-cal Q-cal Q-cal Q-cal DG-cal
2 XT-cal Air Cal Air Cal Air Cal Air Cal
3 AV-cal Phantom Cal Phantom Cal Phantom Cal Phantom Cal
4 Air Cal CT Number AdĆ CT Number Adjust. CT Number AdĆ CT Number
just. just. Adjust.
5 Phantom Cal * * * *
6 CT Number Adjust. * * * *
Required Phantoms
Use the following phantoms (furnished with each system) during system calibration.
Make sure they are clean and contrast–free.
D Water Phantom (25 cm)
D Polypropylene (PP) Phantom (35 cm)
D Polypropylene (PP) Phantom (42 cm) (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
D Quality Assurance Phantom (See Illustration 6-1)
D Crosstalk Phantom (See Illustration 6-2) (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
6–2 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 6–1 QA Phantom
Illustration 6–2 XT Phantom

6–3 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X–RAYS)

(Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
" ! #

"
" ! #
"
1. Perform two off–line scans; one with 100 mA, the other with 200 mA:

1. CALIBRATION

Select No. = ‘CR’
f. Perform the following air stationary scans:
Scan 1 Scan 2
AZIMUTH : 0 deg AZIMUTH : 0 deg
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 100 mA MA : 200 mA
FOCUS : LARGE FOCUS : LARGE
6–4 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X–RAYS) (continued)

2. Obtain mean files from the acquired raw data:
Obtain the following mean files 1 and 2, by repeating the steps below.

a. Select STATISTICS from the Support menu.
b. Enter 1 (2) for the raw data file ID No.
c. Select FAN in *** RAW DATA FORMAT ***.

(Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
d.

OFFSET FILE CORRECTION <0:YES, 1:NO> (1)=0
REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION <0:6ch, 1:14block, 2:NO> (2)=1
NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION <0:YES, 1:NO> (1)=1
e.

OFFSET FILE CORRECTION <0:YES, 1:NO> (1)=0
REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION <0:6ch, 1:16block, 2:NO> (2)=1
NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION <0:YES, 1:NO> (1)=1
f. Select MEAN in *** KIND OF DATA ***.
g. Select STORE FILE.
h. Enter 1 (2) as the MEAN FILE No.
3. Apply a division to the mean file No. 1 and No. 2:
a. Select CAL WITH MEAN FILE from the Support menu.
b. Select FILE 1 / FILE 2.
c. Enter 1 for FILE1.
Enter 2 for FILE2.
d. Select STORE FILE.
e. Enter 3 as the MEAN FILE No.
6–5 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

4. Check the linearity using SUPPORT DISPLAY:

Enter 0 for MIN.
Enter 1000 for MAX.

Enter 3 for DATA. (The calculated mean file is located on the third line)

Enter 0.99 for DATA MIN.
Enter 1.01 for DATA MAX.
A graph is drawn, as is shown in Illustration 6–3.

(Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
Check that the non-linearity (shown as E" in the illustration) is less than (0.1 %). In the illustration,
A" and B" indicate the average values of approximately 10 channels each. The difference between B" and
A" (= E") shows the magnitude of the non-linearity of the amplifiers.
Check that the non-linearity (shown as E" in the illustration) is less than (0.1 %) for 363 ~ 563 Ch.
and less than (0.2 %) for the other channels. In the illustration, A" and B" indicate the average values
of approximately 10 channels each. The difference between B" and A" (= E") shows the magnitude of the
non-linearity of the amplifiers.
e. Press the [End] key.
Perform the steps below (f, g, and h) to show a graph for Channels beyond 500.
f. Select START POSITION.

Enter 1 for DATA.
g. Select SET CURSOR.

Enter 3 for DATA. (The calculated mean file is located on the third line)
h. Repeat step d.
A graph like in Illustration 6–4 is drawn.
6–6 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 6–3 Non–linearity at Amplification Change (Ch. 1 – Approx. 500)

Illustration 6–4 Non–linearity at Amplification Change (Ch. 300 – End)

6–7 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-3 HILIGHT CALIBRATION (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
6-3-1 General
This Hilight calibration should be performed prior to the air and phantom calibrations; and the air and phantom calibra-
tions should be performed if once the Hilight calibration is performed.
The x–ray tube must be sufficiently cool (the tube case temperature must be below 10 % heat level).

SOME HILIGHT CALIBRATIONS ROTATE THE GANTRY. WHEN HILIGHT CALIBRATION IS

PERFORMED WITHOUT THE GANTRY COVERS INSTALLED, ALWAYS MAKE SURE THAT NO
PERSON IS IN THE SCAN ROOM.

# !
"! ! ! !$
! !

# !
"! ! ! !$
! !
6–8 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-3-2 Q Calibration
The focus position of the x–ray tube shifts with the temperature change. It will consequently shift the x–ray beam
position along the Z–axis. In this calibration, the following scans are automatically performed:
D four scans (Thickness: 1, 3, 5, and 10 mm) (when the x–ray tube is cold)
D warm–up scans
D four scans (Thickness: 1, 3, 5, and 10 mm) (when the x–ray tube is hot)
This calibration takes approximately 10 minutes.
1. Preparation:
b. Remove the front, rear, and both side Gantry covers.
c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator.
2. Select HILIGHT CALIBRATION from the Maintenance menu, as follows;

1. CALIBRATION
2. HILIGHT CALIBRATION
Select No. ? 2 ‘CR’
3. Select Q–CAL from the Hilight Calibration menu, as follows;
*** HILIGHT CALIBRATION ***

1. Q–CAL
2. XT–CAL
3. AV–CAL
4. DG–CAL
4. Follow the procedure that appears on the CRT screen.
6–9 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-3-3 XT Calibration
The Lumex crystals of the Detector cells generate light when they are hit by x–rays. Since the crystals are placed close
to the crystals of the adjacent channels, the light from one channel can interfere with adjacent channels, causing
crosstalk noise. This procedure creates the calibration file to compensate this interference.
1. Preparation:

1. CALIBRATION
3. Select XT–CAL from the Hilight Calibration menu, as follows;

1. Q–CAL
2. XT–CAL
3. AV–CAL
4. DG–CAL
4. Perform air scans, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
6–10 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-3-3 XT Calibration (continued)

ROTATION HAZARD! WHEN YOU PRESS THE ‘POSN LIGHT’ BUTTONS (LARGE BUTTON
AND SMALL BUTTON), THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO THE 0_ POSITION. IF IT IS
NECESSARY TO PLACE ANY PART OF YOUR BODY INSIDE OR NEAR THE GANTRY, SWITCH
OFF THE ‘SCAN’ SWITCH FIRST.
5. Position the XT phantom at the (scan center + 180 mm) height:
Illustration 6–5 XT Phantom Centering

a. Install the XT phantom to the phantom holder.
b. Shift the phantom to the up–limit, using the up–down adjuster.
c. Position the phantom at the scan center; align the positioning lights and a cross marked on the phantom sur-
face.
d. Hold down the ‘Height’ button to display the current height (ex. ‘–198’), and press the ‘Up’ button to raise the
Table by 180 mm (ex. Until the Display reads ‘–018’).
If the Table can not be raised to the specified height due to the interlock function, switch ON (up) the T3 Table
dip switch on the TGP Board to disable the interlock function, and continue to raise the Table. In this case, be
careful not to have the Table collie against anything.
e. Press the [Enter] key.
6–11 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-3-3 XT Calibration (continued)

6. Follow the instructions that appear on the CRT screen.
7. Switch OFF the T3 Table dip switch on the TGP Board.

Do not forget to switch OFF the T3 Table dip switch, otherwise there will be collision hazard, since
the interlock function does not work, if T3 is set to ON.
6–12 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-3-4 AV Calibration
The light emission of the Lumex Crystal persists after the x–ray radiation stops. This phenomenon is called ‘After
Glow.’ This procedure creates a file called After Glow Vector, used to compensate the After Glow.
1. Preparation:
1. CALIBRATION
3. Select AV–CAL from the Hilight Calibration menu, as follows;

1. Q–CAL
2. XT–CAL
3. AV–CAL
4. DG–CAL
6–13 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-3-5 DG Calibration
If some scans are performed with the same conditions but scan times, the CT numbers may not be the same for these
scans. This is due to CAM Board gain changes caused by different scan times. The DG calibration reduces the CT
number changes.
1. Preparation:

1. CALIBRATION
3. Select DG–CAL from the Hilight Calibration menu, as follows;

1. Q–CAL
2. XT–CAL
3. AV–CAL
4. DG–CAL
6–14 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-4 AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATIONS (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
Precondition
D ! (Qj, Qj–Base)

D ! (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

D The bow–tie filter should be installed.
1. Touch the [Maint] key.
2. Select CALIBRATION from the Maintenance menu, as follows;
1. CALIBRATION
.
.
3. Select AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION from the Calibration menu.
4. Press the [ENTER] key to select all the calibration stations.
5. Perform air and phantom calibrations:
The calibration procedure takes approximately 20 minutes.
a. Respond to the “Initialize Air Data?” inquiry with ‘YES.’
b. Follow the instructions displayed on the CRT screen. The scans performed in this automatic calibration are
described in Table 6–1.
6–15 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-4 AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATIONS (continued) (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
Table 6–1 Automatic Calibration Scans (Qj, Qj–Base)

Warm Up Scan -
Air Scan 17
Phantom Scan 6
Phantom: 25 cm Water
FOV: 25 cm
Phantom Scan 6
Phantom: 35 cm Polypropylene
FOV: 35 cm
Phantom Scan 6
FOV: 42 cm
Phantom Scan 6
FOV: 50 cm
At the beginning of each of the above phantom scans, you are
instructed to center the phantom.
Table 6–1 Automatic Calibration Scans (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

Warm Up Scan -
Air Scan 17
Phantom Scan 6
Phantom: 25 cm Water
FOV: 25 cm
Phantom Scan 6
FOV: 35 cm
Phantom Scan 6
FOV: 50 cm
At the beginning of each of the above phantom scans, you are
instructed to center the phantom.
Proceed to the ‘CT Number Adjustment’ procedure.
6–16 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-5 AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATIONS (Zj)
Precondition
D The x–ray tube anode should be at 10% or below heat level.
(Anode heat is indicated as ‘Anode’ at the upper right of the touch screen)
D The bow–tie filter should be installed.
Refer to the Operator Manual if detailed descriptions are required.
1. Perform Warm–up scans.
After the warm–up scans are finished, promptly proceed to the next step.
3. Select CALIBRATION from the Maintenance menu, as follows;

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
4. Perform all the air calibrations:
a. Select AIR CALIBRATION.
b. Perform INITIALIZE AIR DATA.
c. Perform the calibration; select all the calibration stations.
6–17 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-5 AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATIONS (continued) (Zj)

5. Perform all the phantom calibrations:
a. Set the 35 cm Polypropylene phantom to the phantom holder.
b. Exit the Maintenance menu.
c. Perform an AP (0_) ScoutView scan and an LT (90_) ScoutView scan to check that the phantom is positioned
straight.
e. Select CALIBRATION from the Maintenance menu.
f. Select PHANTOM CALIBRATION.
g. Select ‘35 cm’ for the scan FOV.
h. Center the phantom, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
i. Perform the calibrations; select all the calibration stations.
j. Repeat the above steps (a through i; in step g, select the correct FOV listed below) for the following phantoms
and FOVs in the order written:
D Phantom: 35 cm Polypropylene FOV: 50 cm
D Phantom: 25 cm Water FOV: 25 cm
6. Proceed to Section 6-6, 6-7, or 6-8, ‘CT Number Adjustment.’
6–18 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-6 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT (Qj, Qj–Base)

Perform this ‘CT Number Adjustment’ after completing the air and phantom calibrations.
In addition, if you have any doubt whether the CT numbers of the phantom are good or not, perform the CT Number
Adjustment. This adjustment modifies the CT numbers of the 25 cm, 35 cm, 42 cm and 50 cm CAL files until water has
a CT number equal to zero and air has a CT number equal to –1000.
It takes approximately three hours to complete this adjustment.
Note
The CT# of water will change according to its temperature by a factor of –0.4/_C.
1. Preset the scan parameters for CT number measurement:
a. Touch the [Preset Prmtr] key while the [New Patient] key flashes.
b. Select SCAN PARAMETER from the Preset Parameters menu on the CRT screen.
c. Select I–EXTR (an example).
d. Select MULTI/DYNAMIC (an example).
e. Create preset scan parameters according to the table below.

Select Menu Nos. which are not used by the customer and record the selected Menu Nos. to the table.
For a MA parameter, set this parameter after a Thickness parameter is set, otherwise, the MA parameter may
be automatically modified by the system according to the thickness parameter selected.
Table 6–2 Scan Parameter Preset

! # # " !#!" "!

! " %
! " %
! " %
#! # # " !#!" "!

#! " %
#! " %
#! " %
$#

6–19 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-6 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT (continued) (Qj, Qj–Base)

2. Perform the air scans, using the preset scan parameters (step 1).
Write down the study No.
3. Perform the 25 cm water phantom scans, using the preset scan parameters (step 1):
The water phantom should be centered; if not, perform the following:
a. Touch the [Maint] key.
b. Select CALIBRATION from the Maintenance menu, as follows;

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
c. Select PHANTOM CALIBRATION.
d. Select ‘25 cm’ for the scan FOV.
e. Center the water phantom, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
4. Record the CT number of each of all the air scan images acquired:
a. Display the first acquired air scan image ((Study#).1.1;1).
b. Display a cursor specified in the table below, at the reconstruction center (xPOSN = yPOSN = 0 cm).
Refer to Section 3-1-1, ‘Set Cursor’, of Tab ‘Introduction.’
D Table 6–3
c. Press the [ROI]key.
Record the displayed M(ean) value to the table above.
d. Repeat step c, for the other acquired images (Acquisition#:2 ~ 12).
e. Repeat the above steps for the tables below:
D Table 6–4
D Table 6–5
D Table 6–6
5. Record the CT number of each of all the water scan images acquired, similarly as step 4.
6–20 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

6. Enter the recorded CT numbers in the ‘ADJUST CT #’ program:

1. CALIBRATION

d. Select CT NO. ADJUST. from the Maintenance menu.
e. Select CHANGE CT# PARAMETER, as follows;
** ADJUST CT# **
1. CHANGE CT# PARAMETER
2. INITIALIZE CT# PARAMETER
Select No.=1 ’CR’
6–21 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

-- CHANGE CT# PARAMETER --
<CALIBRATION FILE MENU>
80 kV 120 kV 140 kV
FOV TH FOV TH FOV TH
1. 25 cm 10 mm 17. 25 cm 10 mm 33. 25 cm 10 mm
2. 25 cm 5 mm 18. 25 cm 5 mm 34. 25 cm 5 mm
3. 25 cm 3 mm 19. 25 cm 3 mm 35. 25 cm 3 mm
4. 25 cm 1 mm 20. 25 cm 1 mm 36. 25 cm 1 mm
5. 35 cm 10 mm 21. 35 cm 10 mm 37. 35 cm 10 mm
6. 35 cm 5 mm 22. 35 cm 5 mm 38. 35 cm 5 mm
7. 35 cm 3 mm 23. 35 cm 3 mm 39. 35 cm 3 mm
8. 35 cm 1 mm 24. 35 cm 1 mm 40. 35 cm 1 mm
9. 42 cm 10 mm 25. 42 cm 10 mm 41. 42 cm 10 mm
10. 42 cm 5 mm 26. 42 cm 5 mm 42. 42 cm 5 mm
11. 42 cm 3 mm 27. 42 cm 3 mm 43. 42 cm 3 mm
12. 42 cm 1 mm 28. 42 cm 1 mm 44. 42 cm 1 mm
13. 50 cm 10 mm 29. 50 cm 10 mm 45. 50 cm 10 mm

14. 50 cm 5 mm 30. 50 cm 5 mm 46. 50 cm 5 mm
15. 50 cm 3 mm 31. 50 cm 3 mm 47. 50 cm 3 mm
16. 50 cm 1 mm 32. 50 cm 1 mm 48. 50 cm 1 mm
<xx>
<xx–yy>
Select No. <xx,yy,zz>=1 ’CR’
<xx>: A CAL file specified by XX is modified.

<xx–yy>: Calculates b and c using a CAL file specified by xx and modifies CAL files xx ~ yy.
<xx, yy, zz>: Calculates b and c using a CAL file specified by xx and modifies CAL files xx, yy, and zz.
6–22 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

f. Specify each CAL file one by one (<xx>) and enter air CT# and water CT#, from the following tables:
D Table 6–3
D Table 6–4
D Table 6–5
D Table 6–6
KV 80 kV
FOV 25 cm
TH 10 mm
Enter AIR CT# (–1000.00)=–998.50 ’CR’

Enter WATER CT# ( 0.00)=2.43 ’CR’

b <OLD> 7.84 E–04 <NEW> 7.83 E–04
c <OLD> 0.00 <NEW> –2.43
OK?<0:Yes, 1:No>0 ’CR’
.
.
.
6–23 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

7. Check that the water CT # and air CT # equal 0 1 3 and –1000 1 5 respectively, by performing Retro Recons.
Repeat steps 1 through 6 until the specifications are met:
a. Display an image acquired in previous steps ((Study#).1.1;1, for example).
b. Press the [Retro Recon] key.
c. Select STANDARD from the Retro Recon menu.
d. Respond to “CHANGE PARAMETER?” with NO.
The reconstructed image will be stored with an Image ID: (Study#).1.1;2 (example).
e. Use the same ROIs for CT number measurement as were used for scanned images.
Refer to the following tables:
D Table 6–3
D Table 6–4
D Table 6–5
D Table 6–6
If the Retro Recon FOV is the same as for the last scan FOV, the CT number will not be updated. Perform
Retro Recons with a different FOV as was used in the last scan’
f. Perform the above steps for other CAL files.
8. Save these updated CAL files to floppy disks, if necessary.
6–24 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 6–3 Air & Water CT Numbers (FOV: 25 cm)
SERIES NO.: 1 SERIES NO.: 5
ACQUISIĆ ACQUISIĆ KV THICKNESS AIR CT NUMBER MA WATER CT NUMBER

TION NO. TION NO.* (mm)

*: For systems where 7 mm thickness can be selected. SCAN PARAMETERS SCAN PARAMETERS
TIME: 3 SEC TIME: 2 SEC
MA: 60 mA MA: See above.
ROI SIZE (BOX): ROI SIZE (BOX):
1.00 cm width x 24.0 cm height 6 cm width x 6 cm height
6–25 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009


6–26 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009


1.67 cm width x 40.16 cm 6 cm width x 6 cm height
height
6–27 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009


6–28 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-7 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT (Qj–Hlt)

Adjustment. This adjustment modifies the CT numbers of the 25 cm, 35 cm, and 50 cm CAL files until water has a CT
number equal to zero and air has a CT number equal to –1000.
Note
a. Touch the [Preset Prmtr] key while the [New Patient] key flashes.
b. Select SCAN PARAMETER from the Preset Parameters menu on the CRT screen.
c. Select I–EXTR (an example).
d. Select MULTI/DYNAMIC (an example).
e. Create preset scan parameters according to the table below.


! # # " !#!" "!
! " %

! " %
#! # # " !#!" "!
#! " %

#! " %
$#

6–29 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-7 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT (continued) (Qj–Hlt)

2. Perform air scans, using the preset scan parameters (step 1).
3. Perform 25 cm water phantom scans, using the preset scan parameters (step 1):

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
D Table 6–8
D Table 6–9
D Table 6–10
6–30 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009


1. CALIBRATION

e. Select CHANGE CT# PARAMETER, as follows;
** ADJUST CT# **
6–31 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

80 kV 120 kV 140 kV
1. 25 cm 10 mm 13. 25 cm 10 mm 25. 25 cm 10 mm
2. 25 cm 5 mm 14. 25 cm 5 mm 26. 25 cm 5 mm
3. 25 cm 3 mm 15. 25 cm 3 mm 27. 25 cm 3 mm
4. 25 cm 1 mm 16. 25 cm 1 mm 28. 25 cm 1 mm
5. 35 cm 10 mm 17. 35 cm 10 mm 29. 35 cm 10 mm
6. 35 cm 5 mm 18. 35 cm 5 mm 30. 35 cm 5 mm
7. 35 cm 3 mm 19. 35 cm 3 mm 31. 35 cm 3 mm
8. 35 cm 1 mm 20. 35 cm 1 mm 32. 35 cm 1 mm
9. 50 cm 10 mm 21. 50 cm 10 mm 33. 50 cm 10 mm
10. 50 cm 5 mm 22. 50 cm 5 mm 34. 50 cm 5 mm
11. 50 cm 3 mm 23. 50 cm 3 mm 35. 50 cm 3 mm
12. 50 cm 1 mm 24. 50 cm 1 mm 36. 50 cm 1 mm
<xx>
<xx–yy>

f. Specify each CAL file one by one (<xx>) and enter air CT# and water CT#, from the following tables:
D Table 6–8
D Table 6–9
D Table 6–10
KV 80 kV
FOV 25 cm
TH 10 mm
Enter AIR CT# (–1000.00)=–998.50 ’CR’


b <OLD> 7.84 E–04 <NEW> 7.83 E–04
c <OLD> 0.00 <NEW> –2.43
.
.
.
6–32 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

7. Check that the water CT # and air CT # equal 0 3 and –1000 5 respectively, by performing Retro Recons.
D Table 6–8
D Table 6–9
D Table 6–10
6–33 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009


6–34 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009


6–35 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009


6–36 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-8 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT (Zj–Adv, Zj)

Adjustment. This adjustment modifies the CT numbers of the 25 cm, 35 cm, and 50 cm CAL files until water has a CT
number equal to zero and air has a CT number equal to –1000.
Note
a. Touch the [Maint.] key while the [New Patient] key flashes.
b. Select SCAN PRESET PARAMETER from the Maintenance menu on the CRT screen.
c. Touch the [AuxB] (an example) key on the touch screen.
d. Touch the [Para. Set] key.
e. Touch the [Multi Scan] key.
f. Create preset scan parameters according to the table below.


25 (Air Scan) Set the scan parameters described in Table 6-12
35 (Air Scan) Same as above
50 (Air Scan) Same as above
25 (Water Scan) Set the scan parameters described in Table 6-12
35 (Water Scan) Same as above
50 (Water Scan) Same as above
Slice Count:12
INTVAL: 0
6–37 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-8 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT (continued) (Zj–Adv, Zj)

2. Perform air scans, using the preset scan parameters (step 1).
3. Perform 25 cm water phantom scans, using the preset scan parameters (step 1):

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
D Table 6–12
D Table 6–13
D Table 6–14
6–38 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009


1. CALIBRATION

e. Select LARGE/SMALL, as follows;
** ADJUST CT# (SELECT FOCUS SIZE) **

1. LARGE
2. SMALL
3. LARGE/SMALL

Select No.=3
f. Select CHANGE CT# PARAMETER, as follows;
** ADJUST CT# (LARGE/SMALL) **

6–39 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

80 kV 120 kV 140 kV
1. 25 cm 10 mm 13. 25 cm 10 mm 25. 25 cm 10 mm
2. 25 cm 5 mm 14. 25 cm 5 mm 26. 25 cm 5 mm
3. 25 cm 3 mm 15. 25 cm 3 mm 27. 25 cm 3 mm
4. 25 cm 1 mm 16. 25 cm 1 mm 28. 25 cm 1 mm
5. 35 cm 10 mm 17. 35 cm 10 mm 29. 35 cm 10 mm
6. 35 cm 5 mm 18. 35 cm 5 mm 30. 35 cm 5 mm
7. 35 cm 3 mm 19. 35 cm 3 mm 31. 35 cm 3 mm
8. 35 cm 1 mm 20. 35 cm 1 mm 32. 35 cm 1 mm
9. 50 cm 10 mm 21. 50 cm 10 mm 33. 50 cm 10 mm
10. 50 cm 5 mm 22. 50 cm 5 mm 34. 50 cm 5 mm
11. 50 cm 3 mm 23. 50 cm 3 mm 35. 50 cm 3 mm
12. 50 cm 1 mm 24. 50 cm 1 mm 36. 50 cm 1 mm
<xx>
<xx–yy>

g. Specify each CAL file one by one (<xx>) and enter air CT# and water CT#, from the following tables:
D Table 6–12
D Table 6–13
D Table 6–14
KV 80 kV
FOV 25 cm
TH 10 mm
Enter AIR CT# (–1000.00)=–998.50 ’CR’


b <OLD> 7.84 E–04 <NEW> 7.83 E–04
c <OLD> 0.00 <NEW> –2.43
.
.
.
6–40 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

7. Check that the water CT # and air CT # equal 0 1 3 and –10001 5 respectively, by performing Retro Recons.
D Table 6–12
D Table 6–13
D Table 6–14
6–41 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 6–12 Air & Water CT Numbers (FOV: 25 cm) (Zj–Adv)
ACQUISIĆ KV THICKNESS FOCUS AIR CT NUMBER MA WATER CT NUMBER

TION NO. (mm)

SCAN PARAMETERS SCAN PARAMETERS

6–42 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 6–12 Air & Water CT Numbers (FOV: 25 cm) (Zj)
ACQUISIĆ KV THICKNESS FOCUS AIR CT NUMBER WATER CT NUMBER

TION NO. (mm)


MA: 60 mA MA: 160 mA
ROI SIZE (CIRCLE): ROI SIZE (CIRCLE):
23 cm diameter 6 cm diameter
6–43 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

TION NO. (mm)


6–44 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

TION NO. (mm)


6–45 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

TION NO. (mm)


6–46 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

TION NO. (mm)


6–47 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
6–48 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 7 – IMAGE PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
7-1 GENERAL
This ‘Image Performance Verification’ contains tables of scan techniques and specifications for evaluating image
performance.
General Requirements
Perform the following before continuing:
1. Verify that system calibration (air and phantom calibrations, ...) has been completed.
All image performance scans must use calibration data that are less than 8 hours old.
2. Warm up the system at least 2.0 hours (minimum) prior to data collection.
Required Phantoms
Use the following phantoms (furnished with each system) during image performance verification.
Make sure they are clean and contrast–free.
D

D
D (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
D
7–1 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
7-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE

1. Acquire the scans listed in Table 7–1 ~ 7–9 (see the table below).
Table No. Product

7–1 ProSpeed S
7–2 ProSpeed SX, Lemage, Qj–Base
7–3 ProSpeed SX, Lemage, Qj–Base
(For systems where 1 sec or 0.8 sec scan is available)
7–4 Qj–Base
(For systems where ‘24 kW Defeature Option’ is installed
(‘MA20’ option disk is installed)).
7–5 Qj–Hlt
7–6 Qj–Hlt
(For systems where 1 sec or 0.8 sec scan is available)
7–7 Zj–Adv
7–8 ProSpeed, ProSpeed Plus, ProSeed, ProSeed EF
7–9 ProSpeed VX, ProSeed Accell, ProSeed Accell EI
Select ‘Abdomen,’ or any anatomy of interest for ‘Infant.’
7–2 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
7-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE (continued)

2. For each slice, verify the following:
D Visually check each image for rings, bands, streaks, shadings or artifacts near the image center.
D Position a circular ROI at the locations listed below (see also Illustration 7–1) and write down the data on
the table.
Mc – Mean CT number of a center ROI.
SD – Standard deviation of a center ROI.
Mo – Mean CT number of a ROI 10 cm off center (Y = 0).
D The ROI size should be 2 cm in diameter. (ProSpeed S, ProSpeed SX, Lemage, Qj–Base, Zj)
D The ROI size (diameter) should be changed according to the FOV size as described below:

25 cm 2 cm
35 cm 3 cm
50 cm 4 cm
To display a ROI data;

a. Position a cursor (here, a circle cursor). Refer to Section 3-1-1, ‘Set Cursor’, of Tab ‘Introduction.’
b. Press the [ROI] key.
Verify that the data falls within the specifications shown.
Artifact Check Using QA (Quality Assurance) Phantom

Use the QA Phantom (see Illustration 7–2) only to check if any artifact is observed on the image or not.
7–3 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 7–1 ROI Locations (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
+Y ROI CIRCLE (2 cm
IN DIAMETER)
IMAGE
-X +X
Mc (0.0 cm) Mo (10.0 cm)
SD (0.0 cm)
-Y
Illustration 7–1 ROI Locations (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
+Y ROI CIRCLE (2, 3, OR

4 cm IN DIAMETER)
IMAGE
-X +X
Mc (0.0 cm) Mo (10.0 cm)
SD (0.0 cm)
-Y
7–4 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 7–2 QA Phantom
7–5 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
7-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

The 46–241852G1 Quality Assurance Phantom is used by both the customers and service people to assess image
quality in accordance with BRH requirements (21CFR, Section 1030 33). Use of this phantom is described in the
Operator’s Manual.
The operator’s manual instructs customers to perform QA checks on a daily basis. Service persons, however, shall
perform QA checks after any of the following events has occurred:
D System installation
D X–ray tube replacement
D Detector replacement
D KV/MA calibration
D Periodic maintenance.
Note
The service person shall complete all of the procedures in the Operator’s Manual.
7–6 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–1 Image Performance Check (ProSpeed S)
PTM FOV KV TIME MA THK SPECIFICATION DATA Description
(cm) (sec) (mm) MC SD MO MC SD MO
42 cm PP 50 120 1.5 200 10 M10 ≤ 15.5 M10 ± 3 –120 ≤ M10 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 50 120 2 200 5 M11 – – – – –120 ≤ M11 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 50 120 2 200 3 M11 ± 3 – – – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 200 1 M11 ± 5 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 140 1.5 160 10 M12 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M12 ≤ –90
42 cm PP 42 120 1.5 200 10 M20 ≤ 15.5 M20 ± 3 –120 ≤ M20 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 42 120 2 200 5 M21 _ _ – – –120 ≤ M21 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 42 120 2 200 3 M21 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 42 120 3 200 1 M21 ± 5 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 42 140 1.5 160 10 M22 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M22 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 120 1.5 200 10 M30 ≤ 11.2 M30 ± 3 –120 ≤ M30 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 35 140 1.5 160 10 M31 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M31 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 80 3 250 10 M32 _ _ – – –143 ≤ M32 ≤ –120
25 cm WTR 35 120 1.5 200 10 0±2 ≤ 5.5 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 200 5 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 200 3 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 200 1 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 140 1.5 160 10 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 80 1.5 250 10 0±3 _ _ – –
7–7 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–1 Image Performance Check (continued) (ProSpeed S)
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 200 10 0±2 3.4 ~ 6.2 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 200 5 0±2 4.4 ~ 8.4 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 3 0±2 5.8 ~ 11.2 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 1 0±3 7.4 ~ 14 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 10 0±2 3.3 ~ 6.2 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 160 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 130 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 100 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 80 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 60 10 0±2 6.0 ~ 11 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 80 3 250 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 140 3 160 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 60 10 M101, _ _ – – Perform 20 slices/40 sec scans.

M102 ~ M130 M101 = 0 ± 2, M102 ~ M120: M101 ± 2
QA 25 120 1.5 200 10 0±3 _ _ – – Verify that no artifact is observed on

Phantom the image.
7–8 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–2 Image Performance Check (ProSpeed SX, Lemage, Qj–Base)
42 cm PP 50 120 1.5 250 10 M10 ≤ 16 M10 ± 3 –120 ≤ M10 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 50 120 2 250 5 M11 – – – – –120 ≤ M11 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 50 120 2 250 3 M11 ± 3 – – – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 200 1 M11 ± 5 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 140 1.5 200 10 M12 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M12 ≤ –90
42 cm PP 42 120 1.5 250 10 M20 ≤ 16 M20 ± 3 –120 ≤ M20 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 42 120 2 250 5 M21 _ _ – – –120 ≤ M21 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 42 120 2 250 3 M21 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 42 120 3 200 1 M21 ± 5 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 42 140 1.5 200 10 M22 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M22 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 120 1.5 250 10 M30 ≤ 11.6 M30 ± 3 –120 ≤ M30 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 35 140 1.5 200 10 M31 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M31 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 80 3 350 10 M32 _ _ – – –143 ≤ M32 ≤ –120
25 cm WTR 35 120 1.5 250 10 0±2 ≤ 5.7 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 250 5 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 250 3 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 200 1 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 140 1.5 200 10 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 80 1.5 350 10 0±3 _ _ – –
7–9 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–2 Image Performance Check (continued) (ProSpeed SX, Lemage, Qj–Base)
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 250 10 0±2 3.0 ~ 5.6 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 250 5 0±2 3.9 ~ 7.5 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 250 3 0±2 5.3 ~ 10.2 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 1 0±3 7.4 ~ 14 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 250 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 10 0±2 3.3 ~ 6.2 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 160 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 130 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 100 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 80 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 60 10 0±2 6.0 ~ 11 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 80 3 350 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 140 3 200 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 80 10 M101, _ _ – – Perform 20 slices/30 sec scan.

M102 ~ M120 M101 = 0 ± 2, M102 ~ M120: M101 ± 2

Phantom the image.
7–10 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–3 Image Performance Check (ProSpeed SX, Lemage, Qj–Base)

(Note 7)
42 cm PP 50 120 1.5 250 10 M10 ≤ 16.0 M10 ± 3 –120 ≤ M10 ≤ –100 (Note 1)
42 cm PP 50 120 1 350 10 M10 ≤ 16.6 M10 ± 3 –120 ≤ M10 ≤ –100 (Note 2)
42 cm PP 50 120 0.8 250 10 ≤ M10 + 4 – – – – (Note 5)
35 cm PP 50 120 2 250 5 M11 – – – – –120 ≤ M11 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 50 120 2 250 7 M11 ± 3 – – – –
35 cm PP 50 120 2 250 3 M11 ± 3 – – – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 200 2 M11 ± 5 – – – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 200 1 M11 ± 5 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 140 1.5 200 10 M12 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M12 ≤ –90
42 cm PP 42 120 1.5 250 10 M20 ≤ 16.0 M20 ± 3 –120 ≤ M20 ≤ –100 (Note 1)
42 cm PP 42 120 1 350 10 M20 ≤ 16.6 M20 ± 3 –120 ≤ M20 ≤ –100 (Note 2)
35 cm PP 42 120 2 250 5 M21 – – – – –120 ≤ M21 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 42 120 2 250 3 M21 ± 3 – – – –
35 cm PP 42 120 3 200 1 M21 ± 5 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 42 140 1.5 200 10 M22 – – – – –110 ≤ M22 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 120 1.5 250 10 M30 ≤ 11.6 M30 ± 3 –120 ≤ M30 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 35 120 0.8 250 10 ≤ M30 + 4 – – – – (Note 5)
35 cm PP 35 140 1.5 200 10 M31 – – – – –110 ≤ M31 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 80 3 350 10 M32 – – – – –143 ≤ M32 ≤ –120
7–11 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

(Note 7)
25 cm WTR 35 120 1.5 250 10 0±3 ≤ 5.7 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 35 120 1.5 250 7 0±3 _ _
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 250 5 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 250 3 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 200 2 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 200 1 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 140 1.5 200 10 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 80 1.5 350 10 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 250 10 0±2 3.0 ~ 5.6 XC ± 2 (Note 3)
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 250 7 0±2 3.5 ~ 6.7 – – (Note 3)
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 250 5 0±2 3.9 ~ 7.5 _ – (Note 3)
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 250 3 0±2 5.3 ~ 10.2 _ – (Note 3)
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 2 0±3 5.9 ~ 11.5 _ – (Note 3)
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 1 0±3 7.4 ~ 14.0 _ – (Note 3)
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 300 10 0±2 3.1 ~ 6.0 XC ± 2 (Note 4)
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 300 7 0±2 3.6 ~ 7.2 XC ± 2 (Note 4)
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 300 5 0±2 4.1 ~ 8.0 _ – (Note 4)
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 300 3 0±2 5.5 ~ 10.8 _ – (Note 4)
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 2 0±3 5.9 ~ 11.5 _ – (Note 4)
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 1 0±3 7.4 ~ 14.0 _ – (Note 4)
7–12 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 250 10 0±2 – – – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 10 0±2 3.3 ~ 6.2 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 160 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 130 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 100 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 80 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 60 10 0±2 6.0 ~ 11.0 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 80 3 350 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 140 3 160 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 80 10 M101 ~ M130 _ _ – – Perform 30 slices/30 sec scan.

M101 = 0 ± 2, M102 ~ M130 = M101 ± 2
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 60 10 – _ _ – – – Perform 60 slices/60 sec scan.

(See Note 6)

Phantom the image.
Note 1: For systems where the maximum MA available is 300 mA or below only.
Note 2: For systems where the maximum MA available is 350 mA only.
Note 4: For systems where the maximum MA available is 300 mA or 350 mA only.
Note 5: For systems where 0.8 sec scan is available only.
Note 6: For systems which have a 60 continuous scan capability only.
Note 7: For systems where 7 mm thickness can not be selected, ignore checks for 7 mm and 2 mm; for systems where 7 mm thickness can be selected also, however,
checks for 7 mm and 2 mm can be skipped.
7–13 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–4 Image Performance Check (Qj–Base)
42 cm PP 50 120 2 200 10 M10 ≤ 15.5 M10 ± 3 –120 ≤ M10 ≤ –100
42 cm PP 50 120 0.8 200 10 ≤ M10 +5 – – – – (See Note 1)
35 cm PP 50 120 3 160 5 M11 – – – – –120 ≤ M11 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 50 120 3 160 3 M11 ± 3 – – – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 200 1 M11 ± 5 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 140 2 160 10 M12 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M12 ≤ –90
42 cm PP 42 120 2 200 10 M20 ≤ 15.5 M20 ± 3 –120 ≤ M20 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 42 120 3 160 5 M21 _ _ – – –120 ≤ M21 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 42 120 3 160 3 M21 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 42 120 3 200 1 M21 ± 5 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 42 140 2 160 10 M22 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M22 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 120 2 200 10 M30 ≤ 11.3 M30 ± 3 –120 ≤ M30 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 35 120 0.8 200 10 ≤ M30 +5 – – – – (See Note 1)
35 cm PP 35 140 2 160 10 M31 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M31 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 80 3 300 10 M32 _ _ – – –143 ≤ M32 ≤ –120
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 200 10 0±3 ≤ 5.6 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 160 5 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 160 3 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 200 1 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 140 2 160 10 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 80 2 300 10 0±3 _ _ – –
7–14 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–4 Image Performance Check (continued) (Qj–Base)
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 160 10 0±2 ≤ 5.8 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 160 5 0±2 ≤ 7.7 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 160 3 0±2 ≤ 10.5 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 1 0±3 ≤ 14.0 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 10 0±2 ≤ 6.2 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 130 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 100 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 80 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 60 10 0±2 ≤ 11.0 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 80 3 300 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 140 3 160 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 1 80 10 M101, _ _ – – Perform 30 slices/30 sec scan.

M102 ~ M130 M101 = 0 ± 2, M102 ~ M130: M101 ± 2
25 cm WTR 25 120 1 60 10 _ _ _ _ – – Perform 60 slices/60 sec scan.

(See Note 2)

Phantom the image.

7–15 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–5 Image Performance Check (Qj–Hlt)
42 cm PP 50 120 1.5 160 10 M10 ≤ 15.5 – – –120 ≤ M10 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 50 120 1.5 200 5 M11 – – – – –120 ≤ M11 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 50 120 1.5 200 3 M11 ± 3 – – – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 200 1.3 M11 ± 5 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 140 1.5 160 10 M12 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M12 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 120 1.5 160 10 M30 ≤ 11.6 M30 ± 3 –120 ≤ M30 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 35 140 1.5 130 10 M31 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M31 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 80 3 250 10 M32 _ _ – – –150 ≤ M32 ≤ –130
25 cm WTR 50 120 1.5 160 10 0±3 ≤ 4.0 XC ± 3 Xo should be measured 9 cm off cen-
ter ROI.
25 cm WTR 35 120 1.5 160 10 0±2 ≤ 5.0 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 35 120 1.5 200 5 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 1.5 200 3 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 200 1.3 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 140 1.5 160 10 0±3 – – – –
25 cm WTR 35 80 1.5 250 10 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 200 10 0±2 3.0~5.6 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 200 5 0±2 3.9~7.5 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 200 3 0±2 6.0~12 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 1.3 0±3 6.0~12 _ –
7–16 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–5 Image Performance Check (continued) (Qj–Hlt)
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 250 10 0±2 – – – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 200 10 0±2 2.5 ~ 5.2 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 160 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 130 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 100 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 80 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 60 10 0±2 5.0 ~ 9.1 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 80 2 250 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 140 2 160 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 60 10 M101, _ _ – – Perform 20 slices/30 sec scan.

M102 ~ M120 M101 = 0 ± 2, M102 ~ M120=M101 ± 2
7–17 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–6 Image Performance Check (Qj–Hlt)

(Note 5)
42 cm PP 50 120 1 250 10 M10 ≤ 15.2 – – –120 ≤ M10 ≤ –100
42 cm PP 50 120 0.8 300 10 M10 ± 2 ≤ 15.6 – – (See Note 4)
35 cm PP 50 120 1.5 200 5 M11 – – – – –120 ≤ M11 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 50 120 1.5 200 7 M11 ± 3 – – – –
35 cm PP 50 120 1.5 200 3 M11 ± 3 – – – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 200 2 M11 ± 5 – – – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 200 1 M11 ± 5 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 140 1.5 160 10 M12 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M12 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 120 1 250 10 M30 ≤ 11.4 M30 ± 3 –120 ≤ M30 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 35 120 0.8 300 10 M30 ± 2 ≤ 11.7 – – (See Note 4)
35 cm PP 35 140 1 200 10 M31 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M31 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 80 3 250 10 M32 _ _ – – –150 ≤ M32 ≤ –130
7–18 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

(Note 5)
25 cm WTR 50 120 1 250 10 0±3 ≤ 4.0 XC ± 3
25 cm WTR 35 120 1 250 10 0±3 ≤ 5.0 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 35 120 1 250 7 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 1.5 200 5 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 1.5 200 3 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 200 2 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 200 1 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 140 1.5 160 10 0±3 – – – –
25 cm WTR 35 80 1.5 250 10 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 200 10 0±2 3.0~5.6 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 200 7 0±2 3.3~6.7 – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 200 5 0±2 3.9~7.5 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 200 3 0±2 6.0~12 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 2 0±3 6.0~12 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 1 0±3 6.0~12 _ –
7–19 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 350 10 0±2 – – – – (Note 1)
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 300 10 0±2 – _ – – (Note 2)
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 250 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 200 10 0±2 2.5 ~ 5.2 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 160 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 130 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 100 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 80 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 60 10 0±2 5.0 ~ 9.1 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 80 2 350 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 140 2 160 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 1 60 10 M101 ~ M130 _ _ – – Perform 30 slices/30 sec scan.

M101 = 0 ± 2, M102 ~ M130 = M101 ± 2
25 cm WTR 25 120 1 60 10 _ _ _ – – – Perform 60 slices/60 sec scan.

(Note 3)

Note 2: For systems where the maximum MA available is 300 mA or 350 mA only.
7–20 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 1 2205009
Table 7–7 Image Performance Check (Zj–Adv)
PTM FOV KV TIME MA FOCUS THK SPECIFICATION DATA Description

(Note 1)
42 cm PP 50 120 1 250 LARGE 10 M10 ≤ 15.2 – – –120 ≤ M10 ≤ –100
42 cm PP 50 120 0.8 300 LARGE 10 M10 ± 2 ≤ 15.6 – – for systems where 0.8 sec scan is
available only
35 cm PP 50 120 1 350 LARGE 10 M11 ≤ 7.5 – – –120 ≤ M11 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 50 120 1 350 LARGE 7 M11 ± 3 – – – –
35 cm PP 50 120 2 350 LARGE 5 M11 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 120 2 350 LARGE 3 M11 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 120 2 160 SMALL 10 M12 _ _ – – | M11 – M12 | ≤ 3
35 cm PP 50 120 2 200 SMALL 5 M12 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 160 SMALL 3 M12 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 200 SMALL 2 M12 ± 5 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 200 SMALL 1 M12 ± 5 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 140 1 300 LARGE 10 M13 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M13 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 50 80 3 350 LARGE 10 M14 _ _ – – –150 ≤ M14 ≤ –130

Smudge or band artifact might be ob-
served around the image center; re-
gard these as normal.
35 cm PP 35 120 1 350 LARGE 10 M20 ≤ 10 M20 ± 3 –120 ≤ M20 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 35 140 1 300 LARGE 10 M21 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M21 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 80 3 350 LARGE 10 M22 _ _ – – –150 ≤ M22 ≤ –130
35 cm PP 35 120 0.8 350 LARGE 10 M20 ± 2 ≤ 11.2 – – for systems where 0.8 sec scan is
available only
7–21 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 1 2205009
Table 7–7 Image Performance Check (continued) (Zj–Adv)

(Note 1)
25 cm WTR 50 120 1 250 LARGE 10 0±3 ≤ 4.0 XC ± 3 Xo should be measured 9 cm off cen-
ter ROI.
25 cm WTR 35 120 1 350 LARGE 10 0±3 ≤ 5.0 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 35 120 1 350 LARGE 7 0±3 – – – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 350 LARGE 5 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 350 LARGE 3 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 160 SMALL 10 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 200 SMALL 5 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 160 SMALL 3 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 200 SMALL 2 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 200 SMALL 1 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 140 1 300 LARGE 10 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 80 1 350 LARGE 10 0±3 – – – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 1 350 LARGE 10 0 ± M30 ≤ 4.0 XC ± 2 –2 ≤ M30 ≤ +2
25 cm WTR 25 120 1 350 LARGE 7 0±2 ≤ 4.8 – – –2 ≤ M30 ≤ +2
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 350 LARGE 5 0±2 ≤ 5.3 – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 350 LARGE 3 0±2 ≤ 7.2 – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 SMALL 2 0±3 ≤ 9.7 – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 SMALL 1 0±3 ≤ 12.0 – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 0.8 350 LARGE 10 M30 ± 2 ≤ 4.7 – – for systems where 0.8 sec scan is
available only
7–22 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 1 2205009
Table 7–7 Image Performance Check (continued) (Zj–Adv)
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 300 LARGE 10 0±2 – – – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 250 LARGE 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 200 LARGE 10 0±2 ≤ 5.2 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 160 LARGE 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 130 LARGE 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 100 LARGE 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 80 LARGE 10 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 60 LARGE 10 0±2 ≤ 9.1 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 140 2 300 LARGE 10 0±2 ≤ 7.5 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 80 2 350 LARGE 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 1 80 LARGE 10 M101, _ _ – – Perform 30 slices/30 sec scans.

M102 ~ M130 M101 = 0 ± 2, M102 ~ M130: M101 ± 2
25 cm WTR 25 80 1 60 LARGE 10 _ _ _ – – – Perform 90 slices/90 sec scans.

Smudge or band artifact might be ob-
served around the image center; re-
gard these as normal.
7–23 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–8 Image Performance Check (ProSpeed, ProSpeed Plus, ProSeed, ProSeed EF)
35 cm PP 50 120 1 350 LARGE 10 M10 ≤9 M10 ± 3 –120 ≤ M10 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 50 120 2 350 LARGE 5 M10 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 120 2 350 LARGE 3 M10 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 120 2 160 SMALL 10 M40 _ _ – – | M10 – M40 | ≤ 3
35 cm PP 50 120 2 200 SMALL 5 M40 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 160 SMALL 3 M40 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 200 SMALL 1 M40 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 140 1 300 LARGE 10 M11 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M11 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 50 80 3 350 LARGE 10 M12 _ _ – – –143 ≤ M12 ≤ –120
35 cm PP 35 120 1 350 LARGE 10 M20 ≤ 12 M20 ± 3 –120 ≤ M20 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 35 140 1 300 LARGE 10 M21 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M21 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 80 3 350 LARGE 10 M22 _ _ – – –143 ≤ M22 ≤ –120
25 cm WTR 35 120 1 350 LARGE 10 0±2 ≤ 5.9 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 350 LARGE 5 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 350 LARGE 3 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 160 SMALL 10 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 200 SMALL 5 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 160 SMALL 3 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 200 SMALL 1 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 140 1 300 LARGE 10 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 80 1 350 LARGE 10 0±3 _ _ – –
7–24 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–8 Image Performance Check (continued)

(ProSpeed, ProSpeed Plus, ProSeed, ProSeed EF)
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 350 LARGE 10 0±2 2.5 ~ 4.7 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 350 LARGE 5 0±2 3.3 ~ 6.3 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 350 LARGE 3 0±2 4.5 ~ 8.6 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 SMALL 1 0±3 7.4 ~ 14 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 300 LARGE 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 250 LARGE 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 SMALL 10 0±2 3.3 ~ 6.2 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 160 SMALL 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 130 SMALL 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 100 SMALL 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 80 SMALL 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 60 SMALL 10 0±2 6.0 ~ 11 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 80 3 350 LARGE 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 140 3 300 LARGE 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 1 80 LARGE 10 M101, _ _ – – Perform 30 slices/30 sec scans.

M102 ~ M130 M101 = 0 ± 2, M102 ~ M130: M101 ± 2
QA 25 120 1 300 LARGE 10 0±3 _ _ – – Verify that no artifact is observed on

Phantom the image.
7–25 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–9 Image Performance Check (ProSpeed VX, ProSeed Accell, ProSeed Accell EI)
35 cm PP 50 120 1.5 250 LARGE 10 M10 ≤ 8.7 M10 ± 3 –120 ≤ M10 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 50 120 2 250 LARGE 5 M10 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 120 2 250 LARGE 3 M10 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 120 2 160 SMALL 10 M40 _ _ – – | M10 – M40 | ≤ 3
35 cm PP 50 120 2 200 SMALL 5 M40 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 160 SMALL 3 M40 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 120 3 200 SMALL 1 M40 ± 3 _ _ – –
35 cm PP 50 140 1.5 200 LARGE 10 M11 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M11 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 50 80 3 350 LARGE 10 M12 _ _ – – –143 ≤ M12 ≤ –120
35 cm PP 35 120 1.5 250 LARGE 10 M20 ≤ 12 M20 ± 3 –120 ≤ M20 ≤ –100
35 cm PP 35 140 1.5 200 LARGE 10 M21 _ _ – – –110 ≤ M21 ≤ –90
35 cm PP 35 80 3 350 LARGE 10 M22 _ _ – – –143 ≤ M22 ≤ –120
25 cm WTR 35 120 1.5 250 LARGE 10 0±2 ≤ 5.7 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 250 LARGE 5 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 250 LARGE 3 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 160 SMALL 10 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 2 200 SMALL 5 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 160 SMALL 3 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 120 3 200 SMALL 1 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 140 1.5 200 LARGE 10 0±3 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 35 80 1.5 350 LARGE 10 0±3 _ _ – –
7–26 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 7–9 Image Performance Check (continued)

(ProSpeed VX, ProSeed Accell, ProSeed Accell EI)
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 250 LARGE 10 0±2 3.0 ~ 5.6 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 250 LARGE 5 0±2 3.9 ~ 7.5 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 2 250 LARGE 3 0±2 5.3 ~ 10.2 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 SMALL 1 0±3 7.4 ~ 14 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 250 LARGE 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 200 SMALL 10 0±2 3.3 ~ 6.2 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 160 SMALL 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 130 SMALL 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 100 SMALL 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 80 SMALL 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 3 60 SMALL 10 0±2 6.0 ~ 11 _ –
25 cm WTR 25 80 3 350 LARGE 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 140 3 200 LARGE 10 0±2 _ _ – –
25 cm WTR 25 120 1.5 80 LARGE 10 M101, _ _ – – Perform 20 slices/30 sec scan.

M102 ~ M120 M101 = 0 ± 2, M102 ~ M120: M101 ± 2
QA 25 120 1.5 200 LARGE 10 0±3 _ _ – – Verify that no artifact is observed on

Phantom the image.
7–27 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
7–28 SYSTEM
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
OPERATOR CONSOLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – OC COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES (QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT) 1–1
1-2 DC POWER SUPPLIES (ZJ–ADV) 1–4
1-3 DC POWER SUPPLIES (ZJ) 1–6
1-4 FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1-5 KB SUB BOARD – ERROR BEEP – (QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT) 1–9
1-6 CRT MONITOR CONTROLS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
1-7 TOUCH PANEL TILT ANGLE (QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT) 1–11
1-8 PLASMA DISPLAY (ZJ–ADV, ZJ) 1–12
1-9 VIDEO SIGNAL FOR MULTIFORMAT CAMERA (ZJ) 1–13
SECTION 2 – OC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 OC POWER–UP SEQUENCE (QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV) 2–1
2-2 OC POWER–UP SEQUENCE (ZJ) 2–4
2-3 AUDIO FUNCTION (QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV) 2–6
2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION (ZJ) 2–9
i OPERATOR CONSOLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
ii OPERATOR CONSOLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 1 – OC COMPONENTS
1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)

The Operator Console contains two power supplies: +12 V and +5 V.
1. Switch OFF the Operator Console.
2. Remove the OC front cover.
Ground Connection
If this is the first time to check the OC power supplies after system installation, perform this ‘Ground Connection’
check.
3. Check the ground connection of the power supplies:
a. Connect a digital multimeter between the OC ground stud and ground (FG terminal) on one power supply.
(Multimeter: resistance measure mode) See Illustration 1–2.
b. Verify that the resistance reads less than 0.2 W.

If resistance exceeds the above value, tighten, clean or re–crimp connections, and measure again.
c. Perform the above check on the other power supply.
1–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES (continued) (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)

Note
When you adjust power supply potentiometers, slowly turn them; otherwise, power supply built–in
protector will shut themselves down. If this happens, switch OFF the Operator Console, wait approxi-
mately three minutes, and switch ON the Console.
Voltage Check
4. Check the output of the +5 VDC power supply:
a. Connect a digital multimeter across the capacitor (C1) at the front edge of the IPU2 Board (Slot #2). See
Illustration 1–1.
(Multimeter: voltage measure mode)
b. Switch On the Operator Console.
c. Measure the voltage and check that it is within +5.0 VDC ∼ +5.1 VDC.
If it falls outside these limits, adjust it by turning the potentiometer. See Illustration 1–2.
d. Connect an oscilloscope to the same points as above.
e. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 200 mVp–p.
If it falls outside this range, replace the power supply.
Illustration 1–1 Measure Points for 5 VDC


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES (continued) (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
Illustration 1–2 OC +12 VDC and +5 VDC Power Supplies
VOLTAGE ADJUSTING
POTENTIOMETERS
PWR
+12 VDC SUPPLY

+5 VDC SUPPLY
a. Connect a digital multimeter at the terminal strip on the front of the power supply.
b. Measure the voltage and check that it is within +11.8 VDC ∼ +12.4 VDC.
If it falls outside these limits, adjust it by turning the potentiometer. See Illustration 1–2.
c. Connect an oscilloscope to the same points as above.
d. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 100 mVp–p.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2 DC POWER SUPPLIES (Zj–Adv)

Ground Connection
check.
(Multimeter: resistance measure mode)

c. Perform the above check on the other power supplies.
Voltage Check
a. Connect a digital multimeter across the capacitor (C1) at the front edge of the IPU2 Board (Slot #32). See
Illustration 1–1.
If it falls outside these limits, adjust it by turning the potentiometer. See Illustration 1–3; the potentiometer can
be accessed through a hole on the protection cover (the potentiometer is a white one, and located next to an
LED).

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2 DC POWER SUPPLIES (continued) (Zj–Adv)

5. Check the output of the +24 VDC power supply the same way as step 4; specifications are given below:
Voltage: +23.7 VDC ∼ +24.7 VDC

Ripple: < 500 mVp–p

Illustration 1–3 Adjust Potentiometers on Power Supplies


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-3 DC POWER SUPPLIES (Zj)

The Operator Console contains four power supplies: +24 V, +12 V, +5 V, and -5 V.
Ground Connection
check.
(Multimeter: resistance measure mode)

c. Perform the above check on the other power supplies.
Voltage Check
a. Connect a digital multimeter across the capacitor at the front edge of the FCP2A Board (Slot #36). See Il-
lustration 1–4.
Illustration 1–4 Measure Points for 5 VDC
CAPACITOR
FCP2A BOARD
(FRONT VIEW)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-3 DC POWER SUPPLIES (continued) (Zj)

If it falls outside these limits, adjust it by turning the potentiometer. See Illustration 1–5; the potentiometer can
be accessed through a hole on the protection cover (the potentiometer is a white one, and located next to an
LED).
5. Check the output of the –5 VDC power supply:
a. Connect a digital multimeter at the terminal strip on the front of the power supply. See Illustration 1–5.
b. Measure the voltage and check that it is within –4.9 VDC ∼ –5.1 VDC.
If it falls outside these limits, adjust it by turning the potentiometer.
c. Connect an oscilloscope to the same points as above.
d. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 200 mVp–p.



CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-3 DC POWER SUPPLIES (continued) (Zj)
Illustration 1–5 Adjust Potentiometers on Power Supplies

1-4 FANS
1. Locate and verify the operation of the following fans. If any fan is defective, replace the unit.
! ! " !
! ! !! ! !
! # "$
(Zj–Adv, Zj)
! ! ! $
! ! " !
! ! !! ! !
! # "$
! # "$
! # "$

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-5 KB SUB BOARD – ERROR BEEP – (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)

The KB SUB Board has a variable resistor (location: R17) which adjusts the volume of error beep.
3. Remove the OC keyboard lower cover. See Illustration 1–6.
4. Switch ON the OC.

Verify that the system starts up normally.
5. Press any alpha–numeric key to make a beep.

Rotate the variable resistor to adjust the loudness.
(the default setting is as illustrated)
Illustration 1–6 KB SUB Board


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-6 CRT MONITOR CONTROLS AND SWITCHES

The OC CRT monitor has some controls and switches as shown in Illustration 1–7.
1. Set the controls and switches as follows.
CRT ON/OFF SW: Set to ‘ON’

BRIGHTNESS CONTROL: Adjust to desired brightness
CONTRAST CONTROL: Adjust to desired contrast
VIDEO TERMINATION SW: Set to ‘75 W'
Illustration 1–7 CRT Monitor Controls and Switches
CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS CRT

CONTROL CONTROL ON/OFF
CRT MONITOR REAR VIEW
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
VIDEO VIDEO
VIDEO OUT IN
TERMINATION
GLASS 125V M2A 100V

FUSE 75Ω
HOLDER Off
125V2A

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-7 TOUCH PANEL TILT ANGLE (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)

The following procedure adjusts the tilt angle of the touch panel.
1. Remove the rear lower cover of the touch panel, one screw.
2. Insert a screwdriver into a hole of one adjuster knob. See Illustration 1–8.
(Support the touch panel while adjusting.)
Rotate the driver counterclockwise to loosen the knob.
Loosen the other knob.
Adjust the tilt angle.
Tighten the knobs using a screwdriver.
(tighten the knobs such that the pin remains inserted in the two holes of part A and B; see the illustration)
3. Install the rear lower cover.
Illustration 1–8 Touch Panel Tilt Angle Adjustment
TWO ADJUSTER KNOBS FOR TOUCH PANEL
PIN
A OC REAR VIEW
TIGHTEN B
INSERT SCREWDRIVER
LOOSEN
KNOB (LEFT SIDE VIEWED FROM REAR)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-8 PLASMA DISPLAY (Zj–Adv, Zj)

A calibration procedure described below have to be performed if the plasma display is replaced.
3. Set bit 8 of the dip switch 6A1 on the PDC Board (slot #37 (Zj–Adv) or slot #43 (Zj)) to ON (Calibration Call), as
illustrated below.

4. Reset the Operator Console.
5. Follow the instructions displayed on the plasma display to perform the calibration procedure.
6. Set bit 8 of the switch 6A1 to OFF, as illustrated below.


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-9 VIDEO SIGNAL FOR MULTIFORMAT CAMERA (Zj)

If the system includes a DC III option, and if this DC III and the OC share one MFC (multiformat camera), same density
images should be filmed for the same image commanded by both sides (DC III and OC).
The procedure below adjusts potentiometers on the MV AMP II Board so that the same level video signal is fed to the
MFC.
1. Disconnect the video signal cable from the Operator Console to the MFC at the MFC side.
2. Connect this cable to an oscilloscope, using a 75 W terminator. See Illustration 1–9.
Illustration 1–9 Video Signal Adjustment for MFC

EI AEF DD


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-9 VIDEO SIGNAL FOR MULTIFORMAT CAMERA (continued) (Zj)

3. Display the same image on each console (OC and DC III).
4. Observe the video signal wave on the oscilloscope.
To change the video signal source (CN3 or CN5), press the MFC control [RESET] button on the console that
is currently sending the image, then press the MFC control [RESET] button on the other console.
Confirm the followings:

1. The peak level of bright signal is within 0.76 V as shown in Illustration 1–10.
2. Both video signal waves (for OC and for DC III) have the same peak level.
If not, adjust the potentiometer VR11 or VR21 on the MV AMP II Board, accordingly (VR11: for OC, VR21: for
DC III).
Illustration 1–10 Video Signal Level


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 2 – OC OPERATION
2-1 OC POWER–UP SEQUENCE (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
Power–up Sequence
The processor of the Operator Console starts with a power–on self test right after powered on, as follows:
[CPW Test – Phase 1] → [DISP (or DISP2) Test – Phase 1] → [CPW Test – Phase 2] → [IPU2 Test] →
[DISP (or DISP2) Test – Phase 2] → [MISC2 Test]
The test progress information is displayed on the CRT monitor for [CPW Test – Phase 2] and the subsequent tests.
Either ‘Power–on Test 1’ or ‘Power–on Test 2’ is performed as the power–on test, according to the dip switch setting on
the CPW Board;
Power–on Test 1: Takes 4 minutes. This test is selected for normal operations.
Power–on Test 2: Takes more than 45 minutes. This test is a more extensive one than Power–on Test 1.
Note
The above power–on test 2 will fail, if both of the following two statements are true:
The CPW Board part number is 2110738.
The IPU2 Board is equipped with less than 144 MB memory.
In this case, a test ‘IPU (33) MEMORY MODULE TEST’ will fail approximately 50 minutes after the
power–on test start, generating a “CPU TIMEOUT ERROR” message.
If the CPW Board is of 2110738–02 or later revision, the problem does not occur.
After the power–on test completes with no error occurred, the processor loads the operation and application software
from the hard disk into memory and starts the application software.
When no error is found in these processes, the system logo message will be shown on the CRT monitor.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-1 OC POWER–UP SEQUENCE (continued) (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

2. Remove the Operator Console front cover.
3. Verify that the Boot Mode Select switch (location: 10A1) on the CPW Board is set as illustrated below.
(This is the normal setting)
1 2 3 4 OFF OFF: ‘0’

DNP4
XXX0 : Boot from HD00

0001 : YMON
0101 : Boot from FD00
1X01 : Boot form FD01
4. Verify that the Test Mode Select switch (location: 8A1) on the CPW Board is set as illustrated below.
This is the normal setting which selects Power–on Test 1. If Power–on Test 2 is desired, set bit 3 to ON.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF: ‘0’
OFF
BP8L
1XX : SKIP TEST

HARDWARE TEST SELECT
01X : OFF LINE TEST
001 : POWER ON TEST 2
000 : POWER ON TEST 1 (X: any of `0' or `1')

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-1 OC POWER–UP SEQUENCE (continued) (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

5. Set the Test Mode switch (location: 6A1) on the PDC Board as illustrated below. (Zj–Adv)
This is the normal setting except for bit 1 which is normally set to ‘ON’, i.e., the PDC power–on test is skipped.
In this procedure, however, perform the PDC power–on test (set bit 1 to ‘OFF’).
ON
`1'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 `0'
Power-on Test Skip. `1': Power-on Test Skip (Normal),

`0': Power-on Test Call
6. Switch ON the Operator Console or pull the reset switch located on the underside of the Console.
Verify that “POWER ON TEST 1” or “POWER ON TEST 2” appears on the CRT monitor screen.
Approximately 4 minutes (Test 1) or more than 45 minutes (Test 2) later, “SYSTEM PREPARATION” appears on
the CRT monitor.
Approximately 16 seconds later, the current date appears.

Change the date or press the RETURN key to accept it.
Respond to the time the same way.
System logo message, with software revision, appears on the CRT monitor.
Press the STATUS key and check for error messages.
If the other subsystems (Gantry, Generator, etc.) have been turned ON, the initial screen appears on the touch
panel screen.
7. Set the Test Mode switch (location: 6A1) on the PDC Board as illustrated below. (Zj–Adv)
(Set bit 1 to ÒN')
ON
`1'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 `0'


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-2 OC POWER–UP SEQUENCE (Zj)
Power–up Sequence
The processors (FMP1 and DMP4) of the Operator Console start with a power–on self test right after powered on.
The File processor (FMP1) and Scan/Display processor (DMP4) each perform a self test independently, and also
perform a communication test with each other.
After the power–on test completes with no error occurred, the File processor loads the operation and application soft-
ware from the hard disk into memory and starts the application software.
When no error is found in these processes, the system logo message will be shown on the CRT monitor.
A firmware program of FMP1 and DMP4 oversees these operations and displays their status on eight bit LEDs on each
board. These status codes become error codes if the system fails during any operation.
2. Remove the Operator Console front cover.
3. Verify that Boot Mode Select switch (Location: 16A) on the FMP1 Board (slot #30) is set as illustrated below.
(This is the normal setting)


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-2 OC POWER–UP SEQUENCE (continued) (Zj)

4. Verify that the dip switch settings on the FMP1, DMP4, DMP2 (for systems with a DC III Option only), and PDC
Boards are set as illustrated below. (These are the normal settings)
For detailed information of dip switch settings, refer to Section 2-4, ‘Circuit Boards (Slot #20 ∼ 44)’, of Tab ‘Switch
Jumper Setting.’
FMP1 (slot # 30) – SW12A1 (Location: 12A)

DMP4 (slot #31) – SW4A1 (Location: 4A)

DMP2 (slot #24; this board is used for Optional DC III only) – SW4A1 (Location: 4A)

PDC (slot #43) – SW6A1 (Location: 6A)

(This board should be pulled out from its slot to access these switches)

5. Switch On the Operator Console or pull the reset switch located on the underside of the Console.
Verify that the “SYSTEM TEST IN PROGRESS” appears on the CRT monitor screen and on the plasma screen.
Approximately 30 seconds later, “SYSTEM PREPARATION”appears on the CRT monitor.
Approximately 60 seconds later, the current date appears.

Change the date or press the [Return] key to accept it.
Responds to the time the same way.
System logo message, with software revision, appears on the CRT monitor.
Press the [Status] key and check for error messages.
If the other subsystems (Gantry, Generator, etc.) have been turned On, the initial screen appears on the touch
panel screen.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-3 AUDIO FUNCTION (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

The ‘Audio Function’ procedure includes the following check/adjustments:
Intercom Volume and Function
X–ray On Buzzer Volume
Touch Panel Tone and Volume
Auto Voice Volume
1. Verify that all the Gantry covers are installed.
2. Move the AUDIO2 Board to a position such that jumpers and variable resistors can be accessed while adjusting
audio functions:
a. Switch OFF the Operator Console.
b. Remove the OC front cover.
c. Remove the screws of the base plate for the AUDIO2 Board, and move this board from the nest to an appropri-
ate position.
If necessary, disconnect any cables, and reconnect them.
For the AUDIO2 Board location, see Illustration 1–2 in Section 1-1, ‘General’, of Tab ‘Switch Jumper Setting.’

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-3 AUDIO FUNCTION (continued) (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
AUDIO2 Board
Refer to Illustration 2–1 for steps below.
Illustration 2–1 Potentiometers, Switches, and Jumpers on Audio2 Board

Variable Resistor Settings

3. For a new replacement AUDIO2 Board, set variable resistors VR1 ∼ VR5 to the following default settings:
VR1 – Record Level VR2 – OC Mic Level VR3 – Patient Mic Level
VR4 – Voice Volume VR5 – Record Gain

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-3 AUDIO FUNCTION (continued) (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

4. Set the intercom volumes ‘From Patient’ and ‘To Patient’ on the OC panel to the middle position.
5. Switch ON the Operator Console.
6. Adjust VR2 until someone standing (or laying) anywhere in the Gantry room can hear your voice when you step
on the OC footswitch and speak.
Make sure that this person can not hear your voice when you speak without stepping on the footswitch.
7. Adjust VR3 until you can hear Gantry room conversation (spoken approximately one meter apart from the Gantry
microphone) while standing in front of the OC.
Make sure you cannot hear Gantry room conversation when you step on the footswitch.

8. Select an appropriate volume for the x–ray on buzzer, by selecting one of the three positions (MIN, MEDIUM,
MAX) on J8.

9. Select an appropriate tone and volume for the Touch Panel, by selecting one of the three positions (LO, MED,
HI) on JP6 (tone) and one of three positions (MIN, MEDIUM, MAX) on JP7 (volume).
Auto Voice Volume

10. Adjust auto voice volume with VR4, if JP2 is set to 1–2 and 4–5.
(If JP2 is set to 2–3 and 5–6, the auto voice volume is adjusted by the ‘Auto Voice’ volume on the OC panel (some
system models are not equipped with this volume))

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION (Zj)

This ‘Audio Function’ procedure includes the following checks/adjustments:
Cooling Wait End Buzzer Volume
Auto Voice Volume
2. Install an extension board to adjust the jumpers and variable resistors on the OC INTF3 Board:
a. Switch OFF the Operator Console.
b. Remove the OC front cover.
c. Remove the OC INTF3 Board (slot #44).
d. Install the OC INTF3 Board to the extension board.
e. Install the extension board with OC INTF3 into slot #44.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION (continued) (Zj)
OC INTF3 Board
Refer to Illustration 2–2 for steps below.
Illustration 2–2 Potentiometers, Switches, and Jumpers on OC INTF3


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION (continued) (Zj)

3. Set the intercom volumes ‘From Patient’ and ‘To Patient’ on the OC panel to the middle position.
4. Switch ON the Operator Console.
5. Adjust VR3 until someone standing (or laying) anywhere in the Gantry room can hear your voice when you step
on the OC footswitch and speak.
Make sure that this person can not hear your voice when you speak without stepping on the footswitch.
6. Adjust VR2 until you can hear Gantry room conversation (spoken approximately one meter apart from the Gantry
microphone) while standing in front of the OC.
Make sure you cannot hear Gantry room conversation when you step on the footswitch.
Cooling Wait End Buzzer Volume

7. Select an appropriate volume for the Cooling Wait End buzzer, by selecting one of the three positions (MIN, ME-
DIUM, MAX) on J1.

8. Select an appropriate volume for the x–ray on buzzer, by selecting one of the three positions (MIN, MEDIUM,
MAX) on J2.

9. Select an appropriate tone and volume for the Touch Panel, by selecting one of the three positions (LO, MID,
HI) on J4 (tone) and one of the three positions (MIN, MEDIUM, MAX) on J5 (volume).
Auto Voice Volume

10. Set the intercom volume ‘Auto Voice’ on the OC panel to the middle position.
11. Select an appropriate volume for the Auto Voice for the OC speaker, by selecting one of the three positions (MIN,
MEDIUM, MAX) on J8.
12. Adjust VR1 so that the volume of the auto voice messages defined by the customer is equal to the volume of
the standard auto voice messages.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
GANTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – DC POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 POWER SUPPLIES ON STATIONARY FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME (QJ, QJ–BASE, ZJ) 1–2
1-3 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME (QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV) 1–6
SECTION 2 – ROTATIONAL MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTATIONAL AND STATIONARY COMPONENTS . . . . . 2–1
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2-4 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
SECTION 3 – ROTATIONAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 MOVEMENT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3-3 ROTATION VELOCITY OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3-4 ROTATION SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3-5 ROTATION DECELERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
SECTION 4 – SLIP RINGS AND BRUSHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
SECTION 5 – TILT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5-1 ROTATION CHECK WHILE TILTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-2 TILT GUIDE ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-3 TILT ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5-4 TILT SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5-5 TILT ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
i GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 6 – COLLIMATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

6-1 APERTURE RATIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-2 BOW–TIE FILTER CURVE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
SECTION 7 – TABLE AND GANTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

7-1 TABLE POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7-2 POSITIONING LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7-3 GANTRY PANEL SWITCH CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7-3-1 Table Up, Down, Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7-3-2 Table In, Out, Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7-3-3 Move to Scan, Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7-3-4 Tilt Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7-3-5 POSN Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7-3-6 Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7-4 TABLE AND GANTRY INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
ii GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 1 – DC POWER SUPPLIES
1-1 POWER SUPPLIES ON STATIONARY FRAME

1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the front and both side Gantry covers.
3. Check DC power supply voltages on the TGP Board, according to Table below.
Table 1–1 Power Supply Specifications

!%' ⋅ ⋅ ,
!%' ⋅ ⋅ ,

$ $%) ( &') #+
!%' ⋅ ⋅ , "*()

!%'
⋅ ⋅
,

Verify that the power supply voltages are within specifications.

If not, adjust the voltage with the appropriate potentiometer. See Illustration below.
Illustration 1–1 Power Supply Location
24 VDC POWER SUPPLY (PS2)

+5 AND Y (PS1)
GANTRY
CONTROL
SWITCH

1–1 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)

1. Preparation:
a. Lower the Table to its lowest height.
b. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
c. Remove all the Gantry covers (front, rear, and both side covers).
d. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board.
e. Rotate the Gantry in the clockwise direction by hand until the x–ray tube is positioned at approximately 6
o’clock.
f. Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board.
2. Remove the DAS rear cover. See Illustration 1–2. For more information to remove the rear cover, refer to the
Component Replacement manual.
Illustration 1–2 Components on Rotative Frame

ÉÉ
ÉÉ

ÉÉ

1–2 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME (continued) (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)

Prior to removing the DAS CN1 or CIF CN4 connector, remove the BNC connector from the
Detector Bias Power Supply. Also, before reconnecting the BNC connector, switch OFF the
‘Slip Ring 115V’ switch and wait at least two minutes.
3. Check DC power supply voltages on the connector pins shown in Table 1–2 or Table 1–3. (Qj–Base)
&&.,-+-$)(, 1–2 or 1–6.
Verify that the power supply voltages are within specifications. If not, adjust the voltage with the appropriate
potentiometer. See Illustrations 1–2 and 1–7.
4. # % *)0 + ,.**&1 /)&-" , )( -# )(( -)+ *$(, ,#)0( $( Table 1–2. (Qj, Zj)
&&.,-+-$)(, 1–2 or 1–6.
Verify that the power supply voltages are within specifications. If not, adjust the voltage with the appropriate
potentiometer. See Illustrations 1–2 and 1–7.
Table 1–2 Power Supply Specifications (for Gantry P9183xx only)

!)+

)+ )+ 2

2
!)+ 0$-#
!)+ )+ )+ 2

2
!)+ 0$-#
!)+ 2
!)+

2
!)+

2
!)+

2
!)+ 2
)+ *$( ++(" ' (- , &&.,-+-$)(

)+ *$( ++(" ' (- , &&.,-+-$)(
1–3 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 1–3 Power Supply Specifications (for Gantry 2123xxx. 213796x, 2175xxx only)
DC VOLTAGE CONNECTOR PINS FOR MEASURE SPECIFICATION POWER SUPPLY
(High) (Low)
+24 V (for DTRE) DTRE J1-4 (*1) DTRE J1-3 24 V ± 0.5 V PS51
12 V ± 0.5 V(*2)
+5 V (for DTRE) DTRE J1-2 (*1) DTRE J1-1 5.1 V ± 0.1 V PS52
+5V (for DAS) CIF CN4-7 CIF CN4-8 5.2 V ± 0.1 V PS53
+15 V (for DAS) CIF CN4-1 CIF CN4-2 +15.1 V ± 0.1 V PS54
-15 V (for DAS) CIF CN4-4 CIF CN4-5 -15.1 V ± 0.1 V PS55
+24 V (for OGP) OGP CN1-3 OGP CN1-4 24 V ± 0.5 V PS56
Note (*1): For accessing the DTRE Board, refer to the Component Replacement manual.
Note (*2): For Gantry 2175xxx only.
For OGP CN-1 pin arrangement, see Illustration 1-4.

For CIF CN-4 pin arrangement, see Illustration 1-5.
Illustration 1–3 DTR2 CN2
DTR2 CN2
9 8 7
6 5 4
3 2 1
Illustration 1–4 OGP CN1
OGP CN1 4 3 2 1
B R B Y
1–4 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 1–5 CIF CN4

Illustration 1–6 DAS Boards in DAS Box

Illustration 1–7 Power Supply Potentiometers
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
1–5 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-3 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

1. Preparation:
a. Lower the Table to its lowest height.
b. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG’ and switches at the Gantry rear base.
c. Remove all the Gantry covers (front, rear, and both side covers).
d. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board.
e. Rotate the Gantry in the clockwise direction by hand until the x–ray tube is positioned at approximately 6
o’clock.
f. Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board.
2. Remove the DAS left bottom cover, 2 nuts and 6 Allen screws. See Illustration 1–8.
Illustration 1–8 Components on Rotative Frame

"

!

ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ

!

! "
"
1–6 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-3 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME (continued) (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

3. Check DC power supply voltage on the connector pins shown in Table 1–4 or 1–5.
Verify that the power supply voltages are within specifications. If not, adjust the voltage using the appropriate
potentiometer. See Illustrations: 1–8, 1–9, and 1–10.
Table 1–4 Power Supply Specifications (for Gantry 2123xxx. 2137xxx, 2117xxx, 2175xxx only)

+24 V (for DTRE) DTRE J1-4 (*) DTRE J1-3 24 V ± 0.5 V PS51
12 V ± 0.5 V**
+5 V (for DTRE) DTRE J1-2 (*) DTRE J1-1 5.1 V ± 0.1 V PS52
+24 V (for DAS FAN) DAS FAN-1 DAS FAN-2 24 V ± 0.5 V PS58
Note (*): For accessing the DTRE Board, refer to the Component Replacement manual.
Note (**): For Gantry 2175xxx only.

1–7 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Table 1–5 Power Supply Specifications (for Gantry P9183xx only)

+24 V (for DTR2) DTR2 CN2-3 (*) DTR2 CN2-6 24 V ± 0.5 V PS51
+5 V (for DTR2) DTR2 CN2-8 (*) DTR2 CN2-9 5.1 V ± 0.1 V PS52
+24 V (for DAS FAN) DAS FAN-1 DAS FAN-2 24 V ± 0.5 V PS58
Note (*): For accessing the DTR2 Board, remove the DAS right bottom cover.
For DTR2 CN-2 pin arrangement, see Illustration 1-3.

1–8 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 1–9 Power Supply Potentiometers (except for PS53 & 58)
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
Illustration 1–10 Power Supply Potentiometers (for PS53 & 58)

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
1–9 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
1–10 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 2 – ROTATIONAL MECHANISM
2-1 CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTATIONAL AND STATIONARY COMPONENTS

1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the front, rear, and both side covers of the Gantry.
c. Set the Service SW on the SUB Board to ON.
2. Verify that the clearance between each rotating component part and all fixed parts is more than 10mm, while
rotating the Gantry in the CW direction by hand.
Perform this check for the following (a through g):
a. DAS and Top cover
Illustration 2–1 DAS and Gantry Top Cover
MORE THAN 10MM
b. DAS cables and Top cover
Illustration 2–2 DAS Cables and Gantry Top Cover
MORE THAN 10MM
2–1 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-1 CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTATIONAL AND STATIONARY COMPONENTS (continued)

c. X–ray tube cables and Stationary frame/component
Ensure proper clearance (10 mm) between the x–ray tube cables and the stationary frame/component.
Ensure clearance of 20 mm or more between the pump hose and the stationary frame/component.
d. Rotor Cont cover and Top cover
Illustration 2–3 Rotor Cont Cover and Gantry Top Cover
MORE THAN 10MM
2–2 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

e. Rotor Cont cover and Gantry side arms
Illustration 2–4 Rotor Cont Cover and Gantry Side Arms
MORE THAN 10MM

2–3 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

f. Anode and cathode inverter covers and Top cover
Illustration 2–5 Inverter Cover and Gantry Top Cover
MORE THAN 10MM
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
g. Anode and cathode HV tanks and Top cover
Illustration 2–6 HV Tank and Gantry Top Cover
MORE THAN 10MM
3. Set the Service SW on the SUB Board to OFF.
2–4 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE
Special Equipment
D Spring Balance (Fish Scale): See Illustration 2–8.
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG (Safety Loop)’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
Standard Main Weight

2. Check or set the main weight:
a. Switch ON the Service SW of the SUB Board, and rotate the Gantry CW until the x–ray tube is in the home
position.
b. Set the azimuth lock pin.
c. Check or set the main weight as follows. See also Illustration 2–7.
(Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
MAIN REAR
2 kg x 6, 0.5 kg x 2, total 13 kg.
MAIN FRONT
20 kg x1, 5 kg x 2, 1 kg x 2, total 32 kg.
TABLE SIDE (Fixed weight; do not adjust)
(For Gantry P9183xx only)
MAIN REAR
2 kg x 3, 0.5 kg x 5, total 8.5 kg.
MAIN FRONT
20 kg x1, 5 kg x 2, 1 kg x 5, 0.5 kg x 2,
total 36 kg. (Fixed weight; do not adjust)
TABLE SIDE
(For Gantry 21231xx, 213796x only)
2–5 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE (continued)

MAIN REAR
3.6 kg x 1 (P/N: 2119818), total 3.6 kg.
MAIN FRONT
20 kg x1, 1 kg x 4, 0.5 kg x 4, total 26 kg.
(Fixed weight; do not adjust)
Illustration 2–7 Main Weight and Side Weight
X–ray
Tube
SIDE WEIGHT
MAIN
WEIGHT
65_
2–6 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Standard Side Weight

3. Check or set the side weight:
a. Release the azimuth lock pin.
b. Rotate the Gantry CW until the side weight is in the bottom position.
c. Set the azimuth lock pin.
d. Check or set the side weight as follows. See also Illustration 2–7.
(Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
SIDE REAR
2 kg x 1, 0.5 kg x 8, total 6 kg.
SIDE FRONT
5 kg x 1, 2 kg x 2, total 9 kg.
(For Gantry P9183xx only)
SIDE REAR
2 kg x 2, 1 kg x 1, 0.5 kg x 1, total 5.5 kg.
SIDE FRONT
5 kg x 1, 2 kg x 1, 1 kg x 3, 0.5 kg x 2,
total 11 kg.
(For Gantry 21231xx, 213796x only)
SIDE REAR
2 kg x 1, 0.5 kg x 8, total 6 kg.
SIDE FRONT
5 kg x 1, 2 kg x 1, 0.5 kg x 5, total 9.5 kg.
2–7 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Rough Weight Balance

4. Perform the rough weight balance check/adjustment by observing the free movement:
a. Release the azimuth lock pin.
Rotate the Gantry CW until the x–ray tube is in the home position.
b. Verify that the Gantry does not rotate due to any unbalance.
If the Gantry rotates on its own, perform the following procedure.
i. For Gantry rotation in the CW direction;

Increase the side front weight by 2 Kg.
ii. For Gantry rotation in the CCW direction;

Decrease the side front weight by 2 Kg.
iii. Repeat step i or ii until the Gantry is balanced.
c. Rotate the Gantry CW until the side weight is in the bottom position.
d. Verify that the Gantry does not rotate due to any unbalance.
If the Gantry rotates on its own, perform the following procedure.
i. For Gantry rotation in the CW direction;

Decrease the main rear weight by 2 Kg.
ii. For Gantry rotation in the CCW direction;

Increase the main rear weight by 2 Kg.
iii. Repeat step i or ii until the Gantry is balanced.
Fine Weight Balance

5. Perform the fine weight balance check/adjustment using a spring balance:
a. Measure the force required to initiate Gantry rotation by pulling the Gantry with a spring weight balance as
shown in Illustration 2–8. See Illustration 2–9 for the measurement/pulling positions.
Measure force values F1, F2, F3, and F4 (all in kg); and enter these values.
2–8 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 2–8 Initial Gantry Rotation Force Measurement
PULL IN THIS DIREC-

TION.
b. Press the ‘Calculate’ button to calculate the following values:
Adjustment required for the main rear weight = (0.552 x (F4 – F3)) [kg]
Adjustment required for the side front weight = (0.515 x (F1 – F2)) [kg]
c. Increase or decrease the main rear weight and/or side front weight, according to the calculated values at
step b. Note the following:
D If the sign of the value is positive, increase the weight, if the sign is negative, decrease the weight.
D The minimum provided weight increment is 0.5 kg. Round to the nearest multiple of 0.5 kg as shown be-
low.
ACTUAL
ADJUSTMENT (kg) 2.0
1.0
-2.0 -1.5 -1.0 -0.5

0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
CALCULATED
-1.0 ADJUSTMENT (kg)
-2.0
d. Switch ON the Service SW of the SUB Board.
2–9 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 2–9 Force Measurement Positions
F1
F2
SIDE WEIGHT
MAIN WEIGHT
65_
F3
F4
MAIN WEIGHT
65_
SIDE WEIGHT
GANTRY FRONT VIEW
2–10 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION

1. Preparation:
b. Remove the Gantry rear and both side covers.
c. Set the Service SW of the SUB Board to ON.
2. Rotate the Gantry in the CW direction by hand until both LEDs on the G. pulse sensors turn OFF (one on the
stationary side and the other on the rotational side). See Illustration 2–10.
3. Measure the angle of the x–ray tube mounting plate. Verify that the angle is 0 ±0.5 deg.
If the angle is out of this range, perform the following:
a. Position the Gantry to a 0 ±0.2 deg angle.
b. Set the Service SW of the SUB Board to OFF.
c. Adjust the positions of the photo sensors so that both LEDs on the G. pulse sensors turn OFF (one on the
stationary side and the other on the rotational side); in this adjustment, the conditions described in Illustrations
2–11 and 2–12 should be met.
4. Set the Service SW of the SUB Board to OFF.
Illustration 2–10 Location of G. Pulse Sensor
APPROXIMATE LOCATION
OF G. PULSE SENSOR
SLIP RINGS PHOTO SENSOR (FOR
ROTATION COUNT)
PHOTO PLATE

PHOTO SENSOR
(FOR G. PULSE)
LED
(VIEWED FROM
OF GANTRY)
2–11 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION (continued)
Illustration 2–11 Photo Sensor & Plate Positioning – I
PHOTO SENSOR
PHOTO PLATE
6 mm ±0.5 mm
(Min: 3 mm)
(TOP OR BOTTOM VIEW)
Illustration 2–12 Photo Sensor & Plate Positioning – II
STATIONARY
SIDE
A = H/2 ±1.5 mm
PHOTO SENSOR PHOTO SENSOR
A PHOTO PLATE
H H
A
(SIDE VIEW)
A = H/2 ±1.5 mm
ROTATIONAL
SIDE
2–12 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-4 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION

1. Preparation:
b. Remove the Gantry rear and both side covers.
2. Remove the gear box cover (4 screws).
3. Adjust the adjusting bolt:
a. Loosen the three mounting plate bolts.
b. Loosen the set nut, and then rotate the adjusting bolt in the CCW direction until the distance D (between part A
and part B) is approximately 2 ∼ 3mm.

Over tension. After part A and part B are just touching, do not rotate the adjusting bolt; other-
wise, this will cause over tension and will shorten the life of the axial drive belt.
c. Turn the adjusting bolt in the CW direction until part A and part B are just touching.
d. Tighten the set nut.
e. Tighten the three mounting plate bolts.
4. Install the gear box cover.
2–13 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-4 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION (continued)
Illustration 2–13 Belt Tension Adjuster
ADJUSTING
BOLT
MOUNTING AXIAL DRIVE

PLATE BELT
BOLTS (3)
GEAR BOX GANTRY REAR VIEW

COVER
ADJUSTING
BOLT
D JUST ZERO
(JUST TOUCH)
SET NUT B
A
D
2–14 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 3 – ROTATIONAL OPERATION
3-1 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT

1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF all the switches at the Gantry rear base.

(‘Rotate’, ‘XG (Safety Loop)’, ‘Table/Tilt’, ‘Control’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’)
b. Remove the front and both side covers from the Gantry.
c. Set the safety bracket located on the right side of the Gantry.
2. Verify the following settings:
D Service switch of the SUB Board is OFF.
D Servo Amp breaker is ON.
D Azimuth Lock pin is released.
3. Set the service switches of the TGP Board as follows;
D MNL, FIX, SPD0, SLOW, HOME.
3–1 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 7 2205009
3-1 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT (continued)
CAUTION
Gantry may experience sudden high speed rotation due to order from the OC. Be very care-
ful; stand clear of the rotating Gantry.
4. Check that the Gantry Initialize Sequence is normally performed.
a. Be ready to hit the Emergency OFF switch in case of any rotational problems, and then, switch ON the Gantry
switches in the following sequence:
‘Slip Ring’ ––" ‘Rotate’ ––" ‘Table/Tilt’ ––" ‘Control’

(Do not switch ON the XG (Safety Loop) switch)
Note
The Gantry rotation alarm sounds indicate that Gantry rotation is enabled.
The Gantry starts rotating at 15 sec/Rot and stops at a position whose angle from Home is symmetrical to the
angle of the start position, after one or two rotations (during which Gantry Initialize Sequence is performed).
The Gantry Display shows the Test Sequence pattern. See Illustration 3–4.
During the Gantry Initialize Sequence, if the Gantry can not rotate (ex. TGP service switch (SYS/OFF/MNL) is
set to OFF), LEDs ‘ERRG’ and ‘LOOPG’ are lit on alternately on the TGP Board. (Waiting for Gantry rotation)
To release this status, push the reset button, after setting the service switches properly.
5. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.
Set the TGP service switch ABT/SVE/FIX to SVE.
3–2 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-1 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT (continued)
Illustration 3–4 Gantry Initialize Display
Gantry Display Gantry Switch

-
- - - - - - - - -

3–3 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-2 MOVEMENT CHECK

1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the front, and both side covers from the Gantry.
c. Set the safety bracket on the right side of the Gantry.
d. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
2. Set the TGP service switches as described below:
ABT/SVE/FIX : SVE ↓
SPD2/SPD1/SPD0 : SPD0 ↓
FAST/MID/SLOW : SLOW ↓
CONT/HOME/90_ : CONT ↓
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
3. Check the Gantry rotation movement by setting all the possible speeds:
a. Set the ABT/SVE/FIX switch to ABT, and keep depressing it until the Gantry rotates for more than one rota-
tion.
Verify that the Gantry rotates smoothly, and that there is no abnormal noise.
b. Do the same check above for each of the following settings.

(With these settings, the Gantry continuously rotates)
TGP SERVICE SWITCH

SYS/OFF/MNL ABT/SVE/FIX SPD2/SPD1/SPD0 FAST/MID/SLOW CONT/HOME/90°
FIX

MID

FAST

SPD1 SLOW

MID

FAST

SPD2 SLOW

MID

FAST

3–4 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 2 2205009
3-3 ROTATION VELOCITY OFFSET

1. Preparation:
b. Remove the Gantry front and left side covers.
c. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
2. Enter the TGP off–line function #400 (Gantry azimuth position display mode):
a. Set the G6 Gantry dip switch (location 7S) to ON on the TGP Board.
b. Push the TGP reset switch.

The Gantry rotates to the home position.
c. Verify that the Gantry Display panel displays the test number 400 and the azimuth position of the Gantry.
(ex. 180 indicates the home position, 270 indicates the 90_ CW position from home position)
3. Watch the Gantry if it rotates on its own:
a. Set the TGP service switches as described below:
ABT/SVE/FIX : SVE ↓
FAST/MID/SLOW : MID ↓
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
After one minute, verify that the Gantry Display panel displays exactly 180 (the number is in degrees); other-
wise, perform the following:
i. If the Gantry drifts in the CCW direction, adjust VZERO in the CW direction (approx. 32 degrees/turn of
VZERO).
If the Gantry drifts in the CW direction, adjust VZERO in the CCW direction.
(VZERO: location 10M on the TGP Board)
ii. Set the SYS/OFF/MNL switch to SYS.
iii. Return to step 2b.
4. Set the G6 Gantry dip switch (location 7S) to OFF on the TGP Board.
Press the reset switch of the TGP Board.
3–5 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 2 2205009
3-4 ROTATION SPEED

Note (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
If this check/adjustment is performed for the replaced Servo Amp, set the VR2 and VR5 potentiome-
ters of the Servo Amp to the middle position, prior to starting the following check/adjustment.
1. Preparation:
a. Remove the Gantry left side cover.
b. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’, ‘Control’ and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to OFF.
3. Enter the TGP off–line function #401 (Gantry rotation speed display mode):
a. Set the G6 Gantry dip switch (location 7S) to ON on the TGP Board.
b. Push the TGP reset switch.
The Gantry rotates to the home position, and the Gantry Display panel displays a test number 400.
c. Press the test switch once on the TGP Board. The Gantry Display will change from 400 to 401.
(401: Gantry rotation speed display mode)
4. Rotate the Gantry at a specified speed and check/adjust the Gantry rotation speed displayed on the the Gantry
Display:
a. Set the TGP service switches as follows to rotate the Gantry (2.0 sec/Rot).
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX ↓
FAST/MID/SLOW : FAST ↓
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
b. After Gantry rotation is stabilized (a few rotations are required), verify that the speed value displayed is within
the following range:
200 ±2
If not, adjust VGAIN (location 10M on the TGP Board).
Note
If the specification above can not be achieved, adjust the potentiometer VR2 of the Servo Amp. How-
ever, care must be taken not to rotate too much.
3–6 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-4 ROTATION SPEED (continued)

5. Perform the above adjustment for the following Gantry rotation speeds, by repeating steps 3b, 3c, and 4.
Table 3–23 Gantry Rotation Speed
TGP SERVICE SWITCH SPEED GANTRY DISPLAY VALUE

(Speed Specification)

SPD2/SLOW 150 ± 2

SPD2/MID 100 ± 1

SPD2/FAST 80 ± 1
7. Set the G6 Gantry dip switch (location 7S) to OFF on the TGP Board.
Press the reset switch of the TGP Board.
3–7 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-5 ROTATION DECELERATION

Note (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
This ‘Rotation Deceleration’ check/adjustment is performed when the Servo Amp is replaced only.
Before starting the check/adjustment, set the VR5 potentiometer of the Servo Amp to the middle posi-
tion.
Note (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

This ‘Rotation Deceleration ’ check/adjustment is performed when the Servo Amp is replaced only.
Before starting the check/adjustment, turn the VR2 and VR5 potentiometers of the Servo Amp by
a half turns CCW.
1. Preparation:
b. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’, ‘Control’ and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to OFF.
3–8 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-5 ROTATION DECELERATION (continued)
Deceleration Check/Adjustment
3. Rotate the Gantry at a specified speed and check/adjust the Gantry rotation deceleration:
a. Set the TGP service switches as follows to rotate the Gantry (2.0 sec/Rot).
FAST/MID/SLOW : FAST ↓
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
b. After Gantry rotation is stabilized (a few rotations are required), set the CONT/HOME/90_ switch to HOME to
stop the Gantry.
Observe how the Gantry comes to a halt;

Adjust VR5 on the Servo Amp to make the Gantry stop in the shortest time without an overshoot.
(Overshoot: the Gantry overruns the home position and returns CCW to the home position)
Adjust VR5 CW, if the Gantry makes an overshoot.

Adjust VR5 CCW, if the Gantry does not make an overshoot; the VR5 should be as in the farthest CCW posi-
tion as possible, just before making the Gantry overshoot.
Repeat steps a and b until achieving the shortest stop time without an overshoot.
Rotation Speed Re–adjustment

4. Check/adjust the Gantry rotation speed, if VR5 of the Servo Amp is adjusted; perform ‘Rotation Speed.’
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the following Gantry speeds:
Table 3–24 Gantry Rotation Speed
TGP SERVICE SWITCH SPEED

MNL/SPD2/SLOW/CONT/FIX 1.5 sec/Rot
MNL/SPD2/MID/CONT/FIX 1.0 sec/Rot
MNL/SPD2/FAST/CONT/FIX 0.8 sec/Rot
3–9 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
3–10 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 4 – SLIP RINGS AND BRUSHES
Note
For the slip rings and their associated components (brushes, etc.) information, see the ‘CT Slip Ring
Maintenance Manual (2154943).’
4–1 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
4–2 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 5 – TILT OPERATION
5-1 ROTATION CHECK WHILE TILTED

1. Remove the Gantry left side cover.
2. Verify that the other Gantry covers are installed.
3. Return the cradle to the furthest (Out) position from the Gantry.
4. Set the Table height to approximately ‘–100 mm’ according to the Gantry Display.
5. Push the Gantry switch ‘FWD’.
Verify that the Gantry tilts to the FWD 25.5 deg. position safely.
6. Rotate the Gantry while in the FWD 25.5 deg. tilt position by setting the TGP Service switches as follows:
FAST/MID/SLOW : MID ↓ (1.0 sec/Rot)
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
Verify that no abnormal movement occurs during rotation.
7. Set the SYS/OFF/MNL switch to OFF.
8. Push the Gantry switch ‘BWD’.
Verify that the Gantry tilts to the BWD 25.5 deg. position safely.
9. Rotate the Gantry while in the BWD 25.5 deg. tilt position by setting the TGP Service switches as follows:
FAST/MID/SLOW : MID ↓ (1.0 sec/Rot)
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
Verify that no abnormal movement occurs during rotation.
10. Set the SYS/OFF/MNL switch to SYS.
5–1 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 7 2205009
5-2 TILT GUIDE ROLLERS

The Tilt Guide Rollers on the side plates support the tilt parallel motion with the Gantry axial direction (side plate direc-
tion). The guide rollers should barely touch the arched arms which move during tilt operations.
1. Preparation:
a. Tilt the Gantry to 0 deg.
c. Remove the front, rear, and both side covers from the Gantry.
e. Set the TGP service switches ‘ABT/SVE/FIX’, ‘CONT/HOME/90°’, and ‘SYS/OFF/MNL’ to FIX, HOME, and
MNL, respectively, in this order, to position the Gantry to the home position (x–ray tube at the 12 0’clock posi-
tion). Then set ‘SYS/OFF/MNL’ to SYS.
f. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
g. Set the Table height to approximately ‘–100 mm’ according to the Gantry Display.
2. Verify that the four tilt guide rollers can be freely rotated by hand with a gap of approximately 0.5 mm at every
tilt angle from FWD 25_ to BWD 25_.
If the rollers are not free at every angle, perform the following adjustment.
See Illustrations 5–1 and 5–2.
a. Switch OFF the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch.
b. Loosen the main nuts of each guide roller, except for the front left guide roller, which is not adjustable.
(Three of the guide rollers are located on adjustment slots. The front left guide roller is fixed and not adjust-
able.)
c. Manually move the complete Gantry tilting frame assy, towards, or, away from the front left guide roller, such
that the arched frame just touches the front left guide roller, but also such that the front left guide roller can still
be rotated by hand.
d. Adjust the three guide rollers (front right, rear right and rear left) such that the gap between the rollers and
arched frames is approximately 0.5 mm.
e. Fix the rollers by tightening their main nuts.
f. Switch ON the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch.
g. Verify that the rollers can be rotated by hand at every tilt angle.
If not, repeat steps a through f.
5–2 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-2 TILT GUIDE ROLLERS (continued)
Illustration 5–1 Tilt Guide Rollers

Illustration 5–2 Gap between Roller and Arched Frame

5–3 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 7 2205009
5-3 TILT ROLLERS

The tilt rollers on the side plates support the motion of the arched frames during tilt operations.
Six rollers are equipped; located on left upper, left bottom front, left bottom rear, right upper, right bottom front, and
right bottom rear. All the four bottom rollers should rotate during tilt operations.
1. Preparation:
c. Remove the front, rear, and both side covers from the Gantry.
e. Set the TGP service switches ‘ABT/SVE/FIX’, ‘CONT/HOME/90°’, and ‘SYS/OFF/MNL’ to FIX, HOME, and
MNL, respectively, in this order, to position the Gantry to the home position (x–ray tube at the 12 0’clock posi-
tion). Then set ‘SYS/OFF/MNL’ to SYS.
f. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
g. Set the Table height to approximately ‘–100 mm’ according to the Gantry Display.
2. Verify that the four tilt rollers under the arched frames rotate along with the frames during tilt operations.
If not, perform the following adjustment.
a. Loosen the upper roller Lock Nuts (A) on both sides of the Gantry.
The Lock Nut is accessed from the outside the Gantry.
b. Loosen the set nuts for the Adjusting Bolts (E) on both sides of the Gantry, and then loosen the Adjusting Bolts.
c. Loosen the Lock Nut (B) on the left side only; do not loosen it too much.
The Lock Nut is accessed from the outside the Gantry.
d. Loosen the set nut and the Adjusting Bolt (D) on the left side.
5–4 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-3 TILT ROLLERS (continued)

e. Adjust the left bottom front roller by the Adjusting Bolt (D) such that the four tilt rollers rotate during tilt opera-
tions but also such that the rollers do not rotate when you try to rotate them by hand.
f. Tighten the Lock Nut (B). (approximately 930 kg · cm torque)
g. Tighten the upper roller Lock Nuts (A) slightly on both sides of the Gantry.
h. Tighten the Adjusting Bolts (E) on both sides of the Gantry until you can barely rotate the upper rollers by hand.
i. Tighten the set nuts for (D) and (E) on both sides of the Gantry.
j. Tighten the upper roller Lock Nuts (A) on both sides of the Gantry.
Illustration 5–3 Tilt Rollers

5–5 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-4 TILT SPEED
Tilt Speed Check

2. Set the Table height to approximately ‘–100 mm’ according to the Gantry Display.
3. Set the Gantry to the BWD 25 deg. position using the ‘BWD’ button on the Gantry Panel.
4. Measure the time from BWD 25 deg. to FWD 25 deg., and from FWD 25 deg. to BWD 25 deg. Verify that their
values are in the following specified ranges:
Table 5–1 Tilt Speed Specification

±
Note
Actually, the tilt operation stops at 0 deg. when you tilt the Gantry from BWD 25 deg. to FWD 25 deg.,
or from FWD 25 deg. to BWD 25 deg. For this reason, measure the time in the following way:

5–6 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-4 TILT SPEED (continued)
Tilt Speed Adjustment

If the time is out of the specified range, perform the procedure below.
5. Set the hydraulic valve adjusters to initial values:
b. Remove the Gantry front, rear, and both side covers.
c. Set the Service switch on the SUB Board to ON.
d. Rotate the Gantry in the CW direction by hand until the x–ray tube is positioned at approximately three o’clock
position.
e. Set the Service switch on the SUB Board to OFF.
f. Remove the Gantry inner bottom meshed plate with its stays, by removing the six hex screws. See Illustration
5–4.
g. Remove the cover of the hydraulic valve adjusters (two screws).
Illustration 5–4 Hydraulic Valve Adjuster Cover

ÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉ

5–7 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

h. Rotate the four adjusters (LEFT–FWD, LEFT–BWD, RIGHT–FWD, RIGHT–BWD) to the CW limit (S limit).
Illustration 5–5 Hydraulic Valve Adjuster

i. Rotate the four adjusters CCW to the adjuster intervals shown in Table below.
Table 5–2 Initial Setting Value

± ± ± ±
' #)"&' %)! ( #)"& $ #(&*!' &$" (
&( $# ! " (
5–8 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

Overtension. When changing the adjuster positions, make sure that you shift the right and
left adjusters the same distance and direction. If not, the Gantry right and left frame applied
torque could become unbalanced and the frame could be bent.
6. Adjust the LEFT–FWD and RIGHT–FWD adjusters:
a. Measure the time of movement from BWD 25 deg. to FWD 25 deg.
b. If the time is 30 ±3 sec, go to step 7; otherwise, perform the following:
If the time is less than 27 sec, rotate the LEFT–FWD and RIGHT–FWD adjusters for 1.0 scale interval in the
CW (S) direction.
If the time is more than 33 sec, rotate the LEFT–FWD and RIGHT–FWD adjusters for 1.0 scale interval in the
CCW (F) direction.
c. Repeat steps a and b, until the time equals 30 ±3 sec.
7. Adjust the LEFT–BWD and RIGHT–BWD adjusters:
a. Measure the time of movement from FWD 25 deg. to BWD 25 deg.
b. If the time is 30 ±3 sec, go to step 8; otherwise, perform the following:
If the time is less than 27 sec, rotate the LEFT–BWD and RIGHT–BWD adjusters for 1/5 of a scale interval in
the CW (S) direction.
If the time is more than 33 sec, rotate the LEFT–BWD and RIGHT–BWD adjusters for 1/5 of a scale interval in
the CCW (F) direction.
c. Repeat steps a and b, until the time equals 30 ±3 sec.
8. Mark the final adjusted positions.
9. Install the hydraulic valve adjuster cover (two screws).
10. Install the Gantry inner bottom meshed plate, 6 hex screws.
5–9 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-5 TILT ANGLE
Tilt Angle Check

1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.
Set the Table height to approximately ‘–100 mm’ according to the Gantry Display.
2. Press the ‘FWD’ button continually until the Gantry tilt to the +25 deg. position.
3. Measure the Gantry tilt angle using a clinometer.

The clinometer must be placed on the x–ray tube mounting plate.
Verify that the tilt angle is 25 ±1 deg. and that the Tilt Display shows ‘FWD 25.0’.
4. Continually press ‘BWD’ until the Gantry stops. Verify that the Gantry stops at the 0_ tilt position and the Tilt
Display shows ‘0’.
5. Free the ‘BWD’ button, and then press it again until the Gantry tilts to –25 deg. position.
6. Measure the Gantry tilt angle using a clinometer.
Verify that the tilt angle is –25 ±1 deg. and the Tilt Display shows ‘BWD 25.0’.
Tilt Angle Adjustment

If the tilt angle is out of the specified range, perform the procedure below.
7. Raise the Table to the ‘–50 mm’ position.
8. Enter the TGP off–line function #002 (Gantry tilt angle display mode):
a. Set the T6 Table dip switch to ON on the TGP Board.
b. Push the TGP reset button.

The Gantry Display panel displays a test number 000.
c. Press the test switch twice.

The Gantry Display will change from 000 to 002. (002: Gantry tilt angle display mode)
d. Verify that the Gantry Display panel displays the following.
Tilt 002
Position 255 (tilt angle; example only)
(Angle Display: 0.1_/digit
5: FWD 25 deg.
255: 0 deg.
505: BWD 25 deg.)
5–10 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-5 TILT ANGLE (continued)

9. Adjust the FWD 25 deg. position:
a. Tilt the Gantry FWD 25 ±0.2 deg. measured using a clinometer.
If the FWD tilt limit is reached (the Gantry tilt reads ‘0’ and stops) before the Gantry is tilted FWD 25 deg., turn
variable register T0 on the TGP Board in the CW direction to increase the tilt reading, and then continue to tilt
the Gantry to FWD 25 ±0.2 deg.
b. When the Gantry is tilted FWD 25 ±0.2 deg., adjust T0 to read ‘5’ on the Gantry Display.
10. Adjust the BWD 25 deg. position:
a. Tilt the Gantry BWD 25 ±0.2 deg. measured using a clinometer.
If the BWD tilt limit is reached (the Gantry tilt reads ‘505’ and stops) before the Gantry is tilted BWD 25 deg.,
turn variable register TG on the TGP Board in the CCW direction to decrease the tilt reading, and then contin-
ue to tilt the Gantry to BWD 25 ±0.2 deg.
b. When the Gantry is tilted BWD 25 ±0.2 deg., adjust TG to read ‘505’ on the Gantry Display.
11. Set the T6 Table dip switch to OFF on the TGP Board.
Push the reset switch of the TGP Board.
12. Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.
13. Verify that the angle is ± 0.5 deg. measured using a clinometer.
5–11 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
5–12 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 6 – COLLIMATOR
6-1 APERTURE RATIO

1. Perform the following five off–line scans, following the steps below.

!( **!&%(- ) " $ ( &+)
!( **!&%(- ) " $ ( &+)
!( **!&%(- ) " $ ( &+)
!( **!&%(- ) " $ ( &+)
!( **!&%(- ) " $ ( &+)

!( **!&%(- ) " $ ( &+)
&,*! !#*( %)*##
&* &( )-)*$) , (
$$ * !"%)) % )#* &%#- !) %&* ''#!) *& )*') .
#&,
1. CALIBRATION

In this menu perform the scans stated before.
6–1 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-1 APERTURE RATIO (continued)

2. Obtain the following mean files 1 ∼ 5 (6) from the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.

b. Enter 1 (2, 3, ...) for the raw data file ID No.
d. Select as follows:
OFFSET FILE CORRECTION : (Yes)
REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION : (No)
NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION : (No)
e. Select MEAN in *** KIND OF DATA ***.
f. Select STORE FILE.
g. Enter 1 (2, 3, ...) as the MEAN FILE No.
6–2 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

3. Perform division operations to obtain the following mean files 7 ∼ 10 (11), by repeating the steps below.

a. Select CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE from the Support menu.
c. Enter 2 (3, ...)for FILE1.
Enter 1 for FILE2.
e. Enter 7 (8, ...)as the MEAN FILE No.
4. Check the aperture ratio using SUPPORT DISPLAY:
Enter 0 for MIN.
Enter 1000 for MAX.
6–3 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Check for ‘(1 mm) / (10 mm)’

Enter 7 for DATA. (The mean file No. 7 is located on the seventh line)
Enter 0.16 for DATA MAX. (The specification for the mean file No. 7 is 0.10 ∼ 0.16)

Check that the graph (aperture ratio) falls within the specification, 0.10 ∼ 0.16.
f. Perform the steps below to show data for Channels beyond 500.
i. Select START POSITION.
Enter 1 for DATA.
ii. Select SET CURSOR.
Enter 7 for DATA.
iii. Repeat step d.
6–4 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 6–1 Aperture Ratio (Ch. 1 ∼ Approx. 500)
0.16
0.15
0.14
0.13
0.12
0.11
100.000 400.000
Illustration 6–2 Aperture Ratio (Ch. 500 ∼ End)
0.16
0.15
0.14
0.13
0.12
0.11
600.000
6–5 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Check for Other Aperture Ratios

g. Check the other aperture ratios (mean files No. 8, 9, 10, (and 11)) as described in Table below, by similarly
repeating steps c through f. (at steps c and f–ii, enter 8, 9, 10, (or 11), for DATA, respectively)
Table 6–1 Aperture Ratio Specification

6–6 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-2 BOW–TIE FILTER CURVE TEST
General Information
! ! ! $
D The DAS/Detector has been powered ON for more than two hours.
D The x–ray alignment (‘Plane of Rotation’, ‘Detector Bean–on–Window’, ‘Iso Center Alignment’, and ‘Filter
Center Alignment’) is proper.

! ! !
! " !! "
! ! ! ! ! $ ! ! %!& #& ! ! !'
$ "& !! & %& ! $ " ! !
1. Preparation:
2. Perform two air stationary scans with the filter installed and removed:
1. CALIBRATION
.
.
6–7 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-2 BOW–TIE FILTER CURVE TEST (continued)

f. Perform the following air stationary scans:
Scan 1 Scan 2
FOCUS : LARGE FOCUS : LARGE
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
FILTER : INSTALLED FILTER : REMOVED
For filter removal, refer to the Component Replacement manual.

(Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch prior to removing the filter!)
3. Obtain the following mean files 1 and 2 from the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.

b. Enter 1 (2) for the raw data file ID No.
d. Select as follows;
REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION : (6ch)
g. Enter 1 (2) as the MEAN FILE No.
6–8 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

4. Apply a division to the means file No. 1 and No. 2:
c. Enter 1 for FILE1.
Enter 2 for FILE2.
e. Enter 3 as the MEAN FILE No.
5. Check the filter curve using SUPPORT DISPLAY:
Enter 0 for MIN.
Enter 1000 for MAX.
Enter 3 for DATA. (The filter curve mean file is located on the third line)
Enter 0 for DATA MIN.
Enter 50 for DATA MAX. (Change this, if necessary)
A filter curve is drawn, as is shown in Illustration 6–3.

Check that the curve is smooth.
6–9 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

f. Perform the steps below to show a curve for Channels beyond 500.
Enter 1 for DATA.
Enter 3 for DATA. (The filter curve mean file is located on the third line)
iii. Repeat step d.
6. Perform ‘Filter Center Alignment’ of ‘System’ Functional Check/Adjustment – ‘X–ray Alignment.’
6–10 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 6–3 Filter Curve (Ch. 1 ∼ Approx. 500)

Illustration 6–4 Filter Curve (Ch. 400 ∼ End)

6–11 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
6–12 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 7 – TABLE AND GANTRY
7-1 TABLE POSITIONING

The following procedure adjusts the Table position in the right–left direction so that the Table center line and the scan
center are aligned. See Illustration 7–1.
After completing the adjustment, anchor the Table; see the Installation manual.
Illustration 7–1 Table Right–left Positioning
GANTRY

TABLE

1. Preparation:
c. Remove the front and both side covers from the Gantry.
7–1 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
7-1 TABLE POSITIONING (continued)
WARNING!
AND SMALL BUTTON), THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO THE 0 DEG. POSITION. IF IT IS
OFF THE ‘ROTATE’ SWITCH FIRST.
2. Perform an axial scan of the head holder:
a. Mount the axial head holder to the end of the cradle.
b. Switch ON the positioning lights.
c. Advance the cradle into the Gantry until the internal light cuts the approximately middle section of the head
holder.
d. Perform an axial scan of the head holder using the following technique:
Scan Parameters: 35 cm FOV, 3 sec, 120 kV, 60 mA, 10 mm Thickness
7–2 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

3. Check whether the Table center line and the scan center are aligned:
a. Verify that an image like as to the right appears on

the CRT monitor screen.
b. Verify that a (+) cursor is not shown on the screen.

If shown, press the [Crsr] key to remove it.

c. Press the [Dist Angle] + [Shift] keys to show a grid.

7–3 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
d. Press the [Crsr] key; a cursor (+) will appear

on the screen.
e. Move the cursor to where the left side of the 5

head holder intersects the x–axis.
0cm
L R
80 kV
60 mA
3.0 sec
35-CAL
f. Press the [Dist Angle] key.
g. Move the cursor to the origin (center of the

grid). 5
0 cm
L R
80 kV
60 mA
3.0 sec
35-CAL
h. Press the [Dist Angle] key. The distance is

displayed on the screen.
cm
L R
80 kV
60 mA <1> D= +11.07
3.0 sec H= 0.0d
35-CAL V= 89.0d
7–4 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
i. Move the cursor to where the right side of

the head holder intersects the x–axis.
0c
m
L R
<1> D= +11.07
80 kV H= 0.0d
60 mA V= 89.0d
3.0 sec
35-CAL
j. Press the [Dist Angle] key. The distance is

displayed on the screen.
k. Verify that the difference in the distances (= I

5
(1) – (2) I) is within "2 mm.
If not, proceed to next step.

0c
m
L R
<2> D= +11.86
80 kV H= 0.0d
60 mA V= -89.0d
3.0 sec <1> D= +10.07
35-CAL H= 0.0d
V= 89.0d
| (1) – (2) | ≤ 2 mm
7–5 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

4. Adjust the Table right – left position:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the Table front and rear bottom covers.

(Refer to the Component Replacement manual, if necessary)
c. Loosen the Table base mounting nuts. See Illustration 7–2.
d. Move the Table to center the head holder in the scan plane, according to step 3.
e. Tighten the Table base mounting nuts securely.
f. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
g. Return to step 2.
Illustration 7–2 Table Mounting Nuts

7–6 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
7-2 POSITIONING LIGHTS

Five positioning lights are equipped on the Gantry rotative frame; these are:
Inner right and left lights
Outer right and left lights
Outer top light.
Illustration 7–3 Positioning Lights

GANTRY

GANTRY

TABLE TABLE

The positions of the Inner right and left lights, and Outer right and left lights are adjusted in the horizontal and vertical
directions.
The position of the Outer top light is adjusted in the right–left and horizontal directions.
7–7 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
7-2 POSITIONING LIGHTS (continued)
WARNING!
AND SMALL BUTTON), THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO THE 0 DEG. POSITION. IF IT IS
OFF THE ‘ROTATE’ SWITCH FIRST.
Remove the Gantry front and both side cover.
Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
2. Place a fine pin (ex. M3 size hexagonal wrench) on the center of the phantom holder. See Illustration 7–4.
Illustration 7–4 Positioning A Pin

7–8 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Positioning a Pin at the Scan Center

Refer to Operator Manual, where necessary.
3. Position the pin perpendicular to the scan plane:
a. Perform a 0 deg. scout scan on the pin.
b. Magnify the image by a four factor in the following way:
i. Press the [Crsr] key to display a crosshair (+) cursor.
ii. Position the cursor approximately at the center of the pin image.
iii. Press the [Mag] key.
iv. Enter the magnification factor of four.
c. Display a vertical line in the following way:
i. Press the [Image Meas] key.
ii. Select Set Cursor.
iii. Select Vertical Line.
iv. Set V Angle to 0 deg.
d. Move the vertical line using the trackball onto the pin image to check that the pin and the vertical line are
aligned. See Illustration 7–5.
e. Position the pin so that the pin and the vertical line are aligned, according to the image.
f. Repeat steps a through e, until the pin and the vertical line are alined within ±0.5 mm.
After the pin is correctly positioned, do not move it.
Illustration 7–5 0 deg. Scout Image of Wrench

7–9 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

4. Position the pin at the scan center:
a. Perform an axial scan on the pin with the following settings;
Scan Parameters: 3 sec, 120 kV, 60 mA, 10 mm Thickness, 35 cm Recon FOV, x = y = 0
b. Display a grid.
c. Measure the distance between the pin and the scan center in the following way:
i. Press the [Crsr] key to display a crosshair cursor.
ii. Move the cursor using the trackball to the center of the pin, and press the [Dist Angle] key to copy the
cursor over the pin location.
iii. Move the cursor vertically to the X axis; press [Dist Angle] again, to deposit the end location and display
the distance between the pin and the X axis (A). See Illustration 7–6.
iv. Perform the above to measure the distance between the pin and the Y axis (B).
d. Position the pin so that the pin is placed at the scan center, according to the distances measured at the above
step.
Use the up–down adjuster and right–left adjuster of the phantom holder (one turn: 1 mm movement). (The pin
direction is adjusted parallel with the Gantry axial direction, per step 3)
e. Repeat steps a through d, until the pin is positioned at the scan center within ±0.5 mm.
Illustration 7–6 Axial Image of Wrench

7–10 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Vertical Position – Right and Left Lights

5. Turn ON the positioning lights.
7. Adjust the inner right and left lights in the vertical direction using the ‘A’ screw so that the horizontal light and the
pin are aligned within ±0.5 mm. See Illustration 7–9.
Adjust the light angle using the ‘D’ lever, if necessary.
8. Move the cradle in the Out direction over 175 mm.
9. Adjust the outer right and left lights in the vertical direction using the ‘A’ screw so that the horizontal light and the
pin are aligned within ±0.5 mm.
Right–Left Position – Top Light

10. Adjust the outer top light in the right–left direction using the ‘A’ screw so that the horizontal (Gantry axial direction)
light and the pin are aligned within ±0.5 mm.
Verification of Table Positioning

11. Verify that the Table is installed perpendicular to the Gantry:
a. Perform a scout scan on the 25 cm water phantom at 0 deg. azimuth.

The scout image and a horizontal line appear.
b. Verify that the horizontal line and the phantom surface are parallel. See Illustration 7–7.
Illustration 7–7 Table Positioning Check

VERIFY THAT
THESE TWO

LINES ARE

PARALLEL.
7–11 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Positioning the Water Phantom

12. Align the position of the water phantom surface to the scan plane:
a. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Perform a scout scan on the 25 cm water phantom at 90 deg. azimuth.

The scout image and a vertical line appear.
c. Adjust the direction of the phantom holder, using the front surface angle adjuster (see Illustration 7–4, accord-
ing to the image, so that the phantom surface is parallel with the vertical line.
d. Repeat steps b and c, until the line and the phantom surface are parallel.
e. Move the vertical line until it just touches the surface of the phantom scout image. See Illustration 7–8.
f. Press the [Enter] key.
g. Press the [End] key.
h. Select ‘Confirm’ on the Touch Panel screen and press the ‘Table set’ button.
The phantom surface is moved into the scan plane position.
Illustration 7–8 Localize on the Phantom Surface
VERTICAL LINE

7–12 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Horizontal Position – Right and Left Lights

13. Turn ON the positioning lights.
15. Adjust the inner right and left lights in the horizontal direction using the ‘B’ screw so that the vertical light and the
phantom surface are aligned within ±0.5 mm.
16. Move the cradle in the Out direction over 175 mm.
17. Adjust the outer right and left lights in the horizontal direction using the ‘B’ screw so that the vertical light and the
phantom surface are aligned within ±0.5 mm.
Horizontal Position – Top Lights

18. Adjust the outer top light in the horizontal direction using the ‘B’ screw so that the right–left light and the phantom
surface are aligned within ±0.5 mm.
7–13 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 7–9 Positioning Light Adjustment
STEEL
A PLATE
ADJUSTING B
a
TUBE
b
2
1
2’
3'
1' 1
3'
D
3 d (A hex screw is installed inside this hole)
LIGHT
ADJUST ADJUST
2 SCREEN 1' DIRECTION SCREW/LEVER
1 - 1' A
2' 2 - 2' B
3 - 3' D
Before adjusting A, B, or D, loosen a, b, or d, respectively;

after adjustment, tighten a, b, or d, accordingly.
7–14 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
7-3 GANTRY PANEL SWITCH CHECK
7-3-1 Table Up, Down, Height

1. Tilt the Gantry to 0 deg.
Move the cradle to the furthest (Out) position from the Gantry.
2. Push the ‘Down’ button until the Table reaches its lowest position.
3. Hold down the ‘Up’ button.
Verify that the ‘cradle longitudinal position display’ changes to ‘Table height display’, and that the Table stops on
the way up with the ‘Table height display’ blinking.
Free the ‘UP’ button and hold it down again until the highest position is reached.
4. Return the Table to its lowest position using the ‘Down’ button.
5. Do the same check (step 3) with the Foot Switches.
6. Push the ‘Height’ button and verify that the ‘longitudinal display’ changes to ‘height display.’
7-3-2 Table In, Out, Fast

1. Raise the Table to the highest position.
2. Verify that the cradle moves In and Out smoothly when pressing the ‘In’ or ‘Out’ button on the Gantry Panel
Switch.
3. Press the ‘In’ or “Out’ button together with the ‘Fast’ button and verify that the cradle moves smoothly at approxi-
mately twice the speed as in step 2; check both In and Out.
7-3-3 Move to Scan, Zero

2. Push the ‘Zero’ button. Verify that the ‘Table position’ display is ‘0.0’.
3. Push ‘Move to Scan’ and verify that the ‘In’ LED starts to blink.
4. Continually press the ‘In’ button until the cradle stops. Verify that the cradle moves 175 mm, and that the ‘Table
position’ display increments to “–175”, and then turns to ‘0.0’.
7-3-4 Tilt Range

1. Push the ‘Tilt Range’ button.
2. Verify that the ‘tilt display’ changes to ‘tilt range display.’
7–15 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
7-3 GANTRY PANEL SWITCH CHECK (continued)
7-3-5 POSN Light

1. Push the ‘POSN Light’ button.
Verify that the Gantry rotates to the Home position and the 5 positioning lights are turned ON.
(The Gantry does not rotate, if it is already positioned at the Home position)
Verify that the positioning lights are turned OFF automatically after approximately 1 minute.
(If the positioning lights are not turned ON, push the reset switch on the TGP Board once and perform the above)
7-3-6 Home
1. Raise the Table to approximately –50 mm height.
Move the cradle to the 200 mm position in the In direction from the outer limit position.
Tilt the Gantry to the BWD or FWD limit.
2. Hold down the ‘Home’ button.
Verify the following:

The Gantry rotates to the 0 deg. position;
The cradle moves to the outer limit position;
The Table lowers to the lowest position.
7–16 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
7-4 TABLE AND GANTRY INTERLOCK

Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.
Move the cradle to any position except the out limit position.
2. Move the Table down until it stops automatically; this is the interlock position.
Verify that the Table up/down function and Gantry tilt function are interlocked along the dashed line indicated in
Illustration 7–10, but that the cradle in/out function can still operate.
3. Move the cradle to the out limit position.
Verify that the Table can be lowered to the lowest position.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 with other tilt angles.
Illustration 7–10 Table/Gantry Interlock
25
20
TILT ANGLE [deg.]
BWD
10
UP/DOWN, TILT AREA

0
10
FWD
20 INTERLOCK AREA
25
-250 -200 -150 -100 0

TABLE HEIGHT [mm]
THE DASHED LINE IS IN/OUT INTERLOCK, WHICH IS SET AT 5 MM
OUTSIDE OF UP/DOWN – TILT INTERLOCK
7–17 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
7–18 GANTRY
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
TABLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – ELEVATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 MECHANICAL LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 TABLE HEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2-1 Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2-2 Compact Siting Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
SECTION 2 – LONGITUDINAL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 CRADLE MECHANICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-1-1 Unlatch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-1-2 Parallel Setting of Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-1-3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-1-4 Gap between Cradle and Table Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-1-5 Gap between Cradle and Sponge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-2 CRADLE RELATIVE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2-2-1 Travel Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2-2-2 Cradle Step Move Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-3 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2-4 CRADLE MOTOR MAXIMUM TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
SECTION 3 – TABLE ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 HOLDER FITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
i TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
ii TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 1 – ELEVATION FUNCTION
1-1 MECHANICAL LIMIT

The following procedure checks the mechanical limit both at the lowest and highest positions.
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘Control’, and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
c. Remove the Table front and rear bottom covers.

(Refer to the Component Replacement manual)
d. Switch ON the ‘Control’ and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches.
2. Set the T3 Table dip switch (location: 3S) on the TGP Board to ON.
(Cancels the Table–Gantry interlock function)
3. Press and hold the ‘Home Position’ button on the Gantry switch panel, and the following actions occur:
The Gantry tilts to 0 degrees.
The Table lowers to its lowest position.
The cradle moves to its furthest (Out) position from the Gantry.
Verify that the Table and Gantry motions are smooth and quiet.
Lowest Height
4. Verify that the Table height is more than 350 mm (more than 650 mm, for Compact Siting Mode 2; refer to Section
1-2, ‘Table Height’). See Illustration 1–1 for proper measuring points (measure ‘H’).
5. Press and hold the ‘UP’ button.
The Table stops at a height of approximately 785 mm.
Release the ‘UP’ button and depress it again until the Table stops at its highest position.
1–1 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-1 MECHANICAL LIMIT (continued)
Highest Height
6. Verify that the Table height is more than 1000 mm.
7. Set the T3 Table dip switch on the TGP Board to OFF.

(Enables the Table–Gantry interlock function)
NOTICE
Note
After the above check procedure is finished and the front and rear bottom covers are re–installed,
verify that the Table up and down operations can be correctly performed by all the foot pedals each.
1–2 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2 TABLE HEIGHT

For systems where the Table lowest height is set to 650 mm (Compact Siting Mode 2), perform Section 1-2-2, ‘Com-
pact Siting Mode 2.’
For systems where the Table lowest height is set to 350 mm (normal setting), perform the following section ‘Normal
Mode.’
1-2-1 Normal Mode

1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘Control’, and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

e. Set the Gantry to 0 deg. tilt position.
f. Set the cradle to the Out limit position.
2. Enter the TGP off–line function #001 (Table height display mode):
a. Set the T6 Table dip switch (location: 3S) to ON on the TGP Board.
c. Push the test switch once after the Gantry Display panel displays a test number ‘000.’ The Gantry Display will
change from ‘000’ to ‘001.’
(001: Table height display mode)
1–3 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2-1 Normal Mode (continued)

Tilt 001
Position 0520 (Table height; example only)
Height Display: 0.5 mm/digit

ex.) Position Height
0: 345 mm (scan center – 605 mm)
1210: 950 mm (height of scan center)
See Illustration 1–1 for height measure.
Illustration 1–1 Table Height Measure
'" %"&$%- ("), -%" %"&$%- ,"

&# -%&, ) )*- " (",.+"!
" .," *# -%" *--*( ")-"+ #+(" ," (",.+" -%" %"&$%-
)! !! -* &- -* *-&)

CASE A CASE B
((
((

((

3. Adjust the low height position (= approximately 350 mm):
a. Lower the Table to a height of 347 ~ 360 mm.
If the Table can not be lowered down to 347 ~ 360 mm due to the interlock function, switch ON (up) the T3
Table dip switch to disable the interlock function, and continue to lower the Table. In this case, be careful not
to have the Table collide against anything (including the Table mechanical limit).
b. Measure the height H.
c. Adjust variable register H0 on the TGP Board so the Gantry Display XXXX equals (H – 345) X 2.
1–4 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

4. Adjust the high height position (= approximately 950 mm):
a. Raise the Table to a height of 940 ~ 953 mm.
If the Table can not be raised up to 940 ~ 953 mm due to the interlock function, switch ON (up) the T3 Table dip
switch to disable the interlock function, and continue to raise the Table. In this case, be careful not to have
the Table collide against anything (including the Table mechanical limit).
c. Adjust variable register HG so the Gantry Display XXXX equals (H – 345) X 2.
5. Verify the following again:
HEIGHT GANTRY DISPLAY

{(H- 345) X 2} ± 1

{(H - 345) X 2} ± 1

If the values of the Gantry Display are out of the specified range, return to step 3.
1–5 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
WARNING!
6. Adjust the longitudinal correction function:
When the Table is raised or lowered, the cradle is automatically moved in the Out or In direction to remain at the
same distance from the Gantry. The following procedure checks/adjusts this function.
a. Raise the Table until the Gantry Display displays approximately 1000 mm.
b. Move the cradle in the In direction by approximately 1000 mm.
c. Mark the cradle longitudinal position; for example, attach tape on the cradle and mark a line on it, aligning with
positioning lights. See Illustration 1–2.
d. Raise the Table until the Gantry Display displays approximately ‘1200’ (raise the Table by 10 cm); or
Lower the Table until the Gantry Display displays approximately ‘800’ (lower the Table by 10 cm).
e. Verify that the longitudinal correction error falls within ±1 mm, that is, the mark line and the positioning light
align within ±1 mm.
If not, perform the following adjustment:

i. When the Table is raised, if the cradle is moved in the OUT direction for 1 mm or more excess over the
correct amount (in this case, when the Table is lowered, the cradle will be moved in the IN direction for 1
mm or more excess over the correct amount);
turn VR HG a little in the CCW direction.
Or;
When the Table is raised, if the cradle is moved in the In direction for 1 mm or more excess over the
correct amount (in this case, when the Table is lowered, the cradle will be moved in the Out direction for 1
turn VR HG a little in the CW direction.
ii. Raise or lower the Table for some height (10 mm, 20 mm, or any).
(This operation is required prior to repeating the above check)
iii. Perform the above check again.
1–6 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 1–2 Cradle Longitudinal Position Marking

7. Set the T6 (and T3) Table dip switch(es) on the TGP Board to OFF (down position).
NOTICE
Note
After the above check/adjustment procedure is finished and the front and rear bottom covers are re–
installed, verify that the Table up and down operations can be correctly performed by all the foot ped-
als each.
1–7 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2-2 Compact Siting Mode 2

1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Control’ and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

e. Set the Gantry to 0 deg. tilt position.
f. Set the cradle to the Out limit position.
2. Enter the TGP off–line function #001 (Table height display mode):
c. Push the test switch once after the Gantry Display panel displays a test number ‘000.’ The Gantry Display will
change from ‘000’ to ‘001.’
(001: Table height display mode)
Tilt 001
Position 0520 (Table height; example only)
Height Display: 0.5 mm/digit

ex.) Position Height
0: 345 mm (scan center – 605 mm)
1210: 950 mm (height of scan center)
See Illustration 1–1 for height measure.
3. Adjust the low height position (= approximately 650 mm):
a. Lower the Table to a height of 645 ~ 655 mm.
If the Table can not be lowered down to 645 ~ 655 mm due to the interlock function, switch ON (up) the T3
Table dip switch to disable the interlock function, and continue to lower the Table. In this case, be careful not
to have the Table collide against anything (including the Table mechanical limit).
c. Adjust variable register H0 on the TGP Board so the Gantry Display XXXX equals (H – 345) X 2. (This adjust-
ment is temporary; H0 will be re–adjusted later)
1–8 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2-2 Compact Siting Mode 2 (continued)

4. Adjust the high height position (= approximately 900 mm):
a. Raise the Table to a height of 895 ~ 905 mm.
If the Table can not be raised up to 895 ~ 905 mm due to the interlock function, switch ON (up) the T3 Table dip
switch to disable the interlock function, and continue to raise the Table. In this case, be careful not to have
the Table collide against anything (including the Table mechanical limit).
c. Read the Gantry Display (= x).
d. Calculate Z and X values, according to below:
Z = (X – x) X (2.162 – x/2500) + x, where X = (H – 345) X 2; And round off Z to an integer.
e. Adjust variable register HG so the Gantry Display XXXX equals Z.
f. Adjust variable register H0 so the Gantry Display XXXX equals X.
5. Verify the following again:
HEIGHT GANTRY DISPLAY

{(H- 345) X 2} ± 1

{(H - 345) X 2} ± 1

If the values of the Gantry Display are out of the specified range, return to step 3.
1–9 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
WARNING!
6. Adjust the longitudinal correction function:
When the Table is raised or lowered, the cradle is automatically moved in the Out or In direction to remain at the
same distance from the Gantry. The following procedure checks/adjusts this function.
a. Raise the Table until the Gantry Display displays approximately 1000 mm.
b. Move the cradle in the In direction by approximately 1000 mm.
c. Mark the cradle longitudinal position; for example, attach tape on the cradle and mark a line on it aligning with
positioning lights. See Illustration 1–2.
d. Raise the Table until the Gantry Display displays approximately ‘1200’ (raise the Table by 10 cm); or
Lower the Table until the Gantry Display displays approximately ‘800’ (lower the Table by 10 cm).
e. Verify that the longitudinal correction error falls within ±1 mm, that is, the mark line and the positioning light
align within ±1 mm.
If not, perform the following adjustment:

i. When the Table is raised, if the cradle is moved in the OUT direction for 1 mm or more excess over the
correct amount (in this case, when the Table is lowered, the cradle will be moved in the IN direction for 1
turn VR HG a little in the CCW direction.
Or;
When the Table is raised, if the cradle is moved in the In direction for 1 mm or more excess over the
correct amount (in this case, when the Table is lowered, the cradle will be moved in the Out direction for 1
turn VR HG a little in the CW direction.
ii. Raise or lower the Table for some height (10 mm, 20 mm, or any).
(This operation is required prior to repeating the above check)
iii. Perform the above check again.
1–10 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

7. Set the T6 (and T3) Table dip switch(es) on the TGP Board to OFF (down position).
NOTICE
8. Verify the ‘Compact Siting Mode 2’ operation:
a. Move the cradle to the Out limit position.
b. During lowering the Table, verify that the Table does not hit any objects and stops at an appropriate position.
c. Raise the Table to a height between the Up limit position and –150 mm position.
d. During moving the cradle in the In direction, verify that the cradle does not hit any objects and stops at an
appropriate position.
Note
After the above check/adjustment procedure is finished and the front and rear bottom covers are re–
installed, verify that the Table up and down operations can be correctly performed by all the foot ped-
als each.
1–11 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
1–12 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 2 – LONGITUDINAL FUNCTION
2-1 CRADLE MECHANICS
2-1-1 Unlatch Switches

To perform the following procedure, a person should ride on the cradle, or some substitute should be placed on the
cradle.
1. Move the cradle to the Out limit position by the ‘OUT’ button.
2. While moving the cradle in the In direction by continuously pushing the ‘IN’ button, perform the following:
a. Push the Unlatch switch (‘Free’). See Illustration 2–1.
Verify that the cradle stops moving, and that the Gantry Display goes blank; this indicating that the cradle is
unlatched.
b. Push the Unlatch switch again (‘Latch’).
c. Release the ‘IN’ button, and then push it.
Verify that the cradle starts moving and the Gantry Display changes to normal (displaying a position in millime-
ter).
3. Repeat the above same check for the Unlatch switch on the opposite side.
Illustration 2–1 Unlatch Switch Location

2–1 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-1-2 Parallel Setting of Cradle

1. Switch OFF the ‘Control’ and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the Table right and left side covers.
3. Move the cradle to the Out limit position by hand.
4. Adjust the position of the bearings to meet the following conditions. See Illustration 2–2.
D The Table frame and the cradle are parallel; adjust so that the difference between gap DF (measured on
the In side) and gap DR (measured on the Out side) becomes 1.5 mm or less.
D A gap of 0.1 mm or more (‘A’) exists between the cradle and the bearing (at least one of the right and left
bearings); however, the total of the gaps on the right and left sides should be 2.5 mm or less.
Illustration 2–2 Gap Between Frame and Cradle

2–2 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-1-3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support

1. Switch OFF the ‘Control’ and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the Table right and left side covers.
3. Observe the gap between the cradle and the cradle support bearing (see Illustration 2–3) while moving the cradle
with no load over the entire travel (In $ Out) by hand, and find out a travel point where the gap is the narrowest
and stop the cradle there.
4. Adjust the gap between the cradle and the cradle support bearing by the nuts, so that the gap becomes 0.2 mm or
less (however, it should be > 0).
5. Verify that the cradle does not touch the cradle support bearing while moving the cradle with no load over the
entire travel (In $ Out).
Illustration 2–3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support

2–3 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-1-4 Gap between Cradle and Table Cover

1. Install the Table right and left side covers.
2. Move the cradle to the Out limit position by hand.
3. Adjust the gap between the cradle and the table covers by loosening the cover attaching bolts, so that the gap
becomes 7 mm or less (however, it should be > 0). See Illustration 2–4.
Illustration 2–4 Gap Between Table Cover and Cradle
7 mm or less (however, it 7 mm or less (however, it

should be > 0) should be > 0)

2–4 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-1-5 Gap between Cradle and Sponge

1. Move the cradle slightly to the IN position.
2. The cradle has the side play. Move the cradle to the left all the way by hand, and then check the gap between the
cradle and the sponge. It must be within the specifications below:
D Gap between cradle and sponge : 1mm or less
D Gap between cradle base and sponge : Approx. 5.5mm
Illustration 2–5 Gap Between Cradle and Sponge

Approx. 5.5 mm
1 mm or less

3. Move the cradle to the right all the way by hand, and then check the gap between the cradle and the sponge. It
must be within the specifications in step 2 above. See Illustration 2–5.
4. Move the cradle IN or OUT, and then verify that both sponges should not be pulled by the cradle.
2–5 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-2 CRADLE RELATIVE POSITION

The following procedure (‘Travel Accuracy’ or ‘Cradle Step Move Operation’) checks the encoder and its related me-
chanics and electrics.
2-2-1 Travel Accuracy

1. Set the Gantry to 0_ tilt position.
Raise the Table to the maximum height.
Move the cradle to its Out limit position.
2. Move the cradle approximately 200 mm in the In direction.
3. Press the ‘Zero’ button, and verify that the Gantry Display indicates Zero.
4. Mark the Table cover with a marking tape or other at one end of the cradle. Define this position as a reference.
5. Move the cradle approximately 1000 mm (Display) by pushing the ‘In’ + ‘Fast’ buttons.
6. Read the absolute value on the Display (A).
Measure the cradle movement (B).
Verify the following:

<= 0.5 (%)

7. Perform the same check by returning the cradle in the Out direction approximately 1000 mm.
2–6 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-2-2 Cradle Step Move Operation

1. Set the Gantry to 0_ tilt position.
Raise the Table to the maximum height.
Move the cradle to its Out limit position.
2. Press the ‘Zero’ button, and verify that the Gantry Display indicates Zero.
3. Mark the Table cover with a marking tape or other at one end of the cradle. Define this position as a reference.
4. Move the cradle approximately 100 mm (Display) by pressing the ‘In’ button.
Repeat the above step (a) a total ten times, i.e., 1000 mm movement.
5. Return the cradle continuously without stopping until the Gantry Display shows ±1.0 (mm).
6. Verify that the cradle has returned to the reference point (per step 3). See below.
Illustration 2–6 Cradle Movement

7. Move the cradle to the In limit position. Do the same check as above in the reverse direction.
2–7 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-3 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION

The following procedure adjusts the accuracy of the cradle absolute position control.
1. Preparation:
b. Set the Gantry to 0_ tilt position.
c. Set the Table height to more than –150 mm (on Gantry Display).
Adjustment at 5 mm
2. Set the cradle to the Out mechanical limit position.
Push the ‘Zero’ button.
Move the cradle in the In direction until the Gantry Display reads 5.0 (mm).
(If you can’t move the cradle with the switches, release the cradle and move it into position by hand)
Push the ‘Zero’ button.
3. Enter the TGP off–line function #000 (Cradle position display mode):
c. Verify that the Gantry Display panel displays the following:
Tilt 000
Position 11 (Cradle position; example only)
Position Display: 0.5 mm/digit

ex.) Display Position
0: Mechanical Out limit
100: 50 mm away from the Out limit
(the values are derived by A/D converting the position potentiometer output)
4. Adjust variable register P0 on the TGP Board so that the Gantry Display value equals 10.
5. Exit the TGP off–line function #000 by Setting the T6 Table dip switch to OFF on the TGP Board.
The Gantry Display will return to its normal status.
2–8 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-3 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION (continued)
Adjustment at 1525 mm
6. Move the cradle in the In direction until the Gantry Display reads 1520.0 (mm).
(If you can’t move the cradle with the switches, release the cradle and move it into position by hand)
7. Enter the TGP off–line function #000 by repeating step 3.
8. Adjust variable register PG on the TGP Board so that the Gantry Display value equals 3050.
(= 1525.0 mm = 1520.0 + 5.0)
9. Exit the TGP off–line function #000 by Setting the T6 Table dip switch to OFF on the TGP Board.
The Gantry Display will return to its normal status.
2–9 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-4 CRADLE MOTOR MAXIMUM TORQUE

The following procedure should be performed, if the cradle motor or cradle motor driver is replaced, to adjust the motor
torque within a safety range.
Special Equipment
D Spring Balance (Fish Scale): 20 kg maximum
1. Raise the Table to the upper limit position.
Move the cradle to the Out limit position.
2. Set the spring balance on the cradle end and cradle rail using wire. See Illustration 2–7.
3. Place a weight of approximately 20 kg at the front end of the cradle, or if such a thing is not available, ride on the
cradle, at location ‘A’, shown in Illustration 2–7.
This is to prevent the cradle roller from slipping which is equipped underneath the cradle at location ‘A’.
Illustration 2–7 Setting a Spring Balance

TABLE TOP VIEW

ÍÍÍ ÁÁ
ÍÍÍ ÁÁ
ÍÍÍ ÁÁ
ÁÁ

2–10 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-4 CRADLE MOTOR MAXIMUM TORQUE (continued)

4. Check the value of the maximum motor torque:
a. Set the cradle to the Out limit position.
b. Move the cradle in the IN direction for 1000 mm.
c. Enter the TGP off–line function #019 (Cradle drive mode at specified speeds):
i. Set the T6 Table dip switch (location : 3S) to ON on the TGP Board.
ii. Push the TGP reset button.
iii. Push the test switch for a number of times until the Gantry Display shows ’ ’.

(This is ‘Cradle drive mode at specified speeds’)
iv. Push simultaneously both In and Fast, or both Out and Fast buttons so that the Gantry Display shows
’ ’.
(This sets the cradle speed to 0.333 mm/sec)
d. Press the IN button to move the cradle in the In direction.

(do not press the In and Fast buttons simultaneously, or the speed will be changed)
While the cradle is moving in the In direction, the motor will automatically stop at some position of the cradle;
read the spring balance at this position.
Verify that this value (maximum motor torque) is 17 ~ 18 kg at around 1000 mm from the Out limit position.
Note
Wait for the motor driver to cool before performing another motor torque measurement.
If the value is within the 17 ~ 18 kg range, go to step 7; if not, go to step 5.
2–11 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

5. Prepare for accessing the motor driver:
For Table P9185AB/AF/AG

The motor driver is installed within the central U–frame column.
a. Switch OFF the power switch on the Operator Console
NOTICE
Fragile component. Be careful not to break or bend the cradle position potentiometer cable
attached to the cradle end handle.
b. Remove the four 6 mm allen head screws from the cradle end handle, and remove the cradle.
(For details, refer to the Component Replacement manual)
c. Move the cradle end handle carefully to the Table end of the Gantry side.
d. Remove the screws which hold the upper Table covers together at the outer end of the Table, farthest from the
Gantry, and spread the covers slightly apart.
e. Unscrew and remove the Table top cover (tray).
Illustration 2–8 Cradle Motor Drive

2–12 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
For Table 2129562/ 2129563/ 2129564

The motor driver is installed on the Table base. See Illustration 2–9.
a. Raise the Table to its highest position.
b. Switch OFF the power switch on the Operator Console
c. Remove the front and rear bottom covers of the Table.

(For details, refer to the Component Replacement manual)
Illustration 2–9 Cradle Motor Driver

2–13 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

6. Adjust the ‘RUN’ potentiometer of the motor driver:
a. Verify that both of the latch switches for the cradle are set to ‘Latch.’
b. Connect a multimeter between the ‘CP+’ and ‘CP–’ terminals of the driver. See Illustration 2–8 or 2–9.
c. While moving the cradle at slow speed, turn the ‘RUN’ potentiometer appropriately to increase or decrease
the voltage between ‘CP+’ and ‘CP–’.
This voltage determines the maximum motor torque; to increase torque, increase the voltage.
(The standard set voltage is 7.43 V when the cradle is not moving)
Note
Since the ‘STOP’ potentiometer is factory set, do not adjust it.
d. Perform step 4.
7. Exit the TGP off–line function #019 by setting the T6 Table dip switch (location : 3S) to OFF on the TGP Board.
8. Shuttle the cradle over the entire travel both at the slow and fast speed, without the spring balance, to verify that
movement is normal.
2–14 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 3 – TABLE ACCESSORIES
3-1 HOLDER FITTING
Purpose
This procedure checks whether the holders (head holder, coronal holder, etc.) properly fit on the cradle.
1. Verify that all the bracket bolts of the axial head holder are firmly installed; otherwise, tighten them. See Illustra-
tion 3–1.
Illustration 3–1 Head Holder Brackets

3–1 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-1 HOLDER FITTING (continued)

2. Set the axial head holder on the cradle.
3. Try to move the holder by hand, back and forth, and upward, to check that the holder firmly fits on the cradle.
If the holder is moved (not secured) or taken out from the cradle, proceed to the next step; otherwise, go to step 7.
4. Remove the holder from the cradle.
5. Turn the support screws (two) of the holder CW until the gap becomes almost zero (a slight gap should exist).
See Illustrations 3–1 and 3–2.
6. Return to step 2.
7. Perform the above checks/adjustments for the following holders.
Phantom Holder
Coronal Holder
Cradle Extender
Others (if the customer has other type holders, such are Low Profile Head Holder, etc.)
Illustration 3–2 Support Screw Adjustment
TO BE ADJUSTED PROPERLY ADJUSTED

GAP
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ
SUPPORT SCREW SUPPORT SCREW

3–2 TABLE
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
DAS/DETECTOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – DETECTOR RELATED DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 BIAS VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (QJ, QJ–BASE, ZJ) 1–1
1-2 TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2-1 Operation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2-2 Temperature Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
SECTION 2 – DAS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 DAS DATA TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 DAS OFFSET DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-3 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY TEST (NO X–RAYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
i DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
ii DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 1 – DETECTOR RELATED DEVICES
1-1 BIAS VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
CAUTION
The Detector Bias voltage is approximately 1000 VDC ! Do not touch conducting parts of the
voltage, so you do not receive a shock.
1. Wait approximately one minute after switching OFF the “Slip Ring 115V” switch for the bias
voltage to bleed off to a safe level.
2. Use a proper range on the digital volt meter.
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the Gantry right and left covers.
d. Rotate the Gantry by hand until the DAS/Detector reaches the 1 o’clock position. See Illustration 1–1.
Illustration 1–1 Bias Voltage Power Supply

2. Disconnect the cable from the BNC connector of the bias voltage power supply. See Illustration 1–2.
3. Connect the (–) lead of a digital volt meter to Ground.
Connect the (+) lead to the +1000 V point.
1–1 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-1 BIAS VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (continued) (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
Illustration 1–2 Measure Points

BNC CONNECTOR
+
- MEASURE POINTS
(GROUND)
BIAS VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY
4. Switch ON the ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switch.
5. Verify that the voltage is +1000 ±10 VDC.
6. Switch OFF the ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switch.
Wait approximately one minute for voltage to bleed off before reconnecting the BNC connector cable.
7. Connect the BNC connector cable to the bias voltage power supply.
1–2 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2 TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
1-2-1 Operation Check

Ensure that the DAS/Detector has been powered ON for at least two hours prior to performing the following proce-
dure.
1. Preparation:
d. Rotate the Gantry by hand until the X–ray tube reaches the 11 o’clock position.
2. Remove the TEMP CONT box cover. See Illustration 1–3.
3. Set a clamp–on meter at near the TEMP CONT box to measure the AC current supplied to the transformer of
the TEMP CONT box.
4. Monitor the ‘D3’ LED on the TEMP CONT Board. See Illustration 1–4.
Verify that the current increases by approximately 1 A when the ‘D3’ LED lights ON.
(This indicates that the Detector heater is turned ON)
Verify that the ‘D3’ LED cycles ON and OFF.
Illustration 1–3 Temperature Control Box

1–3 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2-1 Operation Check (continued)
Illustration 1–4 TEMP CONT Board

1–4 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2-2 Temperature Adjustment

This adjustment is required when either a Detector or a TEMP CONT box is replaced.
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
d. Rotate the Gantry by hand until the X–ray tube reaches the 11 o’clock position.
2. Remove the TEMP CONT box cover. See Illustration 1–3.
3. Remove jumper J2 on the TEMP CONT Board.
Disconnect CN3 on the TEMP CONT Board. See Illustrations 1–3 and 1–4.
4. Read the thermistor resistance value written on a tag. See Illustration 1–4. (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
5. Read the thermistor resistance value which is written on a paper sheet attached on the Detector surface near
the TEMP CONT box. (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
6. Connect a digital meter between TP1 and TP2 (resistance measurement mode).
7. Adjust RV1 until the resistance between TP1 and TP2 matches the resistance read at step 4.
8. Install jumper J2 on the TEMP CONT Board.
Connect CN3.
1–5 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
1–6 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 2 – DAS OPERATION
2-1 DAS DATA TRANSFER

1. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive. (This step is not required for systems installed in Japan)
3. Enter $$, as follows;
1. CALIBRATION
.
.
4. Select SUPPORT from the Maintenance menu.
5. Select DAS DATA TRANSFER TEST from the Support menu.
6. Edit the test mode as follows;
TEST : BIT BY BIT BY TEST

GANTRY : ROTATE
SCAN TIME : 2.0 sec
NO. OF SCAN : 1
NO. OF TEST : 1
7. Execute the test.
Verify that a ‘PASS 1’ indication is displayed.
2–1 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-2 DAS OFFSET DATA
Precondition

(Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)

1. Perform an axial scan with no x–rays (i.e., acquire a raw data file consisting of offset data):

1. CALIBRATION

f. Perform the following scan:
AXIAL SCAN
SCAN TIME : 1.0 or 2.0 sec (if 1.0 sec is available, select 1.0 sec)
XG, ROTOR : ROTOR ON
SERIES NO. : 1
(Others) : (defaults)
2. Verify that MEAN MAX & MIN data are within specifications without applying Offset File Correction on the ac-
quired raw data (offset data):
b. Enter 1 for the raw data file ID No.
OFFSET FILE CORRECTION : (No)
2–2 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-2 DAS OFFSET DATA (continued)

e. Verify that MEAN MAX & MIN data are within specifications as described below:
(Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
** START
MAX MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
MIN MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
MEAN MAX xxxxxxx ≤ 1000
MIN xxxxxxx ≥ 100
AVE xxxxxxx
S.D. MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
** START
MAX MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
MIN MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
MEAN MAX xxxxxxx ≤ 6000
MIN xxxxxxx ≥ 3000
AVE xxxxxxx
S.D. MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
f. Press the [END] key.
2–3 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-2 DAS OFFSET DATA (continued)

3. Verify that S.D. MAX & MIN data are within specifications, by performing Offset File Correction on the acquired
raw data (offset data):
e. Verify that MEAN MAX & MIN and S.D. MAX & MIN data are within specifications as described below:
(Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
** START
MAX MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
MIN MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
MEAN MAX xxxxxxx ≤ 0.7
MIN xxxxxxx ≥ –0.7
AVE xxxxxxx
S.D. MAX xxxxxxx ≤ 3.5
MIN xxxxxx x ≥ –3.5
AVE xxxxxxx
** START
MAX MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
MIN MAX xxxxxxx

MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
MEAN MAX xxxxxxx ≤ 1.0
AVE xxxxxxx
S.D. MAX xxxxxxx ≤ 2.0
AVE xxxxxxx
2–4 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-3 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY TEST (NO X–RAYS)
Precondition
Ensure that the DAS/Detector has been powered ON for at least two hours prior to performing the following proce-
dure.
1. Perform six DAS TEST scans:

1. CALIBRATION

f. Perform the following scan:
STATIONARY SCAN
SCAN TIME : 2.0 sec
XG, ROTOR : BOTH OFF
NO OF SCAN : 2
DAS TEST : LOW X 64
SERIES NO. : 1
(Two scans are performed, the data of the first scan will not be used, since the second data is considered to be
more stabilized)
g. Repeat the above scans with the following parameters (the other parameters are the same).
DAS TEST SERIES NO.

2

3

4

5

6
2–5 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-3 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY TEST (NO X–RAYS) (continued)

2. Obtain mean files from the acquired raw data:
Obtain the following mean files 1 through 6, by repeating the steps below.
DAS TEST RAW DATA FILE ID NO. MEAN FILE NO.

1
2
3
4

5

6
b. Enter 1.2 (2.2 ∼ 6.2) for the raw data file ID No.
g. Enter 1 (2 ∼ 6) as the MEAN FILE No.
2–6 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

3. Apply a division to the mean files:
Obtain the following mean files NO. 7, 8, and 9, by repeating the steps below.
MEAN FILE DIVISION MEAN FILE NO. MEAN FILE NO.

FOR DIVISION FOR CAL. RESULT
FILE 1 FILE 2
7

8
9
c. Enter 1 (3, 5) for FILE1.
Enter 2 (4, 6) for FILE2.
e. Enter 7 (8, 9) as the MEAN FILE No.
2–7 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009

4. Check the calculated mean files using SUPPORT DISPLAY:

Enter 0 for MIN.
Enter 1000 for MAX.

Enter 7 for DATA. (The mean file No. 7 is located on the seventh line)

Enter 1.001 for DATA MAX. (Change this, if necessary)
A graph is drawn, as is shown in Illustration 2–1, the left one.
Verify that the graph is in the following range:

0.9995 < < 1.0005
f. To show a graph for Ch. 400 ∼, perform the steps below.

Enter 1 for DATA.

Enter 7 for DATA.
iii. Repeat step d.
g. Perform the same check as above for the mean files No. 8 and No. 9. (At steps c and f–ii, enter 8 or 9)
2–8 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Illustration 2–1 Linearity

∼ ∼
2–9 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
2–10 DAS/DETECTOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 4 2205009
X–RAY GENERATOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – X–RAY TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 DAS COUNT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 TUBE CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-3 HEAT SOAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1-4 HOUSING SCREW TIGHTENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
SECTION 2 – KV AND MA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 KV & MA CHECK WITH GANTRY DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-3 MA CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
SECTION 3 – PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 DC OUTPUT VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
SECTION 4 – POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4-1 +5 V POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
i X–RAY GENERATOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
ii X–RAY GENERATOR
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 1 – X–RAY TUBE
1-1 DAS COUNT CHECK

This check verifies that the x–ray tube dose falls within specifications by checking DAS Counts.
This check should be performed when the x–ray tube is replaced.
1. Perform an axial scan:

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
Select SUPPORT from the Maintenance menu.
d. Select OFF LINE SCAN from the Support menu.
e. Perform the following air scan:
AXIAL SCAN
SCAN TIME : 3.0 sec
THICKNESS : 10 mm
FOCUS : LARGE
KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA
SERIES NO. : 1
Bow–tie filter: Installed
1–1 X–RAY GENERATOR

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-1 DAS COUNT CHECK (continued)

2. Verify that MEAN MAX data is within specifications:
d. Select as follows:
e. Verify that MEAN MAX data are within specifications as described below:
(Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
** START
MAX MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
MIN MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
MEAN MAX xxxxxxx ← ≤ ≤ (specifications)

MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
S.D. MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
** START
MAX MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
MIN MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
MEAN MAX xxxxxxx ← ≤ ≤ (specifications)

MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx
S.D. MAX xxxxxxx
MIN xxxxxxx
AVE xxxxxxx

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2 TUBE CALIBRATION

In this ‘Tube Calibration’, the generator performs x–ray exposures and calculates appropriate filament current magni-
tudes (preset filament currents) for each KV–MA station. In normal scans, the generator sets a filament current to
this preset value at the start of exposure.
1. Set the 42 cm Polypropylene Phantom to the phantom holder.
Move the cradle to a position just over the Detector window.

(This is to protect the Detector by reducing x–ray dose to it during the calibration procedure)
2. Enter the GENERATOR/TUBE menu of the SUPPORT:

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
e. Select GENERATOR/TUBE from the Support menu.
f. Select TUBE CAL.
The following menu appears:
** TUBE CALIBRATION **
1. CHANGE PARAMETER
2. RESET PARAMETER
Select No.=_

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2 TUBE CALIBRATION (continued)

3. Select CHANGE PARAMETER.
The following screen appears:
** CHANGE PARAMETER **
<SELECT SCAN KV, MA, FOCUS>
80 kV 120 kV 140 kV
1: 60 mA 7: 60 mA 12: 60 mA
LARGE 2: 160 mA 8: 160 mA
3: 350 mA
4: 60 mA – – – – – –
SMALL 5: 130 mA
6: 250 mA
< x >
< x–y >
< x, y, z >
< kV >
< L > or < S >
Select No. <Enter to All>=_
(Depending on systems, 20 mA also is shown or is shown instead of 60 mA, for Large Focus)
4. Select KV–MA stations that you want to calibrate either way of the following:
D Enter a number (1, 2, ... ) to select a KV–MA station. ( < x > )
D Enter a number range. For example, entering 2–4 selects KV–MA stations of (2: 80 kV–160 mA), (3: 80
kV–350 mA) and (4: 80 kV–60 mA) ( < x–y > )
D Enter three numbers to select three KV–MA stations. ( < x, y, z > )
D Enter a KV (80, 120, or 140) to select all the MA stations for the selected KV. ( < kV > )
D Select Large Focus or Small Focus to select all the KV–MA station for the selected focus.
( < L > or < S > )
D If all the stations have to be calibrated, press the [Enter] key.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2 TUBE CALIBRATION (continued)

5. Perform the scans you selected.
Verify that the following message appears when all the calibrations you selected are completed.
** CHANGE PARAMETER **
PARAMETER STORE IN PROGRESS
6. Press the [END] key to exit CHANGE PARAMETER.
The previously shown menu appears:
** TUBE CALIBRATION **
1. CHANGE PARAMETER
2. RESET PARAMETER
Select No.=_
If you want to revert the calibration data to the original data which is stored in ROM, select RESET PARAMETER.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-3 HEAT SOAK

The Heat Soak procedure should be performed when the x–ray tube is replaced, after performing the ‘Tube
Calibration’ procedure.
Prerequisites for Heat Soak Procedure

D The x–ray tube should be sufficiently cool; Anode/Case Heat should be at 0%.
1. Prepare the heat soak protocol:
The protocol shown in Table 1–1 is used for the heat soak procedure.
Enter all the parameters either to a scan screen, or (register) to Preset Scan Parameters. If you register the
parameters to Preset Scan Parameters, you can use it later without having to enter all the parameters one by
one.
To display the registration screen, push the following buttons in the order written:
[Preset Prmtr] → SCAN PARAMETER → I–EXTR → MULTI/DYNAMIC Menu No. 20
(If No. 20 is already used by the customer, use an other No.)
(Zj–Adv, Zj)
[Maint] → SCAN PRESET PARAMETER → AuxB → Infant → Para. Set → Multi Scan → SGL/MLT Menu. No.
10
(If No. 10 is already used by the customer, use an other No.)
2. Set the 42 cm Polypropylene Phantom to the phantom holder.
Move the cradle to a position just over the Detector window.

(This is to protect the Detector during the heat soak procedure by reducing x–ray dose to it)
3. Verify that ‘Anode’ and ‘Case’ heat indicators on the screen are at 0%.
4. Perform the scan sequence, as prepared in step 1.
It will take approximately six minutes to complete the scan sequence.
To terminate the scan sequence before completion while scanning, press the <Abort> key.
If the system detects XG Fail or other error condition, this procedure will be terminated.
To retry the heat soak procedure, wait until the Anode/Case Heat falls to 0%.
Note
Do not perform a warm–up or scans for at least ten minutes after completing this heat soak proce-
dure.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-3 HEAT SOAK (continued)
Table 1–1 Scan Parameters for Heat Soak
Menu No. Slice Count Scan FOV
10, 20, or any (not used by user) 47 50
AQ LocaĆ Tilt TIME kV mA ThickĆ Interval DELAY Voice- Voice- WW WL

tion ness S E
01 0.0 * 3.0 80 60 10 0.0 6.0 0 0 200 0
02 0.0 * 3.0 80 60 10 0.0 6.0 0 0 200 0
03 0.0 * 3.0 80 60 10 0.0 6.0 0 0 200 0
04 0.0 * 3.0 80 60 10 0.0 6.0 0 0 200 0
05 0.0 * 3.0 80 60 10 0.0 6.0 0 0 200 0
06 0.0 * 3.0 80 300 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
07 0.0 * 3.0 80 300 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
08 0.0 * 3.0 80 300 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
09 0.0 * 3.0 80 300 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
10 0.0 * 3.0 80 300 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
11 0.0 * 3.0 80 300 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
12 0.0 * 3.0 80 300 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
13 0.0 * 3.0 80 300 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
14 0.0 * 3.0 80 300 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
15 0.0 * 3.0 80 300 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
(continued)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-3 HEAT SOAK (continued)
Table 1–1 Scan Parameters for Heat Soak (continued)
AQ LocaĆ Tilt TIME kV mA ThickĆ Interval DELAY Voice- Voice- WW WL

tion ness S E
16 0.0 * 3.0 120 250 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
17 0.0 * 3.0 120 250 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
18 0.0 * 3.0 120 250 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
19 0.0 * 3.0 120 250 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
20 0.0 * 3.0 120 250 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
21 0.0 * 3.0 120 200 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
22 0.0 * 3.0 120 200 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
23 0.0 * 3.0 120 200 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
24 0.0 * 3.0 120 200 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
25 0.0 * 3.0 120 200 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
26 0.0 * 3.0 120 200 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
27 0.0 * 3.0 120 200 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
28 0.0 * 3.0 120 200 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
29 0.0 * 3.0 120 200 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
30 0.0 * 3.0 120 200 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
31 0.0 * 3.0 120 160 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
32 0.0 * 3.0 120 160 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
33 0.0 * 3.0 120 160 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
34 0.0 * 3.0 120 160 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
35 0.0 * 3.0 120 160 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
36 0.0 * 3.0 120 160 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
37 0.0 * 3.0 120 160 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
38 0.0 * 3.0 120 160 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
39 0.0 * 3.0 120 160 10 0.0 3.0 0 0 200 0
40 0.0 * 3.0 120 130 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
41 0.0 * 3.0 120 130 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
42 0.0 * 3.0 120 130 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
43 0.0 * 3.0 120 130 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
44 0.0 * 3.0 120 130 10 0.0 30.0 0 0 200 0
45 0.0 * 1.5 140 60 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
46 0.0 * 1.5 140 60 10 0.0 1.5 0 0 200 0
47 0.0 * 1.5 140 60 10 0.0 * 0 0 200 0

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-4 HOUSING SCREW TIGHTENING

During periodic maintenance perform the following procedure for ST1600CT model tubes (ISSY) only.
(Not required for MX165Zj model tubes (EA); to know a tube model, read a label attached on the tube)
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG (Safety Loop)’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
c. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board.
d. Rotate the Gantry to the 90 deg. position.
e. Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board.
2. Tighten the screws which fasten the x–ray tube housing together. See Illustration 1–1.
The total number of screws is 16 (4 of which also fix the heat exchanger brackets to the housing).
Use the dedicated hexagonal wrench (P9180GW) provided with the system.
The torque specification is 35 kg–cm.
Illustration 1–1 Housing Screws
X-RAY TUBE
8 SCREWS 8 SCREWS
(AROUND THE (AROUND THE
CIRCUMFERENCE) CIRCUMFERENCE)
PUMP
HEAT EXCHANGER

CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 2 – KV AND MA
2-1 KV & MA CHECK WITH GANTRY DISPLAY

1. Preparation:
a. Remove the Gantry left cover.
b. Set the 42 cm Polypropylene Phantom to the phantom holder.
c. Move the cradle to position the phantom at the Detector window.

(This is to protect the Detector by reducing x–ray dose to it during the check procedure)
d. Perform Warm–up scans, if the x–ray tube is cold.
e. Wait five minutes or more following the last scan prior to proceeding to the next step.
2. Set the M5 Management dip switch to ON on the TGP Board.

(KV & MA display mode on Gantry Display)
3. Perform scans of KV – MA stations specified in Table 2–1.
Select 1 mm or any THICKNESS to allow the specified stations.
Verify that the KV and MA values displayed on the Gantry Display is within the following specifications:
KV: ±5 kV
MA: ±20 mA
(KV and MA values are displayed in real–time during an exposure, and ‘0’ is displayed after the exposure is fin-
ished)
4. Set the M5 Management dip switch to OFF on the TGP Board.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-1 KV & MA CHECK WITH GANTRY DISPLAY (continued)
Table 2–1 KV–MA Stations

(ProSpeed S)
TIME FOCUS KV MA
2 SEC LARGE 80 60 100 160 250
120 60 130 200
140 60 100 160
SMALL 80 60 130 160 250
120 60 130 200
140 60 100 160
(ProSpeed SX, ProSpeed S Fast, ProSpeed, Lemage, Lemage SX/E, ProSpeed VX)
TIME FOCUS KV MA
2 SEC LARGE 80 60 100 160 250 350
120 60 100 160 250
140 60 130 200
SMALL 80 60 130 160 250
120 60 130 200
140 60 100 160

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-1 KV & MA CHECK WITH GANTRY DISPLAY (continued)
Table 2–1 KV–MA Stations (continued)

(Lemage SX, Lemage Supreme, ProSeed Accell, ProSeed Accell EI)
TIME FOCUS KV MA
2 SEC LARGE 80 60 100 160 250 350
120 60 130 200 300
140 60 100 160 250
SMALL 80 60 130 160 250 250
120 60 130 200
140 60 100 160
(ProSpeed SX Power, ProSpeed SX Advantage, ProSpeed Advantage, ProSeed SA,

ProSeed SA Libra, ProSpeed, ProSpeed Plus, ProSeed, ProSeed EF)
TIME FOCUS KV MA
1.5 SEC LARGE 80 60 100 160 250 350
120 60 100 160 250 350
140 60 130 200 300
SMALL 80 60 130 160 250 250
120 60 130 200
140 60 100 160

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER

1. Preparation:
a. Perform Warm–up scans, if the x–ray tube is cold.
c. Remove the front , rear, and both side covers of the Gantry.
d. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
e. Rotate the Gantry to the home position (x–ray tube at the 12 o’clock position).
f. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG (Safety Loop)’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

Electric shock! Use a ground bar to discharge the high voltage connector any time you dis-
connect it.
2. Connect an HV divider between the x–ray tube and the HV tank:
Connecting HV Cables to HV Tanks

a. Remove the HV cable connectors from the cathode and anode HV tanks.
b. Connect the HV divider cables, which are provided with the system, to the cathode and anode tanks.
(Before connecting the cables, wipe clean the HV connectors, and lubricate them with silicon oil)
Connecting HV Divider to X–ray Tube

c. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board.
Rotate the Gantry by hand in the clockwise direction until the x–ray is positioned at the 3 o’clock
position.
Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board.
d. Remove the HV cable connectors from the x–ray tube. (Both anode and cathode connectors)
e. Connect the HV divider cables whose other ends are connected to the HV divider to the x–ray tube.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER (continued)
Placing HV Divider on Floor

f. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board.
g. Rotate the Gantry by hand in the clockwise direction approximately to the 5 o’clock position.
h. Place the HV divider on the floor without straining the HV cables.
i. Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board.
Connecting HV Cables to HV Divider

j. Connect the HV divider cables which were connected to the tanks at step b to the HV divider. See Illustrations
2–1 and 2–2.
Illustration 2–1 HV Tank Position
CATHODE HV
TANK WITH
INVERTOR
ANODE HV
TANK WITH
INVERTOR
GANTRY FRONT VIEW
Illustration 2–2 HV Divider Connection
TO ANODE TO TUBE
HV TANK ANODE
TO CATHODE TO TUBE
HV TANK CATHODE

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER (continued)
KV Read
3. Connect a digital multimeter to the output terminals of the HV divider.
(The multimeter should be in the DC voltage measurement mode)
Place the multimeter so that it can be read from the Operator’s room.
NOTICE
Do not switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
4. Perform x–ray exposures and read the KV values:
a. Switch ON the ‘Slip Ring 115V’ and ‘XG (Safety Loop)’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Perform scans described in Table below.
Verify that the KV readings are within the specifications.
Table 2–2 KV Check Scans
KV MA KV SPECIFICATION
80 250 74.4 ≤ ≤ 85.6
120 200 111.6 ≤ ≤ 128.4
140 160 130.2 ≤ ≤ 149.8
Stationary Scan (Present Degree)
Scan Time: 3.0 sec
Thickness: 1 mm
Focus: Large

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-3 MA CHECK
1. Preparation:
a. Perform Warm–up scans, if the x–ray tube is cold.
b. Wait five minutes or more following the last scan prior to proceeding to the next step.
c. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG (Safety Loop)’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
d. Remove the front and both side covers of the Gantry.
e. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board.
f. Rotate the Gantry by hand in the clockwise direction until the x–ray is positioned at the 2 o’clock position.
g. Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board.
Load Resister Check

2. Connect a digital multimeter to TP5 and TP18 (Ground) of the Burden Resister Board (see Illustration 2–3)
equipped on the anode HV tank.
Illustration 2–3 Burden Resistor Board
BURDEN
RESISTOR
BOARD
INVERTOR ANODE HV TANK
3. Set the multimeter to the register measurement mode.
Read the value; it should be 10.0 ohms.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
2-3 MA CHECK (continued)
MA Check
4. Set the multimeter to the DC voltage measurement mode (mV).
Place the multimeter so that it can be read from the Operator’s room.
NOTICE
Do not switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
5. Perform x–ray exposures and read the voltage values:
a. Switch ON the ‘Slip Ring 115V’ and ‘XG (Safety Loop)’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Perform scans described in Table below.
Verify that the MA measurements ([measured voltage (mV)]/[10 (ohms)]) are within the specifications.
Table 2–3 MA Check Scans
KV MA MA SPECIFICATION
80 250 237.5 ≤ ≤ 262.5
120 200 190.0 ≤ ≤ 210.0
140 160 152.0 ≤ ≤ 168.0
Stationary Scan (Present Degree)
Scan Time: 3.0 sec
Thickness: 1 mm
Focus: Large

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 3 – PDU
3-1 DC OUTPUT VOLTAGE

The following procedure checks the DC high voltage (550 ∼ 750 VDC) of the PDU whose part number is 2121798.
1. Switch OFF the power for the PDU at the Power Distribution Board.
2. Remove the top and front covers of the PDU. See Illustration 3–1.
Illustration 3–1 PDU Cover Removal
GROUND
REMOVE FOUR(4) CABLE
HOIST RINGS.
REMOVE THE
ÅÅÅÅÅ TOP COVER. ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
: FRAME GROUND POINT
: FRAME GROUND POINT

GROUND ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅ
CABLE
REMOVE THE
FRONT COVER.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-1 DC OUTPUT VOLTAGE (continued)

3. Set the SW2 to TEST on the PANEL COMMON Board. See Illustration 3–2.
(SW1 should be set to MODE 700V)
4. Switch ON the power for the PDU at the Power Distribution Board.
5. Verify that the relays K1, K31, K32, K48 are all OFF.
6. Connect a digital volt meter to the test terminals (Range: 1000 VDC).
(For PDUs which are equipped with test terminals instead of a volt meter only)
WARNING!
ELECTROCUTION ! 550 VDC ∼ 750 VDC IS GENERATED FROM THE PDU AND APPLIED TO
THE GANTRY SLIP RINGS. KEEP AWAY FROM THE CONDUCTING PARTS.
7. Press the BP TEST button, and keep pressing it;
Verify that approximately five sec later, relays K48 and K1 are turned ON.
Read the voltage on the volt meter of the PDU or the digital volt meter, and verify that it is within 550 ∼ 750 V.
8. Release the BP TEST button.
9. Set the SW2 to NORMAL on the PANEL COMMON Board.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-1 DC OUTPUT VOLTAGE (continued)
Illustration 3–2 PDU Boards
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
BP TEST
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
BUTTON
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
RELAY K48
RELAY K1
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ

SW2
OR
TEST
VOLT METER
TERMINALS

CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 4 2205009
SECTION 4 – POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT
4-1 +5 V POWER SUPPLY

1. Adjust the voltage to +5 ±0.05 V (+4.95 ∼ +5.05 V). Refer to Illustration 4–1.
Illustration 4–1 +5 V Power Supply
5 V Power Supply
GND +5 V
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Filament Board
Electric Rack

CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
DC III
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – DC III (ZJ) 1–1

1-1 DC POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 OPERATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-3 DCCM2 JUMPER AND SWITCH SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
i DC III
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
ii DC III
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 1 – DC III (Zj)
1-1 DC POWER SUPPLY

The DC III Console contains one power supply: +5 V.
1. Switch OFF the DC III.
2. Remove the DC III rear cover.
3. Check the output of the +5 VDC power supply, as follows;
a. Connect a digital multimeter to the output terminals of the power supply. See Illustration 1–1.
b. Switch On the DC III.
If it falls outside these limits, adjust it by turning the potentiometer.
d. Connect an oscilloscope to the same points.
Illustration 1–1 DC III +5 VDC Power Supply

1–1 DC III
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-2 OPERATION CHECK
Cyclic Communication Check between OCCM2 and DCCM2

1. Switch ON the OC power switch.
2. Switch ON the DC III power switch.
3. Verify that the ‘OC READY’ on the DC III panel lights ON.
4. Verify that the following lamps light OFF on the DC III panel.

Operator Console Check

5. Check that normal scans can be performed on the OC.
6. Verity that all kinds of diagnostic keys can be operated properly.
DC III Check
7. Verity that the same kinds of diagnostic operation as on the OC can be performed on the DC III.
Slave Mode Function

8. Push the [SLAVE] button on the DC III panel.
Verity that the [SLAVE] button lights ON and the same screen as on the OC is displayed on the DC III.
This is called ‘Slave Mode.’
9. Press any key on the DC III keyboard.
Verity that the [SLAVE] button lights OFF.
10. Disconnect the cable between OCCM2 and DCCM2.
Verity that the DC III changes into Slave Mode.
1–2 DC III
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
1-3 DCCM2 JUMPER AND SWITCH SETTING

D 3C1 Dip Switch – Not used. Set as illustrated below.
ON B-4A
1 2 3 4
D Jumper – Set as illustrated below.
RD SD
SD RD
CTS RTS
DSR
DCD
RTS CTS
DTR DSR
N.C. DCD
D 5A1 Toggle Switch – MFC Connection (CN1)
1 : Not Connected
3 : MFC is connected to CN1
3 1
DC MFC
D 10D1 Toggle Switch – MFC Connection (CN3)
1 : Not Connected
3 : MFC is connected to CN3
3 1
DC MFC
1–3 DC III
CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
1–4 DC III
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – OPERATOR CONSOLE

(QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV) 1–1
1-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 CIRCUIT BOARDS IN NEST CHASSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-2-1 CPW Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-2-2 IPU2 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
1-2-3 DISP (OR DISP2) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
1-2-4 SBPU Board (Qj, Lemage SX/E) 1–17
1-2-5 IPA Board (Qj–Base except Lemage SX/E, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv) 1–18
1-2-6 TPC Board (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt) 1–20
1-2-7 MISC2 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–22
1-2-8 ISC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
1-2-9 SCSI Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
1-2-10 PDC Board (Zj–Adv) 1–29
1-2-11 STL Board (Zj–Adv) 1–30
1-2-12 MISCE Board (Zj–Adv) 1–30
1-2-13 ODC2 Board (Option) (Zj–Adv) 1–31
1-2-14 MTC Board (Option) (Zj–Adv) 1–35
1-2-15 COMX3 Board (Option) (Zj–Adv) 1–37
1-2-16 NEMA3 Board (Option) (Zj–Adv) 1–40
1-2-17 ETC Board (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44
1-3 OTHER CIRCUIT BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47
1-3-1 TPC SUB Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47
1-3-2 SV AMP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–49
1-3-3 AUDIO2 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–50
1-3-4 DAS IF Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–53
1-4 SBB ASSY (BACKBOARD) (QJ) 1–54
1-5 QJBB ASSY (BACKBOARD) (QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT) 1–55
1-6 ADVBB ASSY (BACKBOARD) (ZJ–ADV) 1–56
1-7 HARD DISK DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–57
1-7-1 HDD U0048ZA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–57
1-7-2 HDD 2143341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–58
1-7-3 HDD 2307327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–60
1-8 FLOPPY DISK DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–61
1-8-1 FDD U0012ZA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–61
1-8-2 FDD 2191376 or 2349231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–62
1-9 MAGNETIC OPTICAL DISK DRIVE (QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT) 1–63
1-9-1 MOD Drive 2168470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–63
1-9-2 MOD Drive U0050ZA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–65
i SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 2 – OPERATOR CONSOLE (ZJ) 2–1

2-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 CIRCUIT BOARDS (SLOT #00 ∼ 06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-2-1 MV AMP II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-2-2 MFC CTL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-3 CIRCUIT BOARDS (SLOT #11 ∼ 18; FOR OPTIONAL DC III) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-3-1 OCCM4 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-3-2 OVL2 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2-3-3 IFB2 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2-3-4 FCP2A +FCP22 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
2-3-5 FCP1 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2-3-6 FCP3B (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2-3-7 FMD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2-4 CIRCUIT BOARDS (SLOT #20 ∼ 44) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2-4-1 ETC (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2-4-2 COMX3 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
2-4-3 DMP2 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
2-4-4 MTC (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
2-4-5 ODC2 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28
2-4-6 SCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
2-4-7 MRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–35
2-4-8 FMP2 (ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell, ProSeed) 2–37
2-4-9 FMP3 (ProSpeed Plus, Accell EI, ProSeed EF) 2–39
2-4-10 FMP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–41
2-4-11 DMP4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43
2-4-12 ISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–47
2-4-13 OVL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48
2-4-14 IFB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48
2-4-15 BPU2 (ProSpeed Plus, ProSeed EF) 2–49
2-4-16 FCP2A + FCP22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50
2-4-17 FCP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50
2-4-18 FCP3B (ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell, ProSeed) 2–51
2-4-19 FCP4 (ProSpeed Plus, Accell EI, ProSeed EF) 2–52
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53
2-4-20 FMD (ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell, ProSeed) 2–54
2-4-21 FPA +FPAM (ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell, ProSeed) 2–55
2-4-22 FPA2 (ProSpeed Plus, Accell EI, ProSeed EF) 2–56
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–56
2-4-23 DBM +M32W (or M64W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–57
2-4-24 BPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–59
2-4-25 PDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–60
2-4-26 OC INTF3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61
2-5 BACKBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–64
2-6 HARD DISK DRIVE (PROSPEED VX, PROSPEED, ACCELL, PROSEED) 2–66
2-7 HARD DISK DRIVE (PROSPEED PLUS, ACCELL EI, PROSEED EF) 2–68
2-7-1 HDD U0048ZA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–68
2-7-2 HDD 2143341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70
ii SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 3 – GANTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 TGP BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-1 Dip Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-2 Service Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3-2 SERVO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3-3 SWITCHES AT GANTRY REAR BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3-4 OGP BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-5 DTRE BOARD (QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV) 3–9
3-6 GANTRY COVER SAFETY BRACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
SECTION 4 – DAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4-1 ADC BOARD (QJ, QJ–BASE, ZJ) 4–1
4-2 CIF BOARD (QJ, QJ–BASE, ZJ) 4–2
4-3 CIF BOARD (QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV) 4–3
4-4 OFFSET COMP. BOARD (QJ, QJ–BASE, ZJ) 4–4
4-5 DTRE BOARD (QJ, ZJ) 4–5
4-6 DTR2 BOARD (QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT) 4–6
SECTION 5 – X–RAY GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5-1 MOTHER BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-2 CPU BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-2-1 Old Type CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-2-2 New Type CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5-3 ROTOR BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5-3-1 Part No.: 2100826 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5-3-2 Part No.: 2121852 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5-4 KV BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5-5 CTVRC BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
SECTION 6 – PDU (POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

6-1 DCRGS – CONTROL BOARD (TOP BOARD) (PDU: P9180AB/AF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-2 DCRGS – ENERPO CONTROL BOARD (SECOND BOARD) (PDU: P9180AB/AF) 6–2
6-3 PANEL COMMON PDU BOARD (PDU: 2121798) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
iii SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING

CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009
iv SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
SECTION 1 – OPERATOR CONSOLE

(Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
1-1 GENERAL
NOTICE
Cut power before removing or inserting any of the boards or plugs.
NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge. It is essential to link yourself to ground potential by wearing an anti–

static wrist strap. No board should ever be accessed without this precaution.
Graphic Conventions
Illustration 1–1 Jumper Setting Example
JUMPER
JUMPER PIN
SOCKET
D `01B2' indicates jumper or
switch location on a board.
01B2 D Left illustration indicates that a
jumper socket links pins 1 and 2.
1 2 3
Component Locations
The following illustration shows the locations of some components within the Operator Console, and slot # for the nest
chassis circuit boards.
1–1 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
Illustration 1–2 OC Component Locations

(Qj)
+12 VDC POWER +5 VDC POWER

SUPPLY SUPPLY
HARD DISK
DRIVE
INTER-
FACE NEST
PANEL
IF
SV AMP SLOT #01 – 09
AUDIO2
DAS
IF
SLOT NO. BOARD NAME

1 CPW
2 IPU2
3 DISP
4 SBPU
5 TPC
6 MISC2
7 ISC
8 SCSI
9 AUX2

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
Illustration 1–2 OC Component Locations (continued)

(Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
+12 VDC POWER +5 VDC POWER

SUPPLY SUPPLY
HARD DISK
DRIVE
INTER-
FACE NEST
PANEL
IF2
SV AMP
SLOT #01 – 10
AUDIO2
DAS
IF
SLOT NO. BOARD NAME

1 CPW
2 IPU2
3 DISP2
4 (Note 1) IPA
5 (Note 2) IPA
6 TPC
7 MISC2
8 ISC
9 SCSI
10 AUX2
Note 1 This IPA is optional. For Lemage SX/E, this slot is not used.
Note 2 For Lemage SX/E, SBPU is used instead of IPA.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
Illustration 1–2 OC Component Locations (continued)

(Zj–Adv)
+5 VDC
POWER
PS ADP SUPPLY
ASSY FD ADP
MOD ASSY FDD
HARD +24 VDC

DISK POWER
DRIVES SUPPLY
+12 VDC
POWER
SUPPLY
SV AMP
SLOT #20 - 37
DAS
IF
AUDIO2
INTER-
FACE NEST
SLOT NO. BOARD NAME SLOT NO. BOARD NAME

34 CPW 37 PDC
32 IPU2 36 STL
31 DISP2 26 MISCE
30 IPA 23 ODC2 (option)
29 IPA 22 MTC (option)
27 MISC2 21 COMX3/NEMA3 (option)
25 ISC 20 ETC (option)
24 SCSI - -

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2 CIRCUIT BOARDS IN NEST CHASSIS
1-2-1 CPW Board
Illustration 1–3 CPW
DIP SW 5A1
5A1
JUMPERS
CN3
8A1 DIP SW 8A1 8J1
8D1
DIP SW 10A1
LE DIP SW 12A1
D
JUMPERS
CN4
FUSE 72111
19J1
PUSH
SW
JUMPERS
CN5
30C1
30D1
BAT-
TERY

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-1 CPW Board (continued)
Switch Settings
D 5A1 – Not used.
ON B-8A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Set to all `0'.
D 8A1 – Test Mode Select – Normally set as illustrated below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF: ‘0’
OFF
BP8L
0 0: 9600 bps 8 bit non parity, stop bit 1

RS232C SETTING 0 1: 1200 bps 8 bit non parity, stop bit 1
Not used. Set to ‘0’.
1XX : SKIP TEST

HARDWARE TEST SE-
01X : OFF LINE TEST
LECT
001 : POWER ON TEST 2
000 : POWER ON TEST 1 (X: any of `0' or `1')

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009

D 10A1 – Boot Mode Select – Normally set as illustrated below.
1 2 3 4 OFF: ‘0’
OFF
DNP4
XXX0 : Boot from

HD00
0001 : YMON
0101 : Boot from
FD00
1X01 : Boot form
FD01
D 12A1 – HDD Number Setting – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON B-4A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
0XXX : One
HDD
1XXX : Two
HDDs
Jumper Settings
D 30D1 – Battery Back–up for SRAM on CPW Board – Normally set as illustrated below.
VCC : SRAM is not backed up by battery

STBY : SRAM is backed up by battery

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009

D 30C1 – Power ON Reset Enable/Disable – Normally set as illustrated below.
PON RST
T N
N : Enable
T : Disable
D 8D1 – Bus Time Out – Normally set as illustrated below.
BTO
16 ms
4 ms
D 19J1 – INTVL1 (Bus Release every 16 word SCSI transfer) – Normally set as illustrated below.
INTVL1
VRI VRI : Bus Release

O O : No Bus Release
D 8J1 – INTVL2 (Bus Release Time – see 19J1 jumper) – Normally set as illustrated below.
INTVL2
1 1 : 1 ms
2 2 : 2 ms
4 4 : 4 ms
8 8 : 8 ms

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009

D 5A1 (for 2178399 CPW) – Write Compensation – Normally set as illustrated below.
D 8A1 (for 2178399 CPW) – FDD Mode – Normally set as illustrated below.
3 2 1

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-2 IPU2 Board
Illustration 1–4 IPU2
IPU2 SW Jumpers
(S5A1)
9S1 9V1 9X1
MD EXT SW 0
(S7A1)
J10 J15 10
J5 J6 J7
INT VEC SW
(S9A1)
Mini BNC Jack

for Oscilloscope
J20 J25

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-2 IPU2 Board (continued)
Switch Settings
D IPU2 SW S5A1 – Selects the recon processor.
(Qj, Lemage SX/E)
ON B-8A
`1'
OFF: ‘0’
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 ON: SBPU is installed
(Qj–Base except Lemage SX/E, Qj–Hlt)
STANDARD SETTING SETTING FOR FAST RECON OPTION

(1 IPA BOARD) (2 IPA BOARDS)
ON B-8A ON B-8A
`1' `1'
OFF: ‘0’
`0' `0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(Zj–Adv)
(2 IPA BOARDS ARE INSTALLED)
ON B-8A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009

D MD EXT SW S7A1 – Set according to the memory capacity and the number of SIMMs (Single In–line
Memory Module) which are installed on the IPU2 Board
It is normally set as illustrated below.
(Qj)
ON B-8A
`1' OFF: ‘0’
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The left is the standard setting
00 : J10, J11, J20, J21 are used

Slot Code
01 : J10 to J13, J20 to J23 are used
10 : J10 to J15, J20 to J25 are used
Variation Code
Set according to SIMM memory capacity
Spare Bits
Set to ‘000’
ON B-8A
`1'
The left setting is for IPU2 Board with
`0'
‘144 MB Memory Option’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
ON B-8A
`1'
`0' The left is the standard setting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF: ‘0’
ON B-8A
`1' The left setting is for IPU2 Board with ‘Extended Heli-
`0' cal Option’ (this option replaces the currently installed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 memory with 144 MB memory)
(Zj–Adv)
ON B-8A
`1'
OFF: ‘0’
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009

D INT VEC SW S9A1 – Interrupt Vector Set – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON B-8A
`1'
OFF: ‘0’
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Jumper Settings
D JP9S1 ∼ 11S2, JP9V1 ∼ 11V2, JP9X1 ∼ 11X1 – Adjusts Internal Clock Frequency.
Note
Do not change these settings. Each board has its own unique settings.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-3 DISP (OR DISP2) Board
Illustration 1–5 DISP
WHIT
E
ACRTC
VSYN
C
DAS
LD M40B M40A
Jumper Settings
D WHITE – OVL White Width Set – Sets the OVL dot timing.
It is normally set to ‘15’ as illustrated below.
10
15
20
WHITE

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-3 DISP (OR DISP2) Board (continued)

D ACRTC – ACRTC Interrupt Level Set on System Bus – Normally set as illustrated below.
4
3
ACRTC
D VSYNC – VSYNC Interrupt Level Set on System Bus – Normally set as illustrated below.
4
3
VSYNC

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-3 DISP (OR DISP2) Board (continued)

D DAS – DAS Error Interrupt Level Set on System Bus – Normally set as illustrated below.
4
3
DAS
D M40A, M40B, LD – Adjusts Internal Clock Frequency.
Note
Do not change these settings. Each board has its own unique settings.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-4 SBPU Board (Qj, Lemage SX/E)
Illustration 1–6 SBPU
JPR0
JPR1
JPR2
JPR3
JPR4
Jumper Settings
Note
Do not change the setting of jumpers JPR0, JPR1, JPR2 and JPR3. Their settings are determined
by the manufacturer.
D JPR4 – Interrupt Level Set – Normally set as illustrated below.
INT0
INT1
INT2
INT3
INT4
INT5
INT7
INT8
JPR4

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-5 IPA Board (Qj–Base except Lemage SX/E, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
Illustration 1–7 IPA
ON ON
S1 S2
ON ON
S3 S4
ON
S5
JP7
JP4
JP5
JP6
JP8 JP9
Jumper Settings
Note
Do not change the setting of jumpers JP1, JP2 and JP3. Their settings are determined by the
manufacturer.
D JP4, JP5 – Memory Size – Normally set as illustrated below.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-5 IPA Board (continued) (Qj–Base except Lemage SX/E, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
D JP6, JP7 – IOINT Interruption – Normally set as illustrated below.
D JP8, JP9 – IOINT Level – Normally set as illustrated below.
JP8 JP9
Switch Settings
D S1, S2, S3, S4, S5 – Base Address
Note
These dip switch settings differ according to the IPA Board slot location.
Slot 5 (Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)

Slot 29 (Zj–Adv)
Slot 4 (IPA Board in this slot is optional) (Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)

Slot 30 (Zj–Adv)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-6 TPC Board (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
Illustration 1–8 TPC
LED
CN3
CN1
RESET SW
ABORT SW
HD 63484
CN4 HD 68000
CN5
JUMPER PIN CN2

CN6

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-6 TPC Board (continued) (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
Jumper Settings
D J21B2 – Periodic Interrupt Interval – Normally set as illustrated below.
4 1
D J21C2 – I/O Bus Connector Select – Normally set as illustrated below.
DMP - Front Connector

- Backplane Connector
RTX
Switch Settings
D SW04A1 – Mode Select– Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Test Mode: `1' - Test Mode, `0' - Normal Mode
Touch Panel Type: `1' - CT, `0' - Ultrasound
Not Used. Set to `0'.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-7 MISC2 Board
Illustration 1–9 MISC2
JP5
CN9 CN3
CN4 CN5
SW1
JP6
RST
TST
SW2
CN6
JP7
PLCC
JP4, 3, 2, 1
CN7
CN8
JP8
Jumper Settings
D JP1 – TG SI01 – Normally set as illustrated below.
7C
MNL TST
D JP2 – TG SI02 – Normally set as illustrated below.
7C
MNL TST
D JP3 – TG SI01 (for future use) – Normally set as illustrated below.
7C
NML TST
D JP4 – TG SI02 (for future use) – Normally set as illustrated below.
7C
NML TST

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-7 MISC2 Board (continued)

D JP5 – Communication Protocol Set for spare SIO (RS232) – Normally set as illustrated below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C
DCE
1A B
DTE A
D JP6 – Communication Protocol Set for MFC SIO (RS232) – Normally set as illustrated below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C
DCE
3,4A B
DTE A
D JP7 – Clock Frequency Det for TGP serial communication – Normally set as illustrated below.
1D2
9.6 KHz
4.8 KHz
2.4 KHz
1.2 KHz
D JP8 – Buzzer Loudness – Normally set as illustrated below.
1 2 3
8W2
Loudness Low
Loudness Mid
Loudness High

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-7 MISC2 Board (continued)
Switch Settings
D SW1 – MFC, KB – Not used. Set all bits to ‘OFF’.
ON
`1`
OFF: `0'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Not Used. Set to `0'.
D SW2 – OC INTF, AUDIO – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1`
OFF: `0'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(ON) Watch Dog Timer mask, ROM Check Test cancel

(ON) Not used
Self Test Program
Bit 5 Bit 6
OFF OFF No Test
OFF ON Panel Test
ON OFF TGP Port Test
ON ON Record LSI chip is NOT reset during initialization
Auto Voice sampling frequency

OFF : 7.8 kHz
ON : 15.6 kHz
Auto Voice serial register data storage

OFF : 4
ON : 8
(ON) Not used
(ON) Demonstration Mode (when no Gantry); JP1 and JP2 should

be set to TST
D SW3 (RST) – Reset – Resets the MISC2 Board or other Boards controlled by MISC2.
D SW4 (TST) – Test – Starts the test selected on SW2 bit 5 & 6.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-8 ISC Board
Illustration 1–10 ISC
J3 DS2 J1
DS1 SW10B1
J5
J2
DS3
Switch Settings
D SW10B1 – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON ND 8
(Switches 1 to 4 are for J5 connector,
and switches 5 to 8 are for J3 connector)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON: DTE Mode, OFF: DCE Mode

ON: TXC/RXC not used, OFF: TXC/RXC used
ON: DA, OFF: DB

ON: RS232C, OFF: RS422A
ON: DA, OFF: DB

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-9 SCSI Board
Illustration 1–11 SCSI
2H1 2H3 2J2 2J4
CN3
2H2 2J1 2J3
CN1
RESET
ABORT
CN4
3.2 A/250 V CN2

23G2
LED
Jumper Settings
D 2H1, 2H2, 2H3, 2J1– IRQ Level – Normally all set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.
2H1 2H2 2H3 2J1

1
2
3
4
5
6
IRQ

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-9 SCSI Board (continued)

D 2J2, 2J3, 2J4 – Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.
2J2 2J3 2J4

0
1
2
3
4
BR
D 23G2 – ROM Select – Normally set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.
2 1
23G2

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-9 SCSI Board (continued)
Switch Settings
D 09G1 – Base Address – Normally set to ‘50H’ as illustrated below.
ON B-8A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D 16H2 – SCSI ID – Normally set to ‘7H’ as illustrated below.
ON B-8A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
LSB
ID
MSB
(Reserve)
D 27A1 – Test Mode – Normally set to ‘00(H)’ as illustrated below (No test).
ON B-8A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
LSB
Test No. [00H - 0DH]
MSB
Engineering use only; set to `0'
LSB
Test Mode [00H - 03H]
MSB
00 : No test
01 : Signal test
02 : Loop test (error stop)
03 : Loop test (Error no-stop)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-10 PDC Board (Zj–Adv)
Illustration 1–12 PDC
JP1B2
SW6A1
Jumper Settings
D JP1B2 – Power–on Reset Enable/Disable – Normally set as illustrated below.
N
Normal Setting: Enabled
For Low voltage (below 4.75 V) test: Disabled
Switch Settings
D SW6A1 – Test Mode – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 `0'
Calibration Call. `1': Calibration Call, `0': Normal

Not used. Set to `0'.
YMON Call. `1': YMON Call, `0': Normal
Off-line Test Call. `1': Off-line Test Call, `0': Normal

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-11 STL Board (Zj–Adv)
Jumper Settings
No jumpers to set.
Switch Settings
No switches to set.
1-2-12 MISCE Board (Zj–Adv)
Jumper Settings
No jumpers to set.
Switch Settings
No switches to set.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-13 ODC2 Board (Option) (Zj–Adv)
Illustration 1–13 ODC2
RESET
0K2, 1K1, 1K2
STATUS
TIMER
4K1, 5K1, 5K2
10A1 11E1
11E2
14A1 17H1
15A1
25K1
GPIB

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-13 ODC2 Board (Option) (continued) (Zj–Adv)
Jumper Settings
D J04K1, 05K1, 05K2 – Interrupt Request Level – Normally all set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.
6 5 4 3 2 1
4K1
IRQ
5K1
5K2
D J00K2, 01K1, 01K2 – Bus Request Level – Normally all set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.
0 1 2 3 4
0K2
1K1 BR
1K2
D J11E2 – DMA Block Time Interval – Normally set to ‘16 ms’ as illustrated below.
16 8 4 2 1 ms
11E2
D J11E1 – DMA Block Size – Normally set to ‘16’ as illustrated below.
16 8 4 2 1 word/block
11E1
D J15A1 – CRC Check Enable/Disable – Normally set to ‘CRC’ as illustrated below.
CRC

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
Switch Settings
D SW17H1 – Base Address – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
‘1’
‘0’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A9 : Address Bus Signal A9 (LSB)

A10 : Address Bus Signal A10
`0': Non-privileged I/O, `1': Supervisor I/O
D SW25K1 – Interrupt Vector number – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
‘1’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’
D0 : Data Bus Signal D0 (LSB)

D1 : Data Bus Signal D1
D7 : Data Bus Signal D7 (MSB)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
Switch Settings
D SW14A1 – GP–IB Address – Normally set to ‘10H’ as illustrated below.
ON
‘1’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

D SW10A1 – Test Mode Select – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B0 : Test Number (LSB)
B3 : Test Number (MSB)

B4 : Not used. Set to ÒFF'
B6 : Test Mode (LSB)
B7 : Test Mode (MSB)
B7 B6 MODE
0 0 Single
0 1 Repeat & Error Stop
1 0 Repeat & Error Continue
1 1 Not Select

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-14 MTC Board (Option) (Zj–Adv)
Illustration 1–14 MTC
1J1
1J2
2J1
CN3 CN1
3J1
DIP SW
CN2
LED
PUSH
SW
24A1 26E2
DIP SW
Jumper Settings
D J26E2 – ROM Select – Normally set to ‘64K’ as illustrated below.
- 64K ROM
- 128K ROM
D J03J1 – Interrupt Request Level – Normally set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-14 MTC Board (Option) (continued) (Zj–Adv)

D J01J1, 01J2, 02J1 – MTC Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.
0 1 2 3 4
1J1
BG
1J2
BR 2J1
0 1 2 3 4
Switch Settings
D SW24A1– Test Mode – Not used. It is normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
D SW4H1 – Interrupt Vector Number – Normally set to ‘FCH’ as illustrated below.
ON
`0'
Note: OFF: `1'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 `1'
D0 :Vector Number (LSB)

D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7 : Vector Number (MSB)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-15 COMX3 Board (Option) (Zj–Adv)
Illustration 1–15 COMX3
SW10J
SW14A1
SW24K1
J24J1
J26K1 J26K2
J27K2
J27K1
J27K3
Jumper Settings
D J24J1 – COMX Interrupt Request Level – Normally set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D J26K, 27K2, 27K3 – COMX Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.
0 1 2 3 4
26K2
27K2
27K3
0 1 2 3 4

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-15 COMX3 Board (Option) (continued) (Zj–Adv)

D J26k1 – DMA Block Time Interval – Normally set to ‘2 msec’ as illustrated below.
16 8 4 2
26K1
D J27K1 – DMA Block Size – Normally set to ‘16 words/block’ as illustrated below.
16 8 4 2 1
27K1
Switch Settings
D SW24K1 – Interrupt Vector Number – Normally set to ‘C6H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-15 COMX3 Board (Option) (continued) (Zj–Adv)

D SW10J1 – Base Address of Command Packet – Normally set to ‘20H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D SW14A1 – Communication Mode – Normally set to ‘C0H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Not used. Set to `0'

`1': Normal Interrupt, `0': Communication Interrupt
`1': Slave Board, `0': Master Board

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-16 NEMA3 Board (Option) (Zj–Adv)
Illustration 1–16 NEMA3
0H1
0B1 0B2 0H2 0J1
1H1
1E1 1K1
CN1
12J1
LED
CN2
26C1
26H1 26J1
25A1
Jumper Settings
D 0J1 – NEMA Interrupt Request Level – Normally set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D 0H1, 0H2, 1H1 – NEMA Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.
0 1 2 3 4
0H1
0H2
1H1
0 1 2 3 4

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-16 NEMA3 Board (Option) (continued) (Zj–Adv)

D 26J1 – DMA Block Time Interval – Normally set to ‘2 msec’ as illustrated below.
16 8 4 2
26J1
D 26H1 – DMA Block Size – Normally set to ‘16 words/block’ as illustrated below.
16 8 4 2 1
26H1
D 0B1, 0B2 – Normally set as illustrated below.
64 32 16 4
0B1 Wait before resend
0B2 Collision flag wait time
4 3 2 1
D 26C1 – Strobe Input (STBI) Data Set–up – Normally set to ‘0 msec’ as illustrated below.
8 25 41 58
0 16 33 50
D 1E1 – RS 232C – Normally set as illustrated below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
Switch Settings
D 1K1 – Interrupt Vector Set – Normally set to ‘C6H’ as illustrated below.
ON B-8A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D 12J1 – Base Address for Command Packet Area – Normally set to ‘27H’ as illustrated below.
ON B-8A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009

D 25A1 – Base Address for Command Packet Area – Normally set to ‘27H’ as illustrated below.
ON B-8A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFFLINE TEST MODE
Effective when bit 3 = ON
bit 4= ON
1H: ECHO REQ SEND

2H: STATUS REQ SEND
3H: FCS error check
4H: PARITY error check
5H: RECEIVE COUNT error check
6H: DMA check
7H:
8H:
9H:
AH:
BH: DMA to TRANSMIT
CH:
DH:
EH:
FH:
B3 B4
OFF OFF On-line Mode
ON OFF
OFF ON Off-line Test Mode (non-active)
ON ON Off-line Test Mode (active)
ON: Normal interrupt

OFF: Communication interrupt
(ex.: DATA VIEW = OFF)
ON: Non-GE connection

OFF: GE connection (NIE)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-17 ETC Board (Option)
Illustration 1–17 ETC
SW4A
SW3L
LED SW6A SW4J
SW8A CN1
CN3
SW15L
PUSH SW
CN2
CN4
J27D
Switch Settings
D SW4J – Base Address of Command Packet – Normally set to ‘30H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D SW15L – Interrupt Vector Number – Normally set to ‘C8H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-17 ETC Board (Option) (continued)

D SW3L – ETC Processor Number – Normally set to ‘AH’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
D SW4A – Serial interface (RS232C) Baud Mode – Normally set to ‘00H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B0 : Not used. Set to ‘0’

B7 B6 BAUD (bps)
B2 : Not used. Set to ‘0’ ON ON 19200
B3 : Not used. Set to ‘0’ ON OFF 1200
B4 : Not used. Set to ‘0’ OFF ON 2400
OFF OFF 9600
B6 : Serial interface baud. Normally OFF.
D SW6A – Ethernet Address and ETC Manufactured Data Set Mode – Normally set to ‘0H’ as illustrated
below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4

B2 : Ethernet address set. Normally OFF, ‘1’: Verify or set

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-2-17 ETC Board (Option) (continued)

D SW8A – Power–on Test Perform/Skip/Off–Line Test Set – Normally set to ‘0H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4

B2 : Off–Line Test. ‘1’: Perform test, ‘0’: Not perform test
B3 : Power–on Test. ‘1’: Skip test, ‘0’: Perform test
Jumper Settings
D J27D – Debug Port. A port for connecting a debug machine. No setting to be made.
1 2
J27D
7 8

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-3 OTHER CIRCUIT BOARDS
1-3-1 TPC SUB Board
Illustration 1–18 TPC
CN2 CN4 CN3
CN6
CN5
CN1
CN7 9C1
J1 J2
CN10
CN8
11C1
CN12 CN11
Jumper Settings
D J1, J2 – RS232C Control Mode – Normally set as illustrated below.
1 2 1 2 3
J1 J2
(open)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-3-1 TPC SUB Board (continued)
Switch Settings
D SW9C1– Parity Bit/Stop Bit – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
B0 : `1': Parity Bit Enable, `0': Parity Bit Disable

B1 : `1': Odd Parity, `0': Even Parity
B2 : `1': 2 Stop Bit, `0': 1 Stop Bit
B3 : Not used. Set to `0'.
D SW11C1 – Baud Rate/Touch Panel Scan Rate – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`0'
B3 B2 B1 B0 Interval
`1' 1 1 1 1 20 ms
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 1 1 0 30 ms
1 1 0 1 40 ms
B0 : 1 1 0 0 50 ms
1 0 1 1 60 ms
B1 : Touch Panel Scan Rate 1 0 1 0 70 ms
B2 : 1 0 0 1 80 ms
B3 : 1 0 0 0 90 ms
0 X X X 100 ms
B4 :
B5 : Baud Rate B7 B6 B5 B4 Baud Rate
B6 : 1 1 1 1 19200
1 1 1 0 9600
B7 : 1 1 0 1 4800
1 1 0 0 2400
1 0 1 1 1200
1 0 1 0 600

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-3-2 SV AMP Board
Illustration 1–19 SV AMP
J1
Jumper Setting
D J1 – Normally set as illustrated below.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-3-3 AUDIO2 Board
Illustration 1–20 AUDIO2
JP4
JP5
SW2
VR3
VR5
VR4
SW1
JP1 JP2
SW4
JP7
JP6 VR1
JP8 JP3
VR2
Jumper Settings
D JP1 – Rec In – Normally set as illustrated below.
1 2 3
4 5 6
MIC LINE
D JP2 – V Vol – Normally set as illustrated below.
1 2 3 1 2 3
for AUDIO2 P9201VL for AUDIO2 2121789
4 5 6 4 5 6
INT EXT INT EXT

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-3-3 AUDIO2 Board (continued)

D JP3 – Mic Type – Normally set as illustrated below.
JP3
OLD NEW
(Zj–Adv)
JP3
OLD NEW
D JP4 – PM Tone – Normally set to ‘5–6’ as illustrated below.
JP4
1 2 HI
3 4
5 6 LO
D JP5 – PV Vol – Normally set to ‘3–4’ as illustrated below.
JP5
1 2 MAX
3 4 MID
5 6 MIN
D JP6 – TBOZ Tone – Normally set to ‘3–4’ as illustrated below.
JP6
1 2 HI
3 4 MID
5 6 LO
D JP7 – TBUZ Vol – Normally set to ‘3–4’ as illustrated below.
JP7
1 2 MAX
3 4 MID
5 6 MIN

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-3-3 AUDIO2 Board (continued)

D JP8 – XBUZ Vol – Normally set to ‘3–4’ as illustrated below.
JP8
1 2 MAX
3 4 MID
5 6 MIN
Switch Settings
D SW1 – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON B-8A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAM1
SAM2
CSEL1
CSEL2
MFMSCT
CPU/MNL
FOOT SV
REC/PLY
ON B-8A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-3-4 DAS IF Board
Illustration 1–21 DAS I/F
J4
J3
J5 J2
Jumper Settings
D J2, J3, J4, J5 – Normally set as illustrated below.
1 2
J2
(OPEN)
1 2 3
J3
1 2
J4
(OPEN)
1 2
J5
(OPEN)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-4 SBB ASSY (BACKBOARD) (Qj)
Illustration 1–22 SBB ASSY
J021 J041 J061 J081
J031 J071
SBB ASSY
ILLUSTRATION 1
Jumper Plug Settings

D J021, 031, 041, 061, 071, 081 – System Bus Priority Jumpers – should all be open as illustrated below.
Each jumper is connected to a Board located just on the opposite side of the backboard. Opening a jumper
allows the connected Board (signal) to communicate with other Boards via the system bus.
Note
There are no jumpers connected to AUX2 slot (option). Therefore, no setting is required when an
option Board is installed.
(Setting Example)
- BG4
Jumper Plug No. Slot No. Circuit Board Set
- BG3
J021 Slot# 02 IPU2 open
J031 Slot# 03 DISP open - BG2
J041 Slot# 04 SBPU open
J061 Slot# 06 MISC2 open - BG1
J071 Slot# 07 ISC open
J081 Slot# 08 SCSI open - BG0
No Plug Slot# 09 (AUX2) N/A
- IACK
(Open)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-5 QJBB ASSY (BACKBOARD) (Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
Illustration 1–23 QJBB ASSY
J021 J041 J071 J091
J031 J051 J081
QJBB ASSY
ILLUSTRATION 2

D J021, 031, 041, 051, 071, 081, 091– System Bus Priority Jumpers – should all be open as illustrated below.
Note
There are no jumpers connected to AUX2 slot (option). Therefore, no setting is required when an
option Board is installed.
Jumper Plug No. Slot No. Circuit Board Set (Setting Example)
J021 Slot# 02 IPU2 open - BG4
J031 Slot# 03 DISP2 open
J041 Slot# 04 IPA open (*)
J051 Slot# 05 IPA open - BG3
J071 Slot# 07 MISC2 open
J081 Slot# 08 ISC open - BG2
J091 Slot# 09 SCSI open
No Plug Slot# 10 (AUX2) N/A - BG1
- BG0
(*) These jumpers must be opened only if this second
IPA Board is installed. - IACK
(Open)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-6 ADVBB ASSY (BACKBOARD) (Zj–Adv)
Illustration 1–24 ADVBB ASSY
J041 J061 J081 J111 J131
J051 J071 J101 J121 J141

D J041, 051, 061, 071, 081, 101, 111 – System Bus Priority Jumpers – should all be open as illustrated below.
Jumper Plug No. Slot No. Circuit Board Set (Setting Example)
J041 Slot# 32 IPU2 open - BG4
J051 Slot# 31 DISP2 open
J061 Slot# 30 IPA open
J071 Slot# 29 IPA open - BG3
J081 Slot# 27 MISC2 open
J101 Slot# 25 ISC open - BG2
J111 Slot# 24 SCSI open
J121 Slot# 23 ODC2 open (*) - BG1
J131 Slot# 22 MTC open (*)
J141 Slot# 21 COMX/NEMA open (*) - BG0
(*) Any of these jumpers for ODC2, MTC, COMX/NEMA
must be opened only if the connected Board is installed. - IACK
(Open)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-7 HARD DISK DRIVE
1-7-1 HDD U0048ZA
Illustration 1–25 Hard Disk Drive (U0048ZA)
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

HARD DISK
DRIVE
THESE NUMBERS ARE NOT
PRINTED ON THE BOARD
TERMINATOR
MODULE
POWER 8
SUPPLY 2 10
CONNECTOR CNH11
1 1 9
CNH10
SW1
SCSI 6 5
CONNECTOR
2 1
Normal Jumper Settings
D CNH10 D CNH11
2 4 6 2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5
1 3 5 7 9
D SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
(`2' only to OFF)
OFF
The numbers for the jumpers and switches above correspond to the numbers
written in Illustration 1-25.
For CNH11, different numbers are printed on the Board from ones written in
Illustration 1-25; ignore the numbers printed on the Board.
Terminator Module
D Leave the terminator module installed on the Board.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-7-2 HDD 2143341
Illustration 1–26 Hard Disk Drive (2143341)
IMPORTANT NOTE:
There are two types of HDD 2143341 in the field.
POWER
SUPPLY
CONNECTOR
HARD DISK
DRIVE
CNH1
SCSI
CONNECTOR TERMINATOR MODULE
Normal Jumper and Terminator Settings
HD#0 HD#1
CNH1 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
ID = #0 ID = #1
Terminator Module INSTALLED REMOVED

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-7-2 HDD 2143341 (Continued)
Illustration 1–26 Hard Disk Drive (2143341) (Continued)
CNH3
3.5 INCH HDD
CNH1
HD#0 HD#1
CNH1 2 16 2 16
1 15 1 15
ID = #0 ID = #1
CNH3 2 2
4 4
1 3 1 3

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-7-3 HDD 2307327
FOR HDD 2307327:
Verify this setting.

DIAG
MODE0
MODE2
Ignore these settings.
MODE4
Do not remove any jumper(s)
even if installed.
PIO/DMA
512/256
Verify these settings. TERM
ID0
ID2
ID4

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-8 FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
1-8-1 FDD U0012ZA
Normal Switch Setting

D Move the slide switch knob all the way to the left, as seen from the rear as illustrated below.
SLIDING SWITCH
SIGNAL CONNECTOR POWER

CONNECTOR
REAR VIEW

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-8-2 FDD 2191376 or 2349231
Normal Jumper Setting
2191376 (TEAC, FD–235HG) 2349231 (Y–E DATA, YD–702D)
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
Compatibility Information
This FDD 2191376 or 2349231 must be used with 2178399 or later CPW Board. (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
This FDD 2191376 or 2349231 must be used with 2201348 or later CPW Board. (Zj–Adv)
Floppy disks which were used on U0012ZA FDDs can be read/written on this FDD 2191376 or 2349231; however,
2DD type floppy disks can not be used on this FDD 2191376 or 2349231.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-9 MAGNETIC OPTICAL DISK DRIVE (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)
1-9-1 MOD Drive 2168470
REAR VIEW
SCSI CONNECTOR
JA3
1 19
2 20
SCSI ADDRESS 20
SCSI ADDRESS 21
SCSI ADDRESS 22
WRITE CACHE SETTING

WRITE WITH VERIFY DISABLE
REMOVABLE MEDIA REPORT
DEVICE TYPE REPORT
TERMINATOR POWER
TERMINATOR POWER
TERMINATOR (FOR SINGLE-END SCSI)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-9-1 MOD Drive 2168470 (continued)
NORMAL JUMPER SETTINGS

BOTTOM VIEW
2 16
JA3 JP
15
1 1
JP2 JP1
JP6
2 16
JP2
1 15
2 16
JP6
1 15

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 13 2205009
1-9-2 MOD Drive U0050ZA
REAR VIEW
SCSI CONNECTOR
SCSI JUMPER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NORMAL JUMPER SETTING: ALL OFF
SCSI ADDRESSES
PARITY CHECK
NOT USED
POWER ON RESPONSE
MODE
SCSI Terminator
D Leave the terminator installed.
BOTTOM VIEW
SCSI TERMINATOR INSTALLED

CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
SECTION 2 – OPERATOR CONSOLE (Zj)
2-1 GENERAL
NOTICE
Cut power before removing or inserting any of the boards or plugs.
Graphic Conventions
Illustration 2–1 Jumper Setting Example
JUMPER
JUMPER PIN
SOCKET
D `01B2' indicates jumper or
switch location on a board.
01B2 D Left illustration indicates that a
jumper socket links pins 1 and 2.
1 2 3

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
Component Locations
The following illustration shows the locations of some components within the Operator Console, and slot # for the nest
chassis circuit boards.
Illustration 2–2 OC Component Locations
+5 VDC
POWER
SUPPLY FD ADP
PS ADP ASSY
MOD -5 VDC
ASSY POWER FDD
SUPPLY
HARD +24 VDC

DISK POWER
DRIVES SUPPLY
+12 VDC
POWER
SUPPLY
SLOT SLOT SLOT

#00 - 06 #11 - 18 #20 - 44
See Table 2–1 for Slot # and circuit board name.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
Table 2–1 Slot No. and Board
SLOT NO. BOARD NAME SLOT NO. BOARD NAME

01 MV AMP II 27 SCSI
02 MFCCTL3 28 MRX
29 FMP2 (for ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell,
ProSeed)
FMP3 (for ProSpeed Plus, Accell EI, ProSeed EF)
11 OCCM4 (option) 30 FMP1
12 OVL2 (option) 31 DMP4
13 IFB2 (option) 32 ISC
14 - 33 OVL2
15 FCP2A + FCP22 (option) 34 IFB2
16 FCP1 (option) 35 BPU2 (for ProSpeed Plus, ProSeed EF)
- (for ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell, Accell EI,
ProSeed
17 FCP3B (option) 36 FCP2A + FCP22
18 FMD (option) 37 FCP1
38 FCP3B (for ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell,
ProSeed
FCP4 (for ProSpeed Plus, Accell EI, ProSeed EF)
20 ETC (option) 39 FMD (for ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell,
ProSeed
FPA2 (for ProSpeed Plus, ProSeed EF)
- (for Accell EI)
21 - 40 FPA +FPAM
(for ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell, ProSeed
FPA2 (for ProSpeed Plus, Accell EI, ProSeed EF)
22 COMX3 (option) 41 DBM + M32W (or M64W)
23 DMP2 (option) 42 BPU
24 DMP2 (option) 43 PDC
25 MTC (option) 44 OC INTF3
26 ODC2 (option)
Note 1: The Boards in slot #11 ∼ #18 are options used for DC III.
Note 2: The DMP2 Boards in slot #23 and #24 are options used for DC III.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-2 CIRCUIT BOARDS (SLOT #00 ∼ 06)
2-2-1 MV AMP II
Illustration 2–3 MV AMP II
CN7
JP2
CN6 JP3
JP1
CN5
CN8 CN4
CN3
CN9
CN16 CN1 CN15 CN14 CN13 CN12 CN11 CN10
CN2
Jumper Settings
D JP1 – Normally set as illustrated below (open.
D JP2 – Normally set as illustrated below (closed).
D JP3 – Normally set as illustrated below (closed).

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-2-2 MFC CTL3
Illustration 2–4 MFC CTL3
MFC CTL3 ASSY P9151VY-

ONI
IDT7130S SW
CN8
CN1 RO
M
IL1 IN1
SW SW
mPD7831
0
LED
CN2
CN7 CN3 CN4 CN5 CN6
Jumper Settings
D CN8 – Normally set as illustrated below.
DTE DCE
RD SD
SD RD
CTS RTS
DSR
DCD
RTS CTS
DTR DSR
N.C. DCD

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-2-2 MFC CTL3 (continued)
Switch Settings
D SWIL1 – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B0 : MFC CONNECTED TO CONSOLE

'1' - YMS MFC-II is connected
'0' - Other MFC or no MFC is connected
B1 : Not used. Set to '0'

B3 : MFC II FORMAT CONNECTED TO 4TH DC III

'1' - 3 x 4 format, '0' - 3 x 3 format
B4 : MFC II FORMAT CONNECTED TO 3RD DC III
'1' - 3 x 4 format, '0' - 3 x 3 format
B5 : MFC II FORMAT CONNECTED TO 2ND DC III
'1' - 3 x 4 format, '0' - 3 x 3 format
B6 : MFC II FORMAT CONNECTED TO 1ST DC III
'1' - 3 x 4 format, '0' - 3 x 3 format
B7 : MFC II FORMAT CONNECTED TO CONSOLE
'1' - 3 x 4 format, '0' - 3 x 3 format
D SWIN1 – I/O Bus Select – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 : I/O BUS Address Signal A7
B3 : I/O BUS Select Signal, '1' - IOBS2, '0' - IOBS1

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-3 CIRCUIT BOARDS (SLOT #11 ∼ 18; FOR OPTIONAL DC III)
2-3-1 OCCM4 (Option)
Illustration 2–5 OCCM4
ROM
LED0A1
CN1
SW4A1
ROM
SW6A1
ROM
CN2
PUSH SW SW13A1 CN7

SW13B1 U11D1
LED
LED13A1
LED14A1
CN11

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-3-1 OCCM4 (Option) (continued)
Switch Settings
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D SW6A1 – DC III Number – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
B0 : #4
B1 : #3 Set one of switches to '1'
B2 : #2
B3 : #1
D SW4A1 – I/O Bus Select – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B3 : I/O BUS Select Signal , '1'- IOBS2, '0'- IOBS1

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-3-2 OVL2 (Option)
Illustration 2–6 OVL2
TMS34061
LED CN1
CN3
JP3
DIP
SW
GATE
CN4 ARRAY
CN2
CN5
17A1 17A2 JP1

19A1 19A2
JP2
27E1
HD63484
Resistor Module
17A1, 17A2, 19A1, 19A2 – Terminating Resistors for I/O Bus – Leave these resistor modules on the sockets.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-3-2 OVL2 (Option) (continued)
Jumper Settings
D JP1, JP2 – LOCAL BUS Interrupt Request – Normally set as illustrated below.
JP1 JP2
JP1 : IRQ3
JP2 : IRQ4
D JP3 – I/O BUS Interrupt Request – Normally set as illustrated below.
JP3
JP3 : INTR1
Switch Settings
D SW15A1 – I/O BUS Address Mapping – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4

B1 : Not used. Set to '0'.
B2-B3 : I/O BUS Address Mapping
B3 B2 Address(Hex)
0 0 F70600 - F7063F
1 0 F70640 - F7067F
0 1 F70680 - F706BF
1 1 F706C0 - F706FF

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-3-3 IFB2 (Option)
Illustration 2–7 IFB2
D/A CONV
CN4
CN1
CN3
TMS34061
CN5
LED
CN2
Jumper Settings
No jumper to set.
Switch Settings
No switch to set.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-3-4 FCP2A +FCP22 (Option)
Illustration 2–8 FCP2A
TEST PIN
LED
CN1
CN3
CN11
CN13
DIP SW
CN4 CN1
CN12
LED
FCP22
Switch Settings
D SW14A1 – FPU Number – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
B0 : FPU Number. Set to '0'

Switch/Jumper Settings in FCP22

No switch or jumper to set on FCP22.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-3-5 FCP1 (Option)
Illustration 2–9 FCP1
CN1
CN3
CN4 CN2
Jumper Settings
No jumper to set.
Switch Settings
No switch to set.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-3-6 FCP3B (Option)
Illustration 2–10 FCP3B
LED
CN1
CN3
DIP SW
CN2
CN4
Switch Settings
D SW15A1 – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
B0 : FPU Number. Always set to '0'

B1 : FMD1, '1'- FMD option sits in slot #18, '0' - No FMD
B2 : FMD2, Always set to '0'
B3 : FFT, Always set to '0'

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-3-7 FMD (Option)
Illustration 2–11 FMD
LED
CN1
CN3
DIP SW
CN2
CN4
Switch Settings
D SW08A1 – FMD Address Mapping – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4

B2-B3 : FMD Address Mapping on SYSTEM BUS
B3(SW1) B2(SW2) Address(Hex)

0 0 1800000 - 2FFFFFF
0 1 3000000 - 47FFFFF
1 0 2000000 - 37FFFFF
1 1 3800000 - 4FFFFFF
Note
When FMD is installed in slot #18, check the switch settings on FCP3B in slot #17 and on DMP2 in slot
#24.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4 CIRCUIT BOARDS (SLOT #20 ∼ 44)
2-4-1 ETC (Option)
Illustration 2–12 ETC
SW4A
SW3L
LED SW6A SW4J
SW8A CN1
CN3
SW15L
PUSH SW
CN2
CN4
J27D
Switch Settings
D SW4J – Base Address of Command Packet – Normally set to ‘30H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D SW15L – Interrupt Vector Number – Normally set to ‘C8H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-1 ETC (Option) (continued)

D SW3L – ETC Processor Number – Normally set to ‘AH’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
D SW4A – Serial interface (RS232C) Baud Mode – Normally set to ‘00H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B7 B6 BAUD (bps)
B2 : Not used. Set to ‘0’ ON ON 19200
B3 : Not used. Set to ‘0’ ON OFF 1200
B4 : Not used. Set to ‘0’ OFF ON 2400
OFF OFF 9600
D SW6A – Ethernet Address and ETC Manufactured Data Set Mode – Normally set to ‘0H’ as illustrated
below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4

B2 : Ethernet address set. Normally OFF, ‘1’: Verify or set

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-1 ETC (Option) (continued)

D SW8A – Power–on Test Perform/Skip/Off–Line Test Set – Normally set to ‘0H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4

B2 : Off–Line Test. ‘1’: Perform test, ‘0’: Not perform test
B3 : Power–on Test. ‘1’: Skip test, ‘0’: Perform test
Jumper Settings
D J27D – Debug Port. A port for connecting a debug machine. No setting to be made.
1 2
J27D
7 8

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-2 COMX3 (Option)
Illustration 2–13 COMX3
SW10J
SW14A1
SW24K1
J24J1
J26K1 J26K2
J27K2
J27K1
J27K3
Jumper Settings
D J24J1 – COMX Interrupt Request Level – Normally set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D J26K, 27K2, 27K3 – COMX Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.
0 1 2 3 4
26K2
27K2
27K3
0 1 2 3 4

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-2 COMX3 (Option) (continued)

D J26k1 – DMA Block Time Interval – Normally set to ‘2 msec’ as illustrated below.
16 8 4 2
26K1
D J27K1 – DMA Block Size – Normally set to ‘16 words/block’ as illustrated below.
16 8 4 2 1
27K1
Switch Settings
D SW24K1 – Interrupt Vector Number – Normally set to ‘C6H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-2 COMX3 (Option) (continued)

D SW10J1 – Base Address of Command Packet – Normally set to ‘20H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D SW14A1 – Communication Mode – Normally set to ‘C0H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

`1': Normal Interrupt, `0': Communication Interrupt
`1': Slave Board, `0': Master Board

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-3 DMP2 (Option)
Illustration 2–14 DMP2
03A4
04C2 05J1 05J2
LED
CN1
PUSH SW 07C2
06J2
LED 06J1
12D2
CN3
15C2
-
CN4
CN2
21C2
23E2
CN5
Note
This DMP2 Board is used for an optional DC III.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-3 DMP2 (Option) (continued)
Jumper Settings
D J03A4 – PTM#1 Clock Input – Normally set as illustrated below (open).
PTM#3 Clock Output

1 MHz Clock
D J15C2 – Watchdog Timer Interval – Normally set to 4sec as illustrated below.
8 - 4.0 sec
4 - 2.0 sec
2 - 1.0 sec
- 0.5 sec
1
D J23E2 – Parity Error Enable/Disable – Normally set to ‘NORMAL’ as illustrated below.
N - NORMAL : Parity Error enabled
T - TEST : Parity Error disabled. Test use only
D J12D2 – Power–on Reset Enable/Disable – Normally set to ‘NORMAL’ as illustrated below.
N - NORMAL : Power-on Reset enabled under 4.65V condition.
T - TEST : Power-on Reset disabled. Test use only

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009

D J04C2 – CBF Enable/Disable – Normally set to ‘NORMAL’ as illustrated below.
N - NORMAL : CBF option disabled.
T - TEST : CBF option enabled. When CBF option is installed on system, set to this side.
D J07C2 – Debug Terminal Enable/Disable – Normally set to ‘NORMAL’ as illustrated below.
N - NORMAL : Debug Terminal disabled.
T - TEST : Debug Terminal enabled. When a debug terminal is connected to

DMP2, set to this side.
D J21C2 – ROM Select – Normally set to ‘2MB’ as illustrated below.
- 2Mbit ROM
- 4Mbit ROM
4MB
D J05J1, 05J2 – MPU Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘3’ as illustrated below.
5J1
5J2
4 3 2 1 0
4 3 2 1 0 BR
BG
D J06J1, 06J2 – DMAC Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.
6J1
6J2
4 3 2 1 0
4 3 2 1 0 BR
BG

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
Switch Settings
D SW6A2 – Processor Number – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
B3 B2 B1 B0 Description
0 0 0 0 Not used
B0 : 0 0 0 1 DMP4 for OC
B1 : 0 0 1 0 DMP2 for DC III #1
B2 : 0 0 1 1 DMP2 for DC III #2
0 1 0 0 DMP2 for DC III #3
B3 : 0 1 0 1 DMP2 for DC III #4
D SW4A1 – TEST SW – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B0 : FMD, '1' - FMD sits in slot #18, '0' - No FMD

B2 : RECON/DISP, Always set to '0'
B5 : YMON, '1' - YMON call, '0' - Normal
B6 : OFF-LINE TEST, '1' - Off-line test call, '0' - Normal
B7 : Power-up Test, '1' - Test skip, '0' - Power-up Test Select

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-4 MTC (Option)
Illustration 2–15 MTC
1J1
1J2
2J1
CN3 CN1
3J1
DIP SW
CN2
LED
PUSH
SW
24A1 26E2
DIP SW
Jumper Settings
D J26E2 – ROM Select – Normally set to ‘64K’ as illustrated below.
- 64K ROM
- 128K ROM
D J03J1 – Interrupt Request Level – Normally set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-4 MTC (Option) (continued)

D J01J1, 01J2, 02J1 – MTC Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.
0 1 2 3 4
1J1
BG
1J2
BR 2J1
0 1 2 3 4
Switch Settings
D SW24A1– Test Mode – Not used. It is normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
D SW4H1 – Interrupt Vector Number – Normally set to ‘FCH’ as illustrated below.
ON
`0'
Note: OFF: `1'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 `1'
D0 :Vector Number (LSB)

D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7 : Vector Number (MSB)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-5 ODC2 (Option)
Illustration 2–16 ODC2
RESET
0K2, 1K1, 1K2
STATUS
TIMER
4K1, 5K1, 5K2
10A1 11E1
11E2
14A1 17H1
15A1
25K1
GPIB

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-5 ODC2 (Option) (continued)
Jumper Settings
D J04K1, 05K1, 05K2 – Interrupt Request Level – Normally all set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.
6 5 4 3 2 1
4K1
IRQ
5K1
5K2
D J00K2, 01K1, 01K2 – Bus Request Level – Normally all set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.
0 1 2 3 4
0K2
1K1 BR
1K2
D J11E2 – DMA Block Time Interval – Normally set to ‘16 ms’ as illustrated below.
16 8 4 2 1 ms
11E2
D J11E1 – DMA Block Size – Normally set to ‘16’ as illustrated below.
16 8 4 2 1 word/block
11E1
D J15A1 – CRC Check Enable/Disable – Normally set to ‘CRC’ as illustrated below.
CRC

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
Switch Settings
D SW17H1 – Base Address – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
‘1’
‘0’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D SW25K1 – Interrupt Vector number – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
‘1’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
Switch Settings
D SW14A1 – GP–IB Address – Normally set to ‘10H’ as illustrated below.
ON
‘1’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

ON
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B0 : Test Number (LSB)
B3 : Test Number (MSB)

B6 : Test Mode (LSB)
B7 : Test Mode (MSB)
B7 B6 MODE
0 0 Single
0 1 Repeat & Error Stop
1 0 Repeat & Error Continue
1 1 Not Select

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-6 SCSI
Illustration 2–17 SCSI
2H1 2H3 2J2 2J4
CN3
2H2 2J1 2J3
CN1
RESET
ABORT
CN4
3.2 A/250 V CN2

23G2
LED
Jumper Settings
D 2H1, 2H2, 2H3, 2J1– IRQ Level – Normally all set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.
2H1 2H2 2H3 2J1

1
2
3
4
5
6
IRQ

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-6 SCSI (continued)

D 2J2, 2J3, 2J4 – Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.
2J2 2J3 2J4

0
1
2
3
4
BR
D 23G2 – ROM Select – Normally set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.
2 1
23G2

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-6 SCSI (continued)
Switch Settings
D 09G1 – Base Address – Normally set to ‘50H’ as illustrated below.
ON B-8A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D 16H2 – SCSI ID – Normally set to ‘7H’ as illustrated below.
ON B-8A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
LSB
ID
MSB
(Reserve)
D 27A1 – Test Mode – Normally set to ‘00(H)’ as illustrated below (No test).
ON B-8A
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
LSB
Test No. [00H - 0DH]
MSB
Engineering use only; set to `0'
LSB
Test Mode [00H - 03H]
MSB
00 : No test
01 : Signal test
02 : Loop test (error stop)
03 : Loop test (Error no-stop)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-7 MRX
Illustration 2–18 MRX
CN1
14A1
DIP SW 15A1
16A1
CN2

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-7 MRX (continued)
Switch Settings
D SW14A1/16A1 – System Bus/ Local Bus Local Memory Base Address –
Normally set to ‘080000H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D SW15A1 – System Bus Common Memory Base Address – Normally set to ‘D00000H’ as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-8 FMP2 (ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell, ProSeed)
Illustration 2–19 FMP2
DC-DC CONV
02A2 03B1
LED
CN1
CN3
DIP SW
10D1
15D2
CN4 HD63463
HD68450
WRRD
CN5
CN7 17D3
CN2
CN6 17D4 CN8
24K3
JUMPER

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-8 FMP2 (continued) (ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell, ProSeed)
Jumper Settings
D J15D2 - HDD Timing Adjust - D J17D3, 17D4 - Write/Read Clock Adjustment

Normally set to `H' as illustrated below.
WR RD
-F - 28 -
- 24 -
-H
- 20 -
(Example Only)
- 16 -
- 12 -
D J24K1, 24K2, 24K3 - DMAC Bus Request Level - -8-
Normally set to `4' as illustrated below. -4-
-0-
24K3 17D3 17D4
24K1
Note
This adjustment is HDC dependent and
24K2 0 1 2 3 4 has been adjusted at Manufacturing. Do
not change this setting in the field.
0 1 2 3 4
Switch Settings
D SW04A1 – Drive Code – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B0
B2/B5 B1/B4 B0/B3 Disk Type
B1 HD#00 Drive Code 0 0 1 130MB
B2 0 1 0 260MB
B3 0 1 1 330MB
1 0 1 290MB
B4 HD#01 Drive Code 1 1 1 Not Connected
B5
B6 Interleave Factor IF0 B7 B0 Interleave Sector
0 0 0 (Contiguous)
B7 Interleave Factor IF1
0 1 1
1 0 2
1 1 3

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-9 FMP3 (ProSpeed Plus, Accell EI, ProSeed EF)
1K1
2K1
10A1 16L2
16L1
16L3
Jumper Settings
D 16L1, 16L2, 16L3 – DMAC Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘4’ as illustrated below.
4
3
2
1
0
16L1 16L2 16L3

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-9 FMP3 (continued) (ProSpeed Plus, Accell EI, ProSeed EF)
Switch Settings
D 10A1 – Drive Code – Not used. Set all switches to ‘0.’
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D 1K1 – Burst Transfer Interval – Normally set to ‘4 ms’ as illustrated below.
ON
`0'
`1'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B0 : 1 ms
B1 : 2 ms
B2 : 4 ms
B2 : 8 ms
B4 : 16 ms
B5 : 32 ms
B2 : 64 ms
B7 : 128 ms
D 2K1 – Burst Transfer Words – Normally set to ‘16 words’ as illustrated below.
ON
`0'
`1'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B0 : 16 words
B1 : 32 words
B2 : 64 words
B2 : 128 words
B4 : 256 words
B5 : 512 words
B2 : Not used. Set to `0'

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-10 FMP1
JUMPER EPROM
01B2
CN3
HD68000
LED
DIP SW
12A1 14H1
JUMPER
PUSH SW 15H1
DIP SW
16A1 15H2
HD68450
CN4
Jumper Settings
D J01B2 - Power-on Reset Enable/Disable - D J14H1,15H1,15H2 - Bus Request Level -
Normally set to À' as illustrated below. Normally set to `4' as illustrated below.
A B 0 1 2 3 4
14H1
BG
15H1
B : Disable
BR 15H2
A : Enable
0 1 2 3 4

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-10 FMP1 (continued)
Switch Settings
D SW16A1 – Boot Mode Select – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON Note
`1'
Special Boot Device Select is only used for Special Boot.
`0'
1 2 3 4
Boot Mode : '1' - Special Boot, '0' - Normal Boot from Hard Disk
Not used. Set to '0'
Special Boot Device Select : '1' - Floppy Disk, '0' - 'YMON' firmware monitor
Not used. Set to '0'
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Not Used. Set to '0'

Test Select : '1' - Off-line test, '0' - power-up self test
Test Enable/Disable : '1' - Disable '0' - Enable

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-11 DMP4
Illustration 2–22 DMP4
03A4
04C2 05J1 05J2
LED
CN1
PUSH SW 07C2
06J2
LED 06J1
12D2
CN3
15C2
-
CN4
CN2
21C2
23E2
CN5

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-11 DMP4 (continued)
Jumper Settings
D J03A4 – PTM#1 Clock Input – Normally set as illustrated below (open).
PTM#3 Clock Output

1 MHz Clock
D J15C2 – Watchdog Timer Interval – Normally set to 4sec as illustrated below.
8 - 4.0 sec
4 - 2.0 sec
2 - 1.0 sec
- 0.5 sec
1
D J23E2 – Parity Error Enable/Disable – Normally set to ‘NORMAL’ as illustrated below.
N - NORMAL : Parity Error enabled
T - TEST : Parity Error disabled. Test use only
D J12D2 – Power–on Reset Enable/Disable – Normally set to ‘NORMAL’ as illustrated below.
N - NORMAL : Power-on Reset enabled under 4.65V condition.
T - TEST : Power-on Reset disabled. Test use only

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009

D J04C2 – CBF Enable/Disable – Normally set to ‘NORMAL’ as illustrated below.
N - NORMAL : CBF option disabled.
T - TEST : CBF option enabled. When CBF option is installed on system, set to this side.
D J07C2 – Debug Terminal Enable/Disable – Normally set to ‘NORMAL’ as illustrated below.
N - NORMAL : Debug Terminal disabled.
T - TEST : Debug Terminal enabled. When a debug terminal is connected to

DMP2, set to this side.
D J21C2 – ROM Select – Normally set to ‘2MB’ as illustrated below.
- 2Mbit ROM
- 4Mbit ROM
4MB
D J05J1, 05J2 – MPU Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘3’ as illustrated below.
5J1
5J2
4 3 2 1 0
4 3 2 1 0 BR
BG
D J06J1, 06J2 – DMAC Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.
6J1
6J2
4 3 2 1 0
4 3 2 1 0 BR
BG

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
Switch Settings
D SW6A2 – Processor Number – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
B3 B2 B1 B0 Description
0 0 0 0 Not used
B0 : 0 0 0 1 DMP4 for OC
B1 : 0 0 1 0 DMP2 for DC III #1
B2 : 0 0 1 1 DMP2 for DC III #2
0 1 0 0 DMP2 for DC III #3
B3 : 0 1 0 1 DMP2 for DC III #4
D SW4A1 – TEST SW – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B0 : Always set to `1'

B2 : RECON/DISP, Always set to '1'
B5 : YMON, '1' - YMON call, '0' - Normal
B6 : OFF-LINE TEST, '1' - Off-line test call, '0' - Normal
B7 : Power-up Test, '1' - Test skip, '0' - Power-up Test Select

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-12 ISC
Illustration 2–23 ISC
J3 DS2 J1
DS1 SW10B1
J5
J2
DS3
Switch Settings
ON ND 8
(Switches 1 to 4 are for J5 connector,
and switches 5 to 8 are for J3 connector)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON: DA, OFF: DB

ON: DA, OFF: DB

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-13 OVL2
See Section 2-3-2.
2-4-14 IFB2
See Section 2-3-3.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-15 BPU2 (ProSpeed Plus, ProSeed EF)
Illustration 2–24 BPU2
LED
CN1
DIP SW
CN2
Switch Settings
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
B0 : DA-B. Set to '1'

B1 : DA-A. Set to '0'
B2 : MSTR. Set to '0'

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-16 FCP2A + FCP22

See Section 2-3-4.
2-4-17 FCP1
See Section 2-3-5.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-18 FCP3B (ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell, ProSeed)
Illustration 2–25 FCP3B
LED
CN1
CN3
DIP SW
CN2
CN4
Switch Settings
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
B0 : FPU Number. Always set to '0'

B1 : FMD1, '1'- FMD sits in slot #39, '0' - No FMD
B2 : FMD2, Always set to '1' to operate with FPA

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-19 FCP4 (ProSpeed Plus, Accell EI, ProSeed EF)
Illustration 2–26 FCP4
SW1
JP1
Jumper Settings
D JP1 – Operation Mode. Normally set as illustrated below
JP1
(With this setting, this board operates as FCP3B + FMD;
FCP3B FCP4 MD capacity is 32 MB.
If the jumper is set to the FCP3B side, this board operates
as FCP3B; MD capacity is 8 MB.)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-19 FCP4 (continued) (ProSpeed Plus, Accell EI, ProSeed EF)
Switch Settings
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B2 : FFT, `1' - FFT is used, `0' - No
B3 : MD Address, `1' - used as MD for FPU1, `0' - used as MD for FPU0
B4 : FFT4, `1' - FFT is used, `0' - No
B5 : FMD4, `1' - FMD sits in slot #39, `0' - No
B6 : FPA2, `1' - Second FPA2 sits in slot #39, `0' - No
B7 : FPA1, `1' - First FPA (or FPA2) sits in slot #40, `0' - No
(B0 ~ B3 settings are effective when the JP1 is set to the FCP4 side; and
B4 & B5 settings are effective when the JP1 is set to the FCP3B side.)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-20 FMD (ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell, ProSeed)
Illustration 2–27 FMD
LED
CN1
CN3
DIP SW
CN2
CN4
Switch Settings
D SW08A1 – FMD Address Mapping – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4

B2-B3 : FMD Address Mapping on SYSTEM BUS
B3(SW1) B2(SW2) Address(Hex)

0 0 1800000 - 2FFFFFF
0 1 3000000 - 47FFFFF
1 0 2000000 - 37FFFFF
1 1 3800000 - 4FFFFFF
Note
When FMD is installed in slot #39, check the switch settings on FCP3B in slot #38 and on DMP4 in slot
#31.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-21 FPA +FPAM (ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell, ProSeed)
Jumper Settings
No jumper to set.
Switch Settings
No switch to set.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-22 FPA2 (ProSpeed Plus, Accell EI, ProSeed EF)
Illustration 2–28 FPA2
SW1
Switch Settings
D SW1 – Normally set according to the table below
Slot # Used FPA2 in Slot #40 FPA2 in Slot #39

for FPA2
B3 B0 B3 B0
#40 only 0 0 - -
#40 & #39 1 0 1 1
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
B0 : FPA2 No., `1': FPA2 No. = #2, `0': FPA2 No. = #1

B3 : FSTR (Fast Recon Mode for General Memory),
`1': Fast Recon Mode, `0`: Normal Recon Mode

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-23 DBM +M32W (or M64W)
Illustration 2–29 DBM
PIGGYBACK BOARD (M32W ASSY

OR M64W ASSY)
Jumper Settings
No jumper to set.
Switch Settings
No switch to set.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
Switch Settings for M64W ASSY

Set as illustrated below.
M64W ASSY
U157
4
3
2
N 1
O

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-24 BPU
Illustration 2–30 BPU
LED
CN1
DIP SW
CN2
Switch Settings
ON
`1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
B0 : DA-B. Set to '1'

B1 : DA-A. Set to '0'
B2 : MSTR. Set to '0'

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-25 PDC
Illustration 2–31 PDC
JP1B2
SW6A1
Jumper Settings
D JP1B2 – Power–on Reset Enable/Disable – Normally set as illustrated below.
N
Normal Setting: Enabled
For Low voltage (below 4.75 V) test: Disabled
Switch Settings
D SW6A1 – Test Mode – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
`1'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 `0'
Calibration Call. `1': Calibration Call, `0': Normal

YMON Call. `1': YMON Call, `0': Normal
Off-line Test Call. `1': Off-line Test Call, `0': Normal

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-26 OC INTF3
Illustration 2–32 OC INTF3
SW3
J1 SW4
J3-2 J4
J10
J3-1 J6 J7
J9
J5
J2
J8
Switch Settings
D SW3, SW4 – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW3 SW4

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-26 OC INTF3 (continued)
Jumper Settings
D J1 – Buzzer volume for Cooling Wait End – Normally set as illustrated below.
MAX 1 2
3 4
MIN 5 6
D J2 – Buzzer volume for X–ray exposure – Normally set as illustrated below.
1 3 5
2 4 6
MAX MIN
D J3–1, J3–2 – TG communication – Normally set as illustrated below.
NML NML
TEST TEST
J3-1 J3-2
D J4 – Tone for Touch Panel – Normally set as illustrated below.
1 3 5
2 4 6
HI LO
D J5 – Volume for the Touch Panel. Normally set as illustrated below
1 3 5
2 4 6
MAX MIN

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-4-26 OC INTF3 (continued)

D J6 – Normally set as illustrated below
2AMP
1 2 3
D J7 – Normally set as illustrated below
2AMP
1 2 3
D J8 – Volume for Auto Voice for the OC speaker. Normally set as illustrated below
1 3 5
2 4 6
MAX MIN
D J9, J10 – Normally set as illustrated below
1 2 3 1 2 3

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-5 BACKBOARD
Illustration 2–33 (F)ZJBB Assy
(F)ZJBB ASSY ZDCBB ASSY
J31 ∼ J231
J152 J172
J162

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-5 BACKBOARD (continued)

D J141 ~ J231 – Daisy Chain Connection. Set as described below.
Jumper Plug No. Slot No. Circuit Board Set
J141 Slot#31 DMP4 open

J151, 152 Slot#29 FMP2 or FMP3 open
J161, 162 Slot#28 MRX open
J171, 172 Slot#27 SCSI open
J191 Slot#25 MTC close (see Note)
J181 Slot#26 ODC2 close (see Note)
J131 Slot#32 ISC open
J201 Slot#24 DMP2 close (see Note)
J211 Slot#23 DMP2 close (see Note)
J221 Slot#22 COMX3 close (see Note)
J231 Slot#21 NEMA3 close (see Note)
(Setting Example)
- BG4 -
- BG3 -
- BG2 -
- BG1 -
- BG0 -
- IACK -
(Close) (Open)
Note
Open all six jumper plugs if that slot contains a circuit board.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-6 HARD DISK DRIVE (ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell, ProSeed)
Illustration 2–34 Hard Disk Drive
MANUFACTURING
ADJUSTMENT ONLY
JP2
21 1
22 2 JP3
JP4
JP1
JP6
JP5 1
2
3 1
4 2
TERMINATOR
LED1
LED2
LED3

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-6 HARD DISK DRIVE (continued) (ProSpeed VX, ProSpeed, Accell, ProSeed)

D JP1 D JP2 D JP3
22 21 16 15 4 3
2 1
14 13 D JP5
4 3
2 1 2 1
2 1
D JP4 D JP6
12 11 12 11 2 1
2 1 2 1
(For Standard Disk) (For Auxiliary Disk)
Terminator
D (For Standard Disk)
Leave all four terminators on the disk.
D (For Auxiliary Disk)

Remove four 4 terminators from the disk.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-7 HARD DISK DRIVE (ProSpeed Plus, Accell EI, ProSeed EF)
2-7-1 HDD U0048ZA
Illustration 2–35 Hard Disk Drive (U0048ZA)

HARD DISK
DRIVE
THESE NUMBERS ARE NOT
PRINTED ON THE BOARD
TERMINATOR
MODULE
POWER 8
SUPPLY 2 10
CONNECTOR CNH11
1 1 9
CNH10
SW1
SCSI 6 5
CONNECTOR
2 1

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-7-1 HDD U0048ZA (continued)
For HD#00 For HD#01
D CNH10 D CNH11 D CNH10 D CNH11

2 4 6 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5 1 3 5
1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9
D SW1 D SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON ON
(`2' only to OFF) (`2' only to OFF)
OFF OFF
D Terminator Module: INSTALLED D Terminator Module: REMOVED
The numbers for the jumpers and switches above correspond to the numbers
written in Illustration 2-35.
For CNH11, different numbers are printed on the Board from ones written in
Illustration 2-35; ignore the numbers printed on the Board.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-7-2 HDD 2143341

IMPORTANT NOTE:
There are two types of HDD 2143341 in the field.
POWER
SUPPLY
CONNECTOR
HARD DISK
DRIVE
CNH1
SCSI
CONNECTOR TERMINATOR MODULE
HD#0 HD#1
CNH1 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
ID = #0 ID = #1
Terminator Module INSTALLED REMOVED

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 12 2205009
2-7-2 HDD 2143341 (Continued)
Illustration 2–36 Hard Disk Drive (2143341) (Continued)
CNH3
3.5 INCH HDD
CNH1
HD#0 HD#1
CNH1 2 16 2 16
1 15 1 15
ID = #0 ID = #1
CNH3 2 2
4 4
1 3 1 3

CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 3 – GANTRY
3-1 TGP BOARD
3-1-1 Dip Switches
WARNING!
UNCONTROLLED GANTRY RESPONSE! CONFIRM THAT THE DIP SWITCHES ON THE TGP
BOARD ARE SET AS DESCRIBED IN TABLE 3–1, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. IF ANY
OF THE SWITCHES ARE SET TO ON, THE GANTRY MIGHT BEHAVE DANGEROUSLY.
If any settings of the TGP dip switches are changed and then reset to their original settings, verify the following accord-
ing to Table 3–3.
1. Set the cradle to its OUT limit position.
2. Lower the Table, and verify that the Table stops at the specified height.
3. Raise the Table to its UP limit position.
4. Move the cradle in the IN direction, and verify that the cradle stops at the specified position.
Normal Setting
Table 3–1 Normal Setting of TGP Dip SW
DIP SWITCH LOCATION NORMAL SETTING

∼

∼

∼

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-1-1 Dip Switches (continued)
Biopsy Mode Setting
Table 3–2 Biopsy Mode Setting of TGP Dip SW
BIOPSY MODE SETTING

ALL SW EXCEPT G4: OFF
OFF
ON G4 ONLY
Biopsy Mode: 0/270 degree positioning light mode
Compact Siting Mode 1 & 2 Settings

For a TP ROM (location: U3P) whose part number is 2106128–2 or later, Compact Siting (Short Foot Print) Mode
1 and/or 2 are available according to the table below. This mode setting should be performed according to an option
service manual (currently, not yet released).
Table 3–3 Compact Siting Mode
DIP SWITCH SETTING FUNCTION

T2 ON Compact Siting Mode 2
The Table down limit is set to -300 mm.
Normally (T2: OFF), it is set to -570 m.
T4 ON Compact Siting Mode 1
The cradle does not move in the IN direction if it is in the IN
limit position which is set at -150 mm height.
Normally (T4: OFF), the IN limit is set to
(OUT Limit + 1520 mm - Longitudinal Correction);
(Longitudinal Correction) is 0 mm at -605 mm height)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-1-2 Service Switches

The following five switches on the TGP Board provide the off–line control of Gantry rotation.
Illustration 3–1 TGP Service Switches

°
NOTICE
Do not set the SYS/OFF/MNL switch to OFF except in emergency while the Gantry is rotating,
or the static brake will be damaged.
Note
1. Do not repeatedly accelerate and decelerate the Gantry over a limited period of time; this may
cause ‘OVER LOAD ERROR’ in the servo amplifier.
2. The Gantry might act abnormally if it has been rotated by hand. If this occurs, then press the reset
button on the TGP Board.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-1-2 Service Switches (continued)
SWITCH SWITCH POSITION FUNCTION

SYS The Gantry rotation is controlled by system
(Normal Position)
SYS OFF The Gantry will not rotate
SVE (Servo Enable) Signal: OFF
OFF Voltage Command to Servo Amp: 0V
Static Brake: On
MNL MNL The Gantry rotation is controlled with ABT/SVE/FIX,
SPD2/SPD1/SPD0, FAST/MID/SLOW, CONT/HOME/90_
switches

ABT This is a spring loaded switch which starts rotating the Gantry
and enables the rotation final position to be determined by the
CONT/HOME/90_ switch
ABT Rotation Speed: 15.0 sec/Rev
SVE SVE The Gantry will not rotate
(Normal Position) SVE (Servo Enable) Signal: ON
FIX Voltage Command to Servo Amp: 0V
FIX Same as ABT except that the speed is determined by
SPD2/SPD1/SPD0 and FAST/MID/SLOW switches
SWITCH ROTATION SPEED

SPD0 SPD1 SPD2
(Normal Position)
SLOW 15 sec/Rev 4 sec/Rev 1.5 sec/Rev
SPD2
SPD1 MID 10 sec/Rev 3 sec/Rev 1.0 sec/Rev

(Normal Position)
SPD0
FAST FAST 5 sec/Rev 2 sec/Rev 0.8 sec/Rev
MID
The rotation speed is determined by a combination of the two switch settings as above.
SLOW
CONT CONT Continuous rotation
HOME Home (zero degrees) position

HOME (Normal Position)
90° 90_ 90_ position

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-2 SERVO AMPLIFIER
Table 3–4 Normal Setting of Servo Amp Dip SW
DIP SWITCH NORMAL SETTING


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-3 SWITCHES AT GANTRY REAR BASE
SWITCH NORMAL FUNCTION

SETTING
$(( $+& # $& ( #(&- , ! "$($&
(- $$% #!' # '!' ( !$' # $ ( (- $$%
! !( $+& # $& ! )%$+#
&! #$)( # #(&- ( !(
$#(&$! $+& # $& $& $& (

! % # $+& # $& $"%$##(' $# ( &$(( * &" ".
%&()&
$#(&$!!&
$#(&$!!& $& (

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-4 OGP BOARD

(Qj, Zj)

According to the ROM part number and the PDU model ( ) the system has, the dip switch set-

tings on the OGP Board should be changed as shown in Table 3–5.

Dip Switch (SW3) Location: 13A
(Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

According to the PDU model ( ) the system has, the dip switch settings on the OGP Board

should be changed as shown in Table 3–5.

Dip Switch (SW3) Location: 13A

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-4 OGP BOARD (continued)
Table 3–5 Normal Setting of OGP Dip SW (SW3)

(Qj, Zj)
ROM PART NO. NORMAL SETTING

PDU: P9180AB OR P9180AF PDU: 2121798

(Qj–Base)

PDU: P9180AB OR P9180AF PDU: 2121798


PDU: P9180AB OR P9180AF PDU: 2121798


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-5 DTRE BOARD (Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

Remove the DTRE bracket cover to set/verify jumper settings. For more information, refer to the Component Re-
placement manual.
Illustration 3–2 DTRE Board
JP1
JP8 JP8
JP7
JP6
JP9
The JP8 location is here

for 2128051-4 DTRE
JUMPER NORMAL SETTING

JP1
(Communication Protocol Selection;
Command Mode or Test Mode)
JP8 For Gantry 2123xxx, 2117xxx For Gantry 2137xxx, 2175xxx

(Taxi Signal Output On/Off)
TAXI OFF TAXI OFF

JP6, 7
(SHT: S/R - Ground continuity mode
OPN: S/R open mode)
(These jumpers do not exist on DTRE

Board whose part number is
2128051-3 or 2128051-4)
JP9 (for 2128051-4 DTRE)
(Pseudo Random Data Output On/ (No jumper plug)
Off)

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
3-6 GANTRY COVER SAFETY BRACKET

The three safety switches which are disengaged by removing the Gantry right side cover, as shown in Illustration 3–3,
have the following functions when disengaged:
D Disables the closing of the Safety Loop
D Disables the Gantry rotation control
D Cuts the Gantry rotation alarm sounds
Illustration 3–3 Switches for Rotate Safety and Safety Loop


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 4 – DAS
4-1 ADC BOARD (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
Illustration 4–1 ADC Board

SWITCH/JUMPER NORMAL SETTING

#!$
"#
! "#
#!$
"#

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
4-2 CIF BOARD (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)
Illustration 4–2 CIF Board


"!$%!
#! "!$%!


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 8 2205009
4-3 CIF BOARD (Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
Illustration 4–3 CIF Board
J3
J1 J2 J4
SW2 J5
SW1
J6 J7 J8 J9
CIF ASSY

SW1 `0' position
SW2 `NORMAL' position
J1, J2, J3 ÒN' position
J4 ÒFF' position
J5, J6 ÒN' position
J7 `NORM' position
J8, J9 ÒFF' position

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
4-4 OFFSET COMP. BOARD (Qj, Qj–Base, Zj)


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
4-5 DTRE BOARD (Qj, Zj)

#

$# ( $#' $& ( $* '(( #
D
$& ")'( ( $& !(&
D %&( #)"& $

$& $# ( ")'(
#

$# ( $#' $& ( $* '(( #
D
$& ")'( ( $& $&
D %&( #)"& $

$& $# ( ")'(

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
4-6 DTR2 BOARD (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt)


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 5 – X–RAY GENERATOR
5-1 MOTHER BOARD
Illustration 5–1 Jumpers on Mother Board (Part #: 2118878)


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-2 CPU BOARD
5-2-1 Old Type CPU Board
Jumpers
Illustration 5–2 Normal Jumper and Switch Settings (Old Type)

Switches
D Push Switch S1: aborts the system software loading
D Push Switch S2: resets the CPU Board

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-2-2 New Type CPU Board
Jumpers
Illustration 5–3 Normal Jumper and Switch Settings (New Type)
! !

∼

"

Switches
D Push Switch RAZ: resets the CPU Board
D Push Switch GOTST: not used

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-3 ROTOR BOARD
5-3-1 Part No.: 2100826
Illustration 5–4 Jumpers on Rotor Board (Part No.: 2100826)

Table 5–1 Jumper Setting on Rotor Board
JUMPER POSITION FUNCTION NORMAL

SETTING
! !! f

! !!
! !! !! f

! !! !!

# "$ $

# "$ $ f

# "$ $

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-3-2 Part No.: 2121852
Illustration 5–5 Jumpers on Rotor Board (Part No.: 2121852)

Table 5–2 Jumper Setting on Rotor Board
JUMPER NORMAL FUNCTION

POSITION
!
! !!
!
! !! !!
! !! "! ! ! ! #


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-4 KV BOARD
Jumpers
Only one jumper ST1 exists on the kV Board. Refer to Illustration 5–6. ST1 has four possible positions:
Illustration 5–6 Jumpers on KV Board
XJ2 XJ1
ETIQUETTE
ST1
NOR
TAN
TANTCA
TCA
Table 5–3 Jumper Setting on KV Board
POSITION FUNCTION NORMAL

SETTING
NOR Non-test mode. The green LED `NOR' lights ON. f
TAN Anode test (Anode inverter & HV tank). The yellow LED `TAN' lights ON.
TCA Cathode test (Cathode inverter & HV tank). The yellow LED `TCA' lights ON.
TANTCA Anode and cathode test. The yellow LED `TANTCA' lights ON.

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
5-5 CTVRC BOARD
Jumpers
Normal settings of JP1 through JP8: ‘ZJ’ side
Optical Fiber Cables

Remove the optical fiber cables between the following:
D U53 and U101
D U100 and U124
D U87 and U184
D U180 and U175
Illustration 5–7 Jumpers and Optical Fiber Cables on CTVRC Board
OPTICAL FIBER
CABLES
JUMPERS JUMPERS


CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
SECTION 6 – PDU (POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT)
6-1 DCRGS – CONTROL BOARD (TOP BOARD) (PDU: P9180AB/AF)
Table 6–1 Control Board Switch
SWITCH SETTING FUNCTION


CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-2 DCRGS – ENERPO CONTROL BOARD (SECOND BOARD) (PDU: P9180AB/AF)
Table 6–2 ENERPO Control Board Jumper
JUMPER SETTING FUNCTION

Illustration 6–1 ENERPO Jumper Location

PDU

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
6-3 PANEL COMMON PDU BOARD (PDU: 2121798)
JUMPER/SWITCH NORMAL POSITION

Illustration 6–2 Switch and Jumper Locations

PDU


CT PROSPEED SERIES
blank 2205009

CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
APPENDIX A – SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION
Symbol Publication Description
417–5032 Alternating Current
335–1 Three–phase Alternating Current

3
335–1 Three–phase Alternating Current with neutral con-

3N ductor
Direct Current
417–5019 Protective Earth (Ground)
348 Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS
417–5008 OFF (Power: disconnection from the mains)
417–5007 ON (Power: connection to the mains)
Warning, HIGH VOLTAGE
Emergency Stop
A–1 APPENDIX
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
APPENDIX A – SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION (continued)
Symbol Publication Description

Type B
417–5339 X–ray Source Assembly Emitting
417–5009 Standby
Start
Table Set
Abort
Intercom
(on Operator Console)

Power On: light on
Standby: light off
A–2 APPENDIX
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
Symbol Description
Microphone (Mic)
Contrast
Brightness
_
System storage prior to installation:
Maintain storage temperature between –10° C and +60° C
_
System storage prior to installation:

Maintain non–condensing storage
humidity below 95%
DO NOT store system longer than 90 days

System storage and shipment:

Maintain Air Pressure between 750 and 1060hPa

A–3 APPENDIX
CT PROSPEED SERIES
REV 0 2205009
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
Any permanently installed equipment containing operator or patient accessible surfaces must provide backup protec-
tion against electric shock,in case the BASIC INSULATION fails. In addition to BASIC INSULATION,Class1 equip-
ment contains a direct connection to a PROTECTIVE(EARTH) CONDUCTOR which prevents shocks when a person
touches a broken piece of equipment or touches two different equipment surfaces simultaneously.
TYPE B EQUIPMENT
CLASS I, II, or III EQUIPMENT or EQUIPMENT with INTERNAL ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES provide an ade-
quate degree of protection against electric shock arising from (allowable) LEAKAGE CURRENTS or a breakdown
in the reliability of the protective earth connection.
ORDINARY EQUIPMENT
Enclosed EQUIPMENT without protection against the ingress of water.
OPERATION 0f EQUIPMENT
CONTINUOUS OPERATION WITH INTERMITTENT LOADING.
Operation in which EQUIPMENT is connected continuously to the SUPPLY MAINS. The stated permissible loading
time is so short that the long term on–load operating temperature is not attained. The ensuing interval in loading is,
however, not sufficiently long for cooling down to the long term no–load operating temperature.
EQUIPMENT not suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR or WITH
OXYGEN or NITROUS OXIDE
CLEANING
The ProSpeed S series system is NOT WATERPROOF. It is NOT designed to protect internal components against
the ingress of liquids.Clean external system surfaces(Gantry,table,consoles and accessories)with a soft cloth dipped
in hot water and wrung DAMP/DRY. (NOT dripping!) IF NECESSARY, use only mild (dish washing liquid) soap to re-
move dirt.
NOTICE
Avoid damage to equipment! Some ”spray and wipe”cleaners etch and permanently cloud
clear plastic surfaces!! Use only warm water and mild liquid soap to clean surfaces.
A–4 APPENDIX
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371
P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Medical Systems – Europe: Telex 698626

283, rue de la Miniére, B.P. 34, 78533 Buc Cedex, France

Funcional Check Update

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Funcional Check Update

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Technical

Copyrighte 1998-2003 by General Electric Company

D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA

D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

  

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Devices not to be used near this equipment:

REV DATE PRIMARY REASON FOR CHANGE

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Torque Notation Changed to SI Unit

1 kgfScm = 0.098 NSm

1 NSm = 10.2 kgfScm

Referrence for lbfSft

SECTION 1 – GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

SECTION 2 – TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

SECTION 3 – COMMON PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

1-1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Before Using This Manual

1-1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL (continued)

CT Products to Which This Manual Applies to:

Table 1–1 Product Name and Code Name

Code Name Product Name

GEMS–AM GEMS–E GEMS–A GEYMS

Qj ProSpeed S ProSpeed S ProSpeed S –

ProSpeed SX ProSpeed SX ProSpeed SX Lemage

Qj–Base ProSpeed ProSpeed S Fast ProSpeed Lemage SX/E

– ProSpeed SX Power ProSpeed SX Power Lemage SX

Qj–Hlt ProSpeed ProSpeed SX Power ProSpeed Lemage Supreme

– ProSpeed SX Advantage ProSpeed SX Advantage –

Zj–Adv – ProSpeed Advantage ProSpeed Advantage ProSeed SA

Zj ProSpeed VX ProSpeed VX ProSpeed VX ProSeed Accell

ProSpeed ProSpeed ProSpeed ProSeed

ProSpeed Plus ProSpeed Plus ProSpeed Plus ProSeed EF

1-1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL (continued)

Table 1–2 Differences among Product Families

Code Name Operator Console Detector

Liquid Crystal Plasma

Use of This Manual

D A post–FMI (Field Modification Instruction) check to verify system operation.

D A pre–diagnostic check to verify or determine failure symptoms before or during troubleshooting.

1-2 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE

1-2-2 Operator Console

Turn OFF power before removing or inserting any board or plug.

1-3 CE MARKING LABEL (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)

SECTION 2 – TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING

TABLE 2–1 Stud Bolt (Steel) with Locktite

Screw Size Torque [kg–cm]

2-1 NORMAL SCREWS

TABLE 2–2 Pan Head Screw

Screw Size Torque [kg–cm] (Unless otherwise specified)

M 1.7 0.90 0.96 1.2

TABLE 2–3 Binder Screw

Screw Size Torque [kg–cm] (Unless otherwise specified)

TABLE 2–4 Flat Head Screw

Screw Size Torque [kg–cm] (Unless otherwise specified)

M 1.7 1.1 1.2 1.5

2-2 HEXAGON SCREWS

TABLE 2–5 Hexagon Screw

Screw Size Torque [kg–cm] (Unless otherwise specified)